Manuali utente per Nortel Networks 555-4001-135

Sommario

• Nortel Communication Server 1000/ Nortel Communication Server 2100/Meridian SL-100

  1
• Publication history

  5
  • Publication history

    5
  • July 2006

    5
    • July 2006

      5
      • July 2006

        5
        • July 2006

          5
        • Standard 02.00 ICB Release 4. This document is up-issued to address CR Q01140878,

          5
          • Standard 02.00 ICB Release 4. This document is up-issued to address CR Q01140878,

            5
            • Standard 02.00 ICB Release 4. This document is up-issued to address CR Q01140878,

              5
              • Procedure 13, “Configure initial card parameters using the CLI” on page 71

                5
    • Standard 01.00, ICB Release 4.

      5
      • Standard 01.00, ICB Release 4.

        5
        • Standard 01.00, ICB Release 4.

          5
• Contents

  7
• About this document

  13
  • About this document

    13
  • Purpose and audience

    13
    • Purpose and audience

      13
    • This document instructs system administrators and installers how to install, configure, operate, and maintain the Nortel Network...

      13
      • This document instructs system administrators and installers how to install, configure, operate, and maintain the Nortel Network...

        13
    • You can install the ICB card in either the Meridian 1, Communication Server 1000 (CS 1000), or CS 2100/Meridian SL-100. In the m...

      13
  • Structure

    13
    • Structure

      13
    • This document contains the following sections:

      13
      • This document contains the following sections:

        13
      • . “Product description” on page 17 - describes how the ICB operates and the conference features it provides, as well as the card hardware and software characteristics.

        13
        • . “Product description” on page 17 - describes how the ICB operates and the conference features it provides, as well as the card hardware and software characteristics.

          13
          • . “Product description” on page 17 - describes how the ICB operates and the conference features it provides, as well as the card hardware and software characteristics.

            13
            • . “Product description” on page 17

              13
        • . “Engineering guidelines” on page 35 - describes ICB system resource allocation, and software and hardware requirements.

          13
          • . “Engineering guidelines” on page 35 - describes ICB system resource allocation, and software and hardware requirements.

            13
            • . “Engineering guidelines” on page 35

              13
        • . “Installation and configuration” on page 45 - describes how to prepare the system for installation, install the ICB card, connect the ICB to the administration terminal, a...

          13
          • . “Installation and configuration” on page 45 - describes how to prepare the system for installation, install the ICB card, connect the ICB to the administration terminal, a...

            13
            • . “Installation and configuration” on page 45

              13
        • . “Browser user interface” on page 79 - describes how to use the browser user interface (BUI), a web-based server, for conference administration and scheduling, as well as user administration and maintenance of the ICB.

          14
          • . “Browser user interface” on page 79 - describes how to use the browser user interface (BUI), a web-based server, for conference administration and scheduling, as well as user administration and maintenance of the ICB.

            14
            • . “Browser user interface” on page 79

              14
        • . “Telephone user interface” on page 135 - describes how to use the telephone user interface (TUI) for simple conference reservation, as well as lists commands available to participants during an active conference.

          14
          • . “Telephone user interface” on page 135 - describes how to use the telephone user interface (TUI) for simple conference reservation, as well as lists commands available to participants during an active conference.

            14
            • . “Telephone user interface” on page 135

              14
        • . “Microsoft Outlook GUI” on page 151 - describes how to use the Microsoft Outlook GUI for audio conference reservations.

          14
          • . “Microsoft Outlook GUI” on page 151 - describes how to use the Microsoft Outlook GUI for audio conference reservations.

            14
            • . “Microsoft Outlook GUI” on page 151

              14
        • . “Maintenance” on page 169 - shows how to perform maintenance and troubleshooting operations. Includes a description of the Command Line Interface (CLI).

          14
          • . “Maintenance” on page 169 - shows how to perform maintenance and troubleshooting operations. Includes a description of the Command Line Interface (CLI).

            14
            • . “Maintenance” on page 169

              14
        • . “Reports” on page 195 - introduces the reports that the ICB can generate and describes billing.

          14
          • . “Reports” on page 195 - introduces the reports that the ICB can generate and describes billing.

            14
            • . “Reports” on page 195

              14
        • . “Upgrades” on page 211 - provides procedures for upgrading to ICB Release 4 from previous releases.

          14
          • . “Upgrades” on page 211 - provides procedures for upgrading to ICB Release 4 from previous releases.

            14
            • . “Upgrades” on page 211

              14
        • . “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223 - describes ICB password protection and access restrictions.

          14
          • . “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223 - describes ICB password protection and access restrictions.

            14
            • . “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223

              14
        • . “Appendix B: Product integrity” on page 233 - provides environmental specifications and shows regulatory standards.

          14
          • . “Appendix B: Product integrity” on page 233 - provides environmental specifications and shows regulatory standards.

            14
            • . “Appendix B: Product integrity” on page 233

              14
        • . “List of terms” on page 237 - describes the terms used in this guide.

          14
          • . “List of terms” on page 237 - describes the terms used in this guide.

            14
            • . “List of terms” on page 237

              14
  • How to check the version and issue of this document

    14
    • How to check the version and issue of this document

      14
    • The version and issue of the document are indicated by numbers (for example, 00.03).

      14
    • The first two digits indicate the version. The version number increases each time the document is updated to support a new softw...

      14
    • The second two digits indicate the issue. The issue number increases each time the document is revised, but re-released in the same software release cycle. For example, the second release of a document in the same software release cycle is 01.02.

      14
      • The second two digits indicate the issue. The issue number increases each time the document is revised, but re-released in the same software release cycle. For example, the second release of a document in the same software release cycle is 01.02.

        14
      • <TABLE>

        15
        • <TABLE BODY>

          15
          • <TABLE ROW>

            15
            • FOR MORE INFORMATION

              15
              • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                15
                • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                  15
  • References in this document

    15
    • References in this document

      15
    • Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000

      15
      • Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000

        15
      • If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000, see the following documents for additional information:

        15
        • If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000, see the following documents for additional information:

          15
        • . Large System Management, 553-3021-500

          15
          • . Large System Management, 553-3021-500

            15
            • . Large System Management, 553-3021-500

              15
          • . Large System Planning, 553-3021-120

            15
            • . Large System Planning, 553-3021-120

              15
          • . Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182

            15
            • . Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182

              15
          • . Call Detail Recording, 553-3001-100

            15
            • . Call Detail Recording, 553-3001-100

              15
          • . Input/Output Administration, 553-3001-311

            15
            • . Input/Output Administration, 553-3001-311

              15
          • . Features and Services, 553-3001-306

            15
            • . Features and Services, 553-3001-306

              15
    • Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000S

      15
      • Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000S

        15
      • If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000S, see the following documents for additional information:

        15
        • If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000S, see the following documents for additional information:

          15
        • . Planning and Installation Guide, 553-3031-120

          15
          • . Planning and Installation Guide, 553-3031-120

            15
            • . Planning and Installation Guide, 553-3031-120

              15
          • . Installation and Configuration Guide, 553-3031-210

            15
            • . Installation and Configuration Guide, 553-3031-210

              15
          • . Maintenance Guide, 553-3031-500

            15
            • . Maintenance Guide, 553-3031-500

              15
    • CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100

      15
      • CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100

        15
      • If you are installing the ICB in a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, see the following documents for additional information:

        15
        • If you are installing the ICB in a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, see the following documents for additional information:

          15
        • . IPE Reference Manual, 555-4001-129

          15
          • . IPE Reference Manual, 555-4001-129

            15
            • . IPE Reference Manual, 555-4001-129

              15
          • . Alarm Clearing Procedures, 555-4031-543

            15
            • . Alarm Clearing Procedures, 555-4031-543

              15
          • . Routine Maintenance Procedures, 555-4031-546

            15
            • . Routine Maintenance Procedures, 555-4031-546

              15
          • . Card Replacement Procedures, 555-4031-547

            15
            • . Card Replacement Procedures, 555-4031-547

              15
          • . Log Report Reference Manual, 555-4031-840

            15
            • . Log Report Reference Manual, 555-4031-840

              15
    • End user documentation

      16
      • End user documentation

        16
      • The following documents apply to all platforms:

        16
        • The following documents apply to all platforms:

          16
        • . Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 User Guide, P0989944 - shows end user how to schedule and manage a conference using either the Telephone User Interface or the Browser User Interface.

          16
          • . Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 User Guide, P0989944 - shows end user how to schedule and manage a conference using either the Telephone User Interface or the Browser User Interface.

            16
            • . Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 User Guide, P0989944 - shows end user how to schedule and manage a conference using either the Telephone User Interface or the Browser User Interface.

              16
          • . Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 Quick Reference Card, P0989945 - provides a list of Telephone User Interface commands; comes in a package of 20.

            16
            • . Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 Quick Reference Card, P0989945 - provides a list of Telephone User Interface commands; comes in a package of 20.

              16
• Product description

  17
  • Product description

    17
  • Purpose

    17
    • Purpose

      17
    • This chapter describes the functional and physical characteristics of the Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4...

      17
      • This chapter describes the functional and physical characteristics of the Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4...

        17
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      17
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        17
      • . “ICB description” on page 17 - describes the ICB card and the role it plays in conference calls. Summarizes ICB features and services.

        17
        • . “ICB description” on page 17 - describes the ICB card and the role it plays in conference calls. Summarizes ICB features and services.

          17
          • . “ICB description” on page 17 - describes the ICB card and the role it plays in conference calls. Summarizes ICB features and services.

            17
            • . “ICB description” on page 17

              17
        • . “Hardware overview” on page 21 - describes the hardware components of the ICB system.

          17
          • . “Hardware overview” on page 21 - describes the hardware components of the ICB system.

            17
            • . “Hardware overview” on page 21

              17
        • . “ICB operation” on page 27 - shows how ICB conferences operate.

          17
          • . “ICB operation” on page 27 - shows how ICB conferences operate.

            17
            • . “ICB operation” on page 27

              17
  • ICB description

    17
    • ICB description

      17
    • Conference administration

      17
      • Conference administration

        17
      • The ICB card allows users to schedule and administer multiple simultaneous conferences. Schedule conferences based on time-of-da...

        17
        • The ICB card allows users to schedule and administer multiple simultaneous conferences. Schedule conferences based on time-of-da...

          17
        • . Browser user interface - point and click web-page application

          17
          • . Browser user interface - point and click web-page application

            17
            • . Browser user interface - point and click web-page application

              17
              • . Browser user interface

                17
          • . Telephone user interface - telephone keypad entries

            17
            • . Telephone user interface - telephone keypad entries

              17
              • . Telephone user interface

                17
          • . Microsoft Outlook GUI - Microsoft Office Outlook graphical user interface (GUI)

            17
            • . Microsoft Outlook GUI - Microsoft Office Outlook graphical user interface (GUI)

              17
              • . Microsoft Outlook GUI

                17
          • . Ad hoc meeting - audio conference created now

            17
            • . Ad hoc meeting - audio conference created now

              17
      • The ICB card provides announcements and tones that relate to specific events during conferences. These events include the following:

        18
        • The ICB card provides announcements and tones that relate to specific events during conferences. These events include the following:

          18
        • . advising the chairperson and conferees of the status of the conference connection

          18
          • . advising the chairperson and conferees of the status of the conference connection

            18
            • . advising the chairperson and conferees of the status of the conference connection

              18
          • . indicating when a conferee joins or leaves the conference, and

            18
            • . indicating when a conferee joins or leaves the conference, and

              18
          • . warning the chairperson and the conferees when the conference is about to expire.

            18
            • . warning the chairperson and the conferees when the conference is about to expire.

              18
      • Technicians can install multiple ICB cards into:

        18
        • Technicians can install multiple ICB cards into:

          18
        • . a Media Gateway chassis shelf for a CS 1000

          18
          • . a Media Gateway chassis shelf for a CS 1000

            18
            • . a Media Gateway chassis shelf for a CS 1000

              18
          • . an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) shelf for a Meridian 1/CS 1000

            18
            • . an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) shelf for a Meridian 1/CS 1000

              18
          • . an Option 11 shelf

            18
            • . an Option 11 shelf

              18
          • . an IPE shelf for a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100

            18
            • . an IPE shelf for a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100

              18
      • Each ICB card can operate independently, providing up to 32 ports for a single conference. The ICB card can support up to ten simultaneous, separate conferences.

        18
        • Each ICB card can operate independently, providing up to 32 ports for a single conference. The ICB card can support up to ten simultaneous, separate conferences.

          18
      • When users establish a single-card conference, they use the 32 ports on the card. If two conferences are held at the same time, ...

        18
        • When users establish a single-card conference, they use the 32 ports on the card. If two conferences are held at the same time, ...

          18
      • Technicians can connect two ICB cards to provide up to 62 ports for a single conference. In dual mode, there can be only one dua...

        18
        • Technicians can connect two ICB cards to provide up to 62 ports for a single conference. In dual mode, there can be only one dua...

          18
      • The ICB supports several simultaneous conferences. The number of conferences depends on the number of ICB ports available and the number of participants (conferees) in each conference. Each ICB card supports the following:

        18
        • The ICB supports several simultaneous conferences. The number of conferences depends on the number of ICB ports available and the number of participants (conferees) in each conference. Each ICB card supports the following:

          18
        • . maximum number of participants as follows:

          18
          • . maximum number of participants as follows:

            18
            • . maximum number of participants as follows:

              18
            • - single-card: 32 participants

              18
              • - single-card: 32 participants

                18
                • - single-card: 32 participants

                  18
              • - dual-card: 62 participants (unless Chairperson Control over a Dual-card Meeting is activated, in which case it is 60 participants)

                18
                • - dual-card: 62 participants (unless Chairperson Control over a Dual-card Meeting is activated, in which case it is 60 participants)

                  18
          • . any number of conferences (up to 10) with one or more participants in each conference

            18
            • . any number of conferences (up to 10) with one or more participants in each conference

              18
      • The ICB communicates with the system software by emulating a digital line card (XDLC), which allows existing software to control the operation of the ICB. Configure each ICB port as an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) M2616 digital telephone set.

        19
        • The ICB communicates with the system software by emulating a digital line card (XDLC), which allows existing software to control the operation of the ICB. Configure each ICB port as an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) M2616 digital telephone set.

          19
    • System overview

      19
      • System overview

        19
      • The ICB comes as a single card, or a pair of cards if additional ports are required to support a dual-card meeting. Each card st...

        19
        • The ICB comes as a single card, or a pair of cards if additional ports are required to support a dual-card meeting. Each card st...

          19
        • . Each card (that is, the primary and secondary) has its own set of users. There is no “common list” for both cards.

          19
          • . Each card (that is, the primary and secondary) has its own set of users. There is no “common list” for both cards.

            19
            • . Each card (that is, the primary and secondary) has its own set of users. There is no “common list” for both cards.

              19
          • . To schedule a conference, the user logs into the card in which their account is defined. If the user has two accounts, one on ...

            19
            • . To schedule a conference, the user logs into the card in which their account is defined. If the user has two accounts, one on ...

              19
          • . A user, super-user, or executive-user can have accounts on many cards at a company (that is, a customer can have one person who administers multiple bridges for their company).

            19
            • . A user, super-user, or executive-user can have accounts on many cards at a company (that is, a customer can have one person who administers multiple bridges for their company).

              19
          • . Dual-card conferences can only be scheduled by users on the primary card.

            19
            • . Dual-card conferences can only be scheduled by users on the primary card.

              19
    • ICB conference feature summary

      19
      • ICB conference feature summary

        19
      • The ICB:

        19
        • The ICB:

          19
        • . Allows volume control by conference participants.

          19
          • . Allows volume control by conference participants.

            19
            • . Allows volume control by conference participants.

              19
          • . Offers customized conference-specific greetings.

            19
            • . Offers customized conference-specific greetings.

              19
          • . Enables users to acquire and release chairperson control while in a conference.

            19
            • . Enables users to acquire and release chairperson control while in a conference.

              19
          • . Delivers pre-meeting and post-meeting participants notifications.

            19
            • . Delivers pre-meeting and post-meeting participants notifications.

              19
          • . Allows one chairperson per conference.

            19
            • . Allows one chairperson per conference.

              19
          • . Offers optional chairperson control on the secondary card of a dual-card conference.

            19
            • . Offers optional chairperson control on the secondary card of a dual-card conference.

              19
          • . Provides for one or more permanent bridge configurations.

            19
            • . Provides for one or more permanent bridge configurations.

              19
          • . Supports multiple conferences simultaneously.

            19
            • . Supports multiple conferences simultaneously.

              19
          • . Provides chairperson commands during an active conference.

            19
            • . Provides chairperson commands during an active conference.

              19
          • . Provides conferee commands during an active conference.

            19
            • . Provides conferee commands during an active conference.

              19
          • . Allows conference extension beyond the scheduled time.

            19
            • . Allows conference extension beyond the scheduled time.

              19
          • . Issues a 10-minute warning, before the conference termination. Also issues a second warning, two minutes before conference termination.

            20
            • . Issues a 10-minute warning, before the conference termination. Also issues a second warning, two minutes before conference termination.

              20
          • . Supports dial-in and voice prompts for multiple languages including: N.A. English, Latin-American Spanish, French, Brazilian P...

            20
            • . Supports dial-in and voice prompts for multiple languages including: N.A. English, Latin-American Spanish, French, Brazilian P...

              20
          • . Provides conference password security, requiring the chairperson and/or the conferees to enter a Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) password before entering the conference.

            20
            • . Provides conference password security, requiring the chairperson and/or the conferees to enter a Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) password before entering the conference.

              20
          • . Automatically starts and terminates conferences based on reservations scheduled in advance.

            20
            • . Automatically starts and terminates conferences based on reservations scheduled in advance.

              20
          • . Provides Group Call with smart retry.

            20
            • . Provides Group Call with smart retry.

              20
          • . Provides the ability to reserve a port in each conference for the chairperson.

            20
            • . Provides the ability to reserve a port in each conference for the chairperson.

              20
          • . Provides “Block scheduling” for recurrent conferences, up to one year in advance and up to 52 iterations of recurrent conferences.

            20
            • . Provides “Block scheduling” for recurrent conferences, up to one year in advance and up to 52 iterations of recurrent conferences.

              20
          • . Offers an over-booking option, enabling the administrator to allocate up to 125% of port resources (based on the idea that most conferences are scheduled with more ports than are required).

            20
            • . Offers an over-booking option, enabling the administrator to allocate up to 125% of port resources (based on the idea that most conferences are scheduled with more ports than are required).

              20
          • . Provides an emergency bridge option, which creates a permanent bridge that automatically dials a pre-determined list of DNs when someone dials the emergency bridge DN. The emergency bridge does not support the dual-card configuration.

            20
            • . Provides an emergency bridge option, which creates a permanent bridge that automatically dials a pre-determined list of DNs when someone dials the emergency bridge DN. The emergency bridge does not support the dual-card configuration.

              20
          • . Provides automatic conference expansion, allowing additional conferees to join the conference. For the expansion to work, the ports hosting the additional conferees must be both unassigned and available.

            20
            • . Provides automatic conference expansion, allowing additional conferees to join the conference. For the expansion to work, the ports hosting the additional conferees must be both unassigned and available.

              20
          • . Provides entry and exit indications - provides four options to indicate the entry and exit of a conference participant:

            20
            • . Provides entry and exit indications - provides four options to indicate the entry and exit of a conference participant:

              20
              • - entry by name, exit by name

                20
                • - entry by name, exit by name

                  20
                  • - entry by name, exit by name

                    20
              • - entry by name, exit by tone

                20
                • - entry by name, exit by tone

                  20
                  • - entry by name, exit by tone

                    20
              • - entry by tone, exit by tone

                20
                • - entry by tone, exit by tone

                  20
                  • - entry by tone, exit by tone

                    20
              • - silent entry and exit

                20
                • - silent entry and exit

                  20
                  • - silent entry and exit

                    20
          • . Allows the first conferee joining the conference to turn off and turn on conference music.

            20
            • . Allows the first conferee joining the conference to turn off and turn on conference music.

              20
          • . Controls access to the conference in progress by monitoring the maximum number of scheduled attendees at each conference.

            21
            • . Controls access to the conference in progress by monitoring the maximum number of scheduled attendees at each conference.

              21
          • . Manages time and date for scheduled conferences and reserves ports for each conference.

            21
            • . Manages time and date for scheduled conferences and reserves ports for each conference.

              21
          • . Provides recorded announcements to conferees who attempt to enter a meeting too early or after a meeting has ended.

            21
            • . Provides recorded announcements to conferees who attempt to enter a meeting too early or after a meeting has ended.

              21
          • . Issues audible responses to conferees based on the conference activity.

            21
            • . Issues audible responses to conferees based on the conference activity.

              21
          • . Allows recording of a brand line (custom) greeting to replace the standard greeting.

            21
            • . Allows recording of a brand line (custom) greeting to replace the standard greeting.

              21
          • . Provides a scheduling display that indicates meeting reference number and whether a custom greeting has been created.

            21
            • . Provides a scheduling display that indicates meeting reference number and whether a custom greeting has been created.

              21
          • . Provides scheduling receipts e-mailed to users (receipt includes the direct meeting access DN or the single DN access DN).

            21
            • . Provides scheduling receipts e-mailed to users (receipt includes the direct meeting access DN or the single DN access DN).

              21
          • . Provides for Microsoft Outlook integration using the calendar to schedule meetings.

            21
            • . Provides for Microsoft Outlook integration using the calendar to schedule meetings.

              21
          • . Provides a second warning tone before ending the conference.

            21
            • . Provides a second warning tone before ending the conference.

              21
          • . Allows users to copy a conference.

            21
            • . Allows users to copy a conference.

              21
          • . Allows the chairperson control of the conferee volume.

            21
            • . Allows the chairperson control of the conferee volume.

              21
          • . Provides current speaker indication.

            21
            • . Provides current speaker indication.

              21
          • . Allows for questions and voting display.

            21
            • . Allows for questions and voting display.

              21
          • . Provides for default conference settings.

            21
            • . Provides for default conference settings.

              21
          • . Allows users in the ICB card to access audio conference scheduling in Microsoft Outlook.

            21
            • . Allows users in the ICB card to access audio conference scheduling in Microsoft Outlook.

              21
          • . Supports 500 users per card.

            21
            • . Supports 500 users per card.

              21
          • . Provides for up to 52 recurring conferences.

            21
            • . Provides for up to 52 recurring conferences.

              21
          • . Allows the administrator to define a time zone.

            21
            • . Allows the administrator to define a time zone.

              21
          • . Offers a toll-free prefix in the e-mail notification.

            21
            • . Offers a toll-free prefix in the e-mail notification.

              21
          • . Provides separate user, chairperson, and administrator context help.

            21
            • . Provides separate user, chairperson, and administrator context help.

              21
          • . Provides enhancements to the billing report.

            21
            • . Provides enhancements to the billing report.

              21
  • Hardware overview

    21
    • Hardware overview

      21
    • Figure 1 on page 22 shows ICB system composition.

      21
      • Figure 1 on page 22 shows ICB system composition.

        21
        • Figure 1 on page 22

          21
      • Figure 1 ICB system composition

        22
        • Figure 1 ICB system composition

          22
    • ICB hardware design characteristics

      23
      • ICB hardware design characteristics

        23
      • Each ICB card occupies one slot in a Media Gateway chassis slot (CS 1000) or an IPE shelf (Meridian 1/CS 1000/CS 2100/SL-100). ICB Release 4 is based on a new hardware platform. The ICB card has the following hardware interface characteristics:

        23
        • Each ICB card occupies one slot in a Media Gateway chassis slot (CS 1000) or an IPE shelf (Meridian 1/CS 1000/CS 2100/SL-100). ICB Release 4 is based on a new hardware platform. The ICB card has the following hardware interface characteristics:

          23
        • . uses the microprocessor unit (MPU) based on the 50MHz MPC 860P Power Quad Integrated Communications Controller

          23
          • . uses the microprocessor unit (MPU) based on the 50MHz MPC 860P Power Quad Integrated Communications Controller

            23
            • . uses the microprocessor unit (MPU) based on the 50MHz MPC 860P Power Quad Integrated Communications Controller

              23
          • . uses standard interface buses and personal computer memory card international association (PCMCIA) cards and handles files tha...

            23
            • . uses standard interface buses and personal computer memory card international association (PCMCIA) cards and handles files tha...

              23
          • . uses 4MB flash memory for boot purposes

            23
            • . uses 4MB flash memory for boot purposes

              23
          • . accesses all 32 DS-30X voice/signaling timeslots

            23
            • . accesses all 32 DS-30X voice/signaling timeslots

              23
          • . provides echo cancelling and volume control

            23
            • . provides echo cancelling and volume control

              23
          • . users 128 KB SRAM memory for saving trap data during resets

            23
            • . users 128 KB SRAM memory for saving trap data during resets

              23
          • . emulates an M2616 digital telephone set on each ICB port

            23
            • . emulates an M2616 digital telephone set on each ICB port

              23
          • . supports Card-LAN interfaces

            23
            • . supports Card-LAN interfaces

              23
          • . performs X12 signaling protocol messages for input/output

            23
            • . performs X12 signaling protocol messages for input/output

              23
          • . uses digital signal processor (DSP) for conferencing and DTMF detection

            23
            • . uses digital signal processor (DSP) for conferencing and DTMF detection

              23
          • . provides the drivers for the new hardware through the MPU firmware

            23
            • . provides the drivers for the new hardware through the MPU firmware

              23
          • . The DSP firmware:

            23
            • . The DSP firmware:

              23
            • - Provides DTMF tone detection.

              23
              • - Provides DTMF tone detection.

                23
                • - Provides DTMF tone detection.

                  23
              • - Provides for A-law and u-law conversion.

                23
                • - Provides for A-law and u-law conversion.

                  23
              • - Provides the functionality for the conference bridge.

                23
                • - Provides the functionality for the conference bridge.

                  23
              • - Downloads the code from the MPU.

                23
                • - Downloads the code from the MPU.

                  23
              • - Communicates with the MPU.

                23
                • - Communicates with the MPU.

                  23
              • - Analyzes the loudness off all received signals continuously and selects the two loudest signals to be the active speakers.

                23
                • - Analyzes the loudness off all received signals continuously and selects the two loudest signals to be the active speakers.

                  23
              • - Handles two-way conversation in conferences with three to 62 conferees.

                23
                • - Handles two-way conversation in conferences with three to 62 conferees.

                  23
              • - Normalizes the pulse code modulation (PCM) input samples.

                23
                • - Normalizes the pulse code modulation (PCM) input samples.

                  23
              • - Provides gain control on all output samples.

                23
                • - Provides gain control on all output samples.

                  23
              • - Provides software upgrades using a PCMCIA Flash card.

                23
                • - Provides software upgrades using a PCMCIA Flash card.

                  23
          • . provides self-tests of internal hardware components and allows card monitoring and maintenance through the maintenance port; provides enable/disable capabilities similar to existing Meridian cards

            24
            • . provides self-tests of internal hardware components and allows card monitoring and maintenance through the maintenance port; provides enable/disable capabilities similar to existing Meridian cards

              24
          • . provides one RS-232 serial port for administration and maintenance access

            24
            • . provides one RS-232 serial port for administration and maintenance access

              24
          • . provides enhanced Call Detail Recording (CDR - Meridian 1 only) and billing options

            24
            • . provides enhanced Call Detail Recording (CDR - Meridian 1 only) and billing options

              24
          • . provides an optional Ethernet interface over a Maintenance interface

            24
            • . provides an optional Ethernet interface over a Maintenance interface

              24
          • . provides a Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible by direct connection, modem, telnet, or BUI emulation for performing OA&M functions

            24
            • . provides a Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible by direct connection, modem, telnet, or BUI emulation for performing OA&M functions

              24
          • . enables the reservation of one port on each card for TUI-only interaction

            24
            • . enables the reservation of one port on each card for TUI-only interaction

              24
          • . provides an embedded web-based server

            24
            • . provides an embedded web-based server

              24
          • . provides a customized ICB BUI login window

            24
            • . provides a customized ICB BUI login window

              24
          • . offers automatic backup. Backup configurations can be e-mailed to a predefined e-mail address

            24
            • . offers automatic backup. Backup configurations can be e-mailed to a predefined e-mail address

              24
      • Table 1 describes each hardware component of the ICB application. These components connect the ICB to the local or remote maintenance terminal.

        24
        • Table 1 describes each hardware component of the ICB application. These components connect the ICB to the local or remote maintenance terminal.

          24
          • Table 1

            24
        • <TABLE>

          24
          • Table 1 ICB hardware list

            24
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            24
            • <TABLE ROW>

              24
              • Component

                24
              • Description

                24
          • <TABLE BODY>

            24
            • <TABLE ROW>

              24
              • NT5D51BC or higher ICB card

                24
              • An IPE card that provides bridge and conference scheduling for up to 10 simultaneous conferences.

                24
            • <TABLE ROW>

              24
              • NT5D62FA or later PCMCIA hard drive card

                24
              • This PCMCIA card contains the ICB software and configuration. Install the PCMCIA card in the lower PCMCIA drive.

                24
            • <TABLE ROW>

              24
              • NT5D52 Ethernet Adapter card

                24
              • Install this adapter card to provide Ethernet connection for the ICB.

                24
                • Note 1: NT5D52BC for CS 1000, CS 1000M, Meridian Option 11C, and Meridian SL-100.

                  24
                  • Note 1: NT5D52BC for CS 1000, CS 1000M, Meridian Option 11C, and Meridian SL-100.

                    24
                • Note 2: NT5D52CA is used for Meridian Options 51-81C.

                  24
                  • Note 2: NT5D52CA is used for Meridian Options 51-81C.

                    24
        • Note: Caution - You may need the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a large system. See

          24
          • Note: Caution - You may need the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a large system. See

            24
            • “Installing the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a Large System” on page 47

              24
      • ICB card description

        25
        • ICB card description

          25
        • The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards store the ICB voice files, application scripts, and MPU and DSP fir...

          25
          • The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards store the ICB voice files, application scripts, and MPU and DSP fir...

            25
        • Figure 2 shows the component side of the ICB card and the faceplate. The component side shows the DRAM and the PCMCIA socket locations. ...

          25
          • Figure 2 shows the component side of the ICB card and the faceplate. The component side shows the DRAM and the PCMCIA socket locations. ...

            25
            • Figure 2

              25
          • Figure 2 ICB card

            25
            • Figure 2 ICB card

              25
        • The ICB faceplate provides the following:

          25
          • The ICB faceplate provides the following:

            25
        • Maintenance LED - The ICB faceplate provides a red LED to indicate the enabled/disabled status of the card and to indicate the self-testing result during power up or card insertion into an operating system. This LED indicates the following:

          25
          • Maintenance LED - The ICB faceplate provides a red LED to indicate the enabled/disabled status of the card and to indicate the self-testing result during power up or card insertion into an operating system. This LED indicates the following:

            25
          • . The LED is lit when the ICB card is disabled.

            26
            • . The LED is lit when the ICB card is disabled.

              26
              • . The LED is lit when the ICB card is disabled.

                26
            • . The LED is off when the ICB card is enabled and ready for use.

              26
              • . The LED is off when the ICB card is enabled and ready for use.

                26
            • . The LED blinks three times, runs software from the PCMCIA, then blinks three times again and stays on. The LED remains on until the software is enabled when the ICB card successfully completes the self-test.

              26
              • . The LED blinks three times, runs software from the PCMCIA, then blinks three times again and stays on. The LED remains on until the software is enabled when the ICB card successfully completes the self-test.

                26
        • PCMCIA activity indicator LEDs - These LEDs are next to the PCMCIA slots and indicate the following:

          26
          • PCMCIA activity indicator LEDs - These LEDs are next to the PCMCIA slots and indicate the following:

            26
          • . The LED is lit when the PCMCIA card is disabled.

            26
            • . The LED is lit when the PCMCIA card is disabled.

              26
              • . The LED is lit when the PCMCIA card is disabled.

                26
            • . The LED is off when the PCMCIA card is enabled and ready for use.

              26
              • . The LED is off when the PCMCIA card is enabled and ready for use.

                26
            • . The LED blinks when the PCMCIA card is in use.

              26
              • . The LED blinks when the PCMCIA card is in use.

                26
        • Type II/III PCMCIA slots - The ICB faceplate provides two Type II/III PCMCIA card slots. These slots house the PCMCIA cards. Ins...

          26
          • Type II/III PCMCIA slots - The ICB faceplate provides two Type II/III PCMCIA card slots. These slots house the PCMCIA cards. Ins...

            26
    • External equipment

      26
      • External equipment

        26
      • VT100 type terminal

        26
        • VT100 type terminal

          26
        • Use a VT100 terminal for initial card configuration. After initial card configuration, use the BUI to perform operations, administration and maintenance (OA&M). Connect the terminal to the ICB RS-232 interface using one of the following methods:

          26
          • Use a VT100 terminal for initial card configuration. After initial card configuration, use the BUI to perform operations, administration and maintenance (OA&M). Connect the terminal to the ICB RS-232 interface using one of the following methods:

            26
          • . Direct connections:

            26
            • . Direct connections:

              26
              • . Direct connections:

                26
              • - directly to the IPE module I/O panel

                26
                • - directly to the IPE module I/O panel

                  26
                  • - directly to the IPE module I/O panel

                    26
                • - directly to the DB-9 connector on the NT5D52 Ethernet Adapter card installed on the I/O panel

                  26
                  • - directly to the DB-9 connector on the NT5D52 Ethernet Adapter card installed on the I/O panel

                    26
            • . Remote connections:

              26
              • . Remote connections:

                26
              • - to the IPE module I/O panel through a modem connection

                26
                • - to the IPE module I/O panel through a modem connection

                  26
                  • - to the IPE module I/O panel through a modem connection

                    26
        • The terminal interface must be set at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The flow control is hard wired (do not use XON/XOFF flow control).

          26
          • The terminal interface must be set at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The flow control is hard wired (do not use XON/XOFF flow control).

            26
      • Ethernet application

        27
        • Ethernet application

          27
        • ICB Ethernet use has the following characteristics:

          27
          • ICB Ethernet use has the following characteristics:

            27
          • . The ICB Ethernet connection is separated from the external LAN traffic by a firewall.

            27
            • . The ICB Ethernet connection is separated from the external LAN traffic by a firewall.

              27
              • . The ICB Ethernet connection is separated from the external LAN traffic by a firewall.

                27
            • . The Ethernet Adapter connection for ICB is NT5D52AA for the IPE module application.

              27
              • . The Ethernet Adapter connection for ICB is NT5D52AA for the IPE module application.

                27
            • . The Ethernet provider assigns the IP address for the ICB. Enter the IP address from the Maintenance terminal.

              27
              • . The Ethernet provider assigns the IP address for the ICB. Enter the IP address from the Maintenance terminal.

                27
            • . To access the ICB CLI over the Ethernet, use a TELNET client on a PC workstation or in the LAN.

              27
              • . To access the ICB CLI over the Ethernet, use a TELNET client on a PC workstation or in the LAN.

                27
  • ICB operation

    27
    • ICB operation

      27
    • The ICB provides flexibility in configuring conferences. Configure conferences as follows:

      27
      • The ICB provides flexibility in configuring conferences. Configure conferences as follows:

        27
      • . pre-scheduled conferences with a fixed number of ports and start/stop times

        27
        • . pre-scheduled conferences with a fixed number of ports and start/stop times

          27
          • . pre-scheduled conferences with a fixed number of ports and start/stop times

            27
        • . pre-scheduled conferences with a variable numbers of ports, where ports are added when required (if available) and subtracted by the system automatically as conferees leave the conference

          27
          • . pre-scheduled conferences with a variable numbers of ports, where ports are added when required (if available) and subtracted by the system automatically as conferees leave the conference

            27
        • . permanent bridges with fixed numbers of ports that can be used without pre-scheduling the conference

          27
          • . permanent bridges with fixed numbers of ports that can be used without pre-scheduling the conference

            27
    • The minimum duration of a conference is 15 minutes and the maximum duration of a time-limited conference is 12 hours. The conference starting time and duration can be scheduled in increments of 15 minutes.

      27
      • The minimum duration of a conference is 15 minutes and the maximum duration of a time-limited conference is 12 hours. The conference starting time and duration can be scheduled in increments of 15 minutes.

        27
    • The ICB card continuously monitors the audio signal level received from each conferee and selects the two loudest signals for tr...

      27
      • The ICB card continuously monitors the audio signal level received from each conferee and selects the two loudest signals for tr...

        27
    • In addition to the conferee timeslots, the ICB provides a timeslot between the MPU and the DSP. This timeslot transmits message prompts, entry and exit tones, or both that the system broadcasts to all conferees when requested by the MPU.

      27
      • In addition to the conferee timeslots, the ICB provides a timeslot between the MPU and the DSP. This timeslot transmits message prompts, entry and exit tones, or both that the system broadcasts to all conferees when requested by the MPU.

        27
    • The ICB uses ACD features to route external incoming trunk and local line conferees to their appropriate conferences. The ACD features provide queuing, chairperson features, and event reporting for each conference.

      28
      • The ICB uses ACD features to route external incoming trunk and local line conferees to their appropriate conferences. The ACD features provide queuing, chairperson features, and event reporting for each conference.

        28
    • The ACD features used by the ICB card provide the following:

      28
      • The ACD features used by the ICB card provide the following:

        28
      • . easy software configuration

        28
        • . easy software configuration

          28
          • . easy software configuration

            28
        • . incoming calls, announcement on arrival, call management, and reporting queues

          28
          • . incoming calls, announcement on arrival, call management, and reporting queues

            28
        • . operational statistics reports

          28
          • . operational statistics reports

            28
        • . enhanced call routing

          28
          • . enhanced call routing

            28
    • Figure 3 shows the call routing for three conferences and shows the conference chairperson access DN for each conference. The figure als...

      28
      • Figure 3 shows the call routing for three conferences and shows the conference chairperson access DN for each conference. The figure als...

        28
        • Figure 3

          28
      • Figure 3 Call routing with chairperson access

        29
        • Figure 3 Call routing with chairperson access

          29
    • Join the conference using the direct meeting access method

      29
      • Join the conference using the direct meeting access method

        29
      • Assign a main DN and a chairperson DN, for each conference. The main DN is the number the conferees dial to get into the confere...

        29
        • Assign a main DN and a chairperson DN, for each conference. The main DN is the number the conferees dial to get into the confere...

          29
      • When several conferences occur simultaneously in the same ICB card, the conferee dials the DN assigned to a specific conference....

        30
        • When several conferences occur simultaneously in the same ICB card, the conferee dials the DN assigned to a specific conference....

          30
      • The ICB performs DTMF detection on ICB ports identified as chairperson ports. DTMF detects when conferees enter a conference pas...

        30
        • The ICB performs DTMF detection on ICB ports identified as chairperson ports. DTMF detects when conferees enter a conference pas...

          30
      • The first conferee joining the conference hears an announcement indicating that no other conferee has joined the conference, fol...

        30
        • The first conferee joining the conference hears an announcement indicating that no other conferee has joined the conference, fol...

          30
    • Join the conference using the single DN access method

      30
      • Join the conference using the single DN access method

        30
      • The single DN access method to all meetings provides users with a alternative method of accessing the ICB. This feature reduces ...

        30
        • The single DN access method to all meetings provides users with a alternative method of accessing the ICB. This feature reduces ...

          30
        • . Saves 20 DID numbers from the customer’s DID range.

          30
          • . Saves 20 DID numbers from the customer’s DID range.

            30
            • . Saves 20 DID numbers from the customer’s DID range.

              30
          • . Saves 20 ACD or Phantom DNs in the Meridian system thereby providing a cost savings.

            30
            • . Saves 20 ACD or Phantom DNs in the Meridian system thereby providing a cost savings.

              30
          • . Simplifies installation as there is no DN pair configuration.

            30
            • . Simplifies installation as there is no DN pair configuration.

              30
          • . Saves work if a change in the numbering plan is required in the Meridian system.

            30
            • . Saves work if a change in the numbering plan is required in the Meridian system.

              30
      • The only trade-off is that callers have an additional step when accessing a meeting (that is, after dialing the single-access DN, they must enter the chairperson, or meeting, DN of their specific meeting).

        30
        • The only trade-off is that callers have an additional step when accessing a meeting (that is, after dialing the single-access DN, they must enter the chairperson, or meeting, DN of their specific meeting).

          30
      • Figure 4 on page 31 shows the DN configuration for single DN access with one ICB card.

        30
        • Figure 4 on page 31 shows the DN configuration for single DN access with one ICB card.

          30
          • Figure 4 on page 31

            30
        • Figure 4 Single DN access method (one ICB card)

          31
          • Figure 4 Single DN access method (one ICB card)

            31
      • The DNs on the left in

        31
        • The DNs on the left in

          31
          • Figure 4

            31
      • In a dual-card system, each card requires its own single-access DN. In a dual-card set, conferences that span the two cards do n...

        31
        • In a dual-card system, each card requires its own single-access DN. In a dual-card set, conferences that span the two cards do n...

          31
      • Figure 5 on page 32 shows the DN configuration in a Meridian system for the single DN access method when the system uses two ICB cards. Single DN access requires one DN, instead of the separate 10 DNs required with direct meeting access.

        31
        • Figure 5 on page 32 shows the DN configuration in a Meridian system for the single DN access method when the system uses two ICB cards. Single DN access requires one DN, instead of the separate 10 DNs required with direct meeting access.

          31
          • Figure 5 on page 32

            31
      • The figure shows a configuration that supports the following:

        31
        • The figure shows a configuration that supports the following:

          31
        • . Simple conference contained in the primary ICB - participants dial the single-access DN at the top of the figure.

          31
          • . Simple conference contained in the primary ICB - participants dial the single-access DN at the top of the figure.

            31
            • . Simple conference contained in the primary ICB - participants dial the single-access DN at the top of the figure.

              31
          • . Simple conferences contained on the secondary ICB - participants dial the single-access DN at the bottom of the figure.

            31
            • . Simple conferences contained on the secondary ICB - participants dial the single-access DN at the bottom of the figure.

              31
          • . Meetings spanning both cards - participants dial the “Dual meeting main DN” in the middle of the figure and the chairperson dials the “Dual meeting chairperson DN”. The figure shows that dual-card meetings do not use the single-access DNs.

            31
            • . Meetings spanning both cards - participants dial the “Dual meeting main DN” in the middle of the figure and the chairperson dials the “Dual meeting chairperson DN”. The figure shows that dual-card meetings do not use the single-access DNs.

              31
      • Figure 5 Single DN access method (two ICB cards)

        32
        • Figure 5 Single DN access method (two ICB cards)

          32
          • Figure 5 Single DN access method (two ICB cards)

            32
        • Note: All DNs on the left side of the figure must be DID numbers.

          32
          • Note: All DNs on the left side of the figure must be DID numbers.

            32
      • Single DN access is mutually exclusive from the direct meeting access method in a ICB card or card pair. Configure the card for one access method; the system does not support combinations on the card or card pair.

        33
        • Single DN access is mutually exclusive from the direct meeting access method in a ICB card or card pair. Configure the card for one access method; the system does not support combinations on the card or card pair.

          33
      • Callers to all meetings access the ICB by dialing one common fixed number. The ICB prompts the caller for the meeting or chairpe...

        33
        • Callers to all meetings access the ICB by dialing one common fixed number. The ICB prompts the caller for the meeting or chairpe...

          33
    • Expand the conference

      33
      • Expand the conference

        33
      • Conference expansion allows the system to increase the number of conferees if there are remaining ICB ports that are both unassi...

        33
        • Conference expansion allows the system to increase the number of conferees if there are remaining ICB ports that are both unassi...

          33
          • “Scheduling window” on page 89

            33
      • When reserving the ICB ports for each simultaneous conference, the system does not tag ports for a specific conference. The ICB ...

        33
        • When reserving the ICB ports for each simultaneous conference, the system does not tag ports for a specific conference. The ICB ...

          33
      • If additional (non-scheduled) callers try to join a conference, but there are no floating ports, or the system locks out additional conferees, the ICB card issues an overflow tone. The system then disconnects the call.

        33
        • If additional (non-scheduled) callers try to join a conference, but there are no floating ports, or the system locks out additional conferees, the ICB card issues an overflow tone. The system then disconnects the call.

          33
      • If the system releases un-scheduled (floating) ports from a conference, they are immediately available to be used by other conferences that have the expansion feature enabled.

        33
        • If the system releases un-scheduled (floating) ports from a conference, they are immediately available to be used by other conferences that have the expansion feature enabled.

          33
    • End the conference

      33
      • End the conference

        33
      • When scheduling a conference, indicate the number of ports, start time, and duration of that conference. The conference ends bas...

        33
    • When the conference time expires, the ICB card issues the final warning to the conferees. The ICB sends a release message to the...

      34
      • When the conference time expires, the ICB card issues the final warning to the conferees. The ICB sends a release message to the...

        34
        • When the conference time expires, the ICB card issues the final warning to the conferees. The ICB sends a release message to the...

          34
      • Conferees can exit a conference at any time. The ICB detects when a conferee exits the conference. If enabled, the ICB announces...

        34
        • Conferees can exit a conference at any time. The ICB detects when a conferee exits the conference. If enabled, the ICB announces...

          34
        • Note: A conference can begin and end two minutes before the defined time. This feature allows the system to close all terminatin...

          34
          • Note: A conference can begin and end two minutes before the defined time. This feature allows the system to close all terminatin...

            34
• Engineering guidelines

  35
  • Engineering guidelines

    35
  • Purpose

    35
    • Purpose

      35
    • This chapter provides guidelines for engineering ICB Release 4. Engineering guidelines can vary depending on the system platform. The chapter includes the following sections:

      35
      • This chapter provides guidelines for engineering ICB Release 4. Engineering guidelines can vary depending on the system platform. The chapter includes the following sections:

        35
      • . “System requirements” on page 35 - outlines the software and hardware requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

        35
        • . “System requirements” on page 35 - outlines the software and hardware requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

          35
          • . “System requirements” on page 35 - outlines the software and hardware requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

            35
            • . “System requirements” on page 35

              35
        • . “System capacity” on page 37 - outlines the system capacity requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

          35
          • . “System capacity” on page 37 - outlines the system capacity requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

            35
            • . “System capacity” on page 37

              35
        • . “System compatibility” on page 37 - lists the various compatible systems.

          35
          • . “System compatibility” on page 37 - lists the various compatible systems.

            35
            • . “System compatibility” on page 37

              35
        • . “Automatic call distribution resource allocation” on page 38 - describes the ACD DN resource requirements.

          35
          • . “Automatic call distribution resource allocation” on page 38 - describes the ACD DN resource requirements.

            35
            • . “Automatic call distribution resource allocation” on page 38

              35
        • . “LAN configuration” on page 40 - provides guidelines for configuring the LAN options.

          35
          • . “LAN configuration” on page 40 - provides guidelines for configuring the LAN options.

            35
            • . “LAN configuration” on page 40

              35
  • System requirements

    35
    • System requirements

      35
    • Software

      35
      • Software

        35
      • The required system software is as follows:

        35
        • The required system software is as follows:

          35
        • . Meridian 1 - X11 Release 17 supports ICB Release 4 with up to 16 ports per card; X11 Release 22 and later supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card.

          35
          • . Meridian 1 - X11 Release 17 supports ICB Release 4 with up to 16 ports per card; X11 Release 22 and later supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card.

            35
            • . Meridian 1 - X11 Release 17 supports ICB Release 4 with up to 16 ports per card; X11 Release 22 and later supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card.

              35
          • . CS 1000 - Release 1 and above supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card.

            35
            • . CS 1000 - Release 1 and above supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card.

              35
          • . Meridian SL-100 - MSL09 and later supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card using the feature Flexible Voice/Data TN.

            35
            • . Meridian SL-100 - MSL09 and later supports ICB Release 4 with up to 32 ports per card using the feature Flexible Voice/Data TN.

              35
      • The system software must contain the basic and advanced automatic call distribution (ACD) features and routing software.

        35
        • The system software must contain the basic and advanced automatic call distribution (ACD) features and routing software.

          35
      • Meridian 1 and CS 1000 software packages

        36
        • Meridian 1 and CS 1000 software packages

          36
        • In addition to standard basic software, the following software packages are required:

          36
          • In addition to standard basic software, the following software packages are required:

            36
        • . ACD basic package (45)

          36
          • . ACD basic package (45)

            36
            • . ACD basic package (45)

              36
              • . ACD basic package (45)

                36
            • . ACD advanced features (41)

              36
              • . ACD advanced features (41)

                36
            • . Digital set (88)

              36
              • . Digital set (88)

                36
            • . End-to-end signaling (10) - required if chairperson calls locally within the same switch

              36
              • . End-to-end signaling (10) - required if chairperson calls locally within the same switch

                36
            • . Phantom TN (254), optional, but required if Phantom TN is used

              36
              • . Phantom TN (254), optional, but required if Phantom TN is used

                36
            • . Network ACD Enhanced Overflow (178), optional, but required for the dual-card configuration

              36
              • . Network ACD Enhanced Overflow (178), optional, but required for the dual-card configuration

                36
            • . The following packages are optional, but are required for billing:

              36
              • . The following packages are optional, but are required for billing:

                36
              • - Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4

                36
                • - Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4

                  36
                  • - Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4

                    36
                • - CDR with Charge Account (CHG) package 23

                  36
                  • - CDR with Charge Account (CHG) package 23

                    36
                • - Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24

                  36
                  • - Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24

                    36
      • Meridian SL-100 software packages

        36
        • Meridian SL-100 software packages

          36
        • In addition to the standard Meridian SL-100 software, the following software packages are required:

          36
          • In addition to the standard Meridian SL-100 software, the following software packages are required:

            36
        • . ACD Basic, ACD Routing Enhancement

          36
          • . ACD Basic, ACD Routing Enhancement

            36
            • . ACD Basic, ACD Routing Enhancement

              36
              • . ACD Basic, ACD Routing Enhancement

                36
            • . MSL Digital Phones M2000-Display

              36
              • . MSL Digital Phones M2000-Display

                36
            • . MSL Flex LEN on IPE

              36
              • . MSL Flex LEN on IPE

                36
            • . MSL Enhanced Peripheral Equipment (IPE)

              36
              • . MSL Enhanced Peripheral Equipment (IPE)

                36
    • Hardware

      36
      • Hardware

        36
      • Table 2 describes the ICB hardware specifications.

        36
        • Table 2 describes the ICB hardware specifications.

          36
          • Table 2

            36
        • <TABLE>

          36
          • Table 2 Hardware specifications

            36
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            36
            • <TABLE ROW>

              36
              • Item

                36
              • Descriptions

                36
          • <TABLE BODY>

            36
            • <TABLE ROW>

              36
              • Port capacity

                36
              • 12-32 ports on a single card. Up to 62 ports in a dual-card configuration, unless chairperson control is required on the second card, in which case the capacity is 60 ports.

                36
            • <TABLE ROW>

              36
              • Capacity upgrades

                36
              • Upgradeable from 12 to 62 ports.

                36
            • <TABLE ROW>

              36
              • Maximum number of conferences

                36
              • Up to 10 simultaneous conferences with a total of 32 conferee ports per card.

                36
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • Maximum number of BUI sessions

                37
              • Up to 20 simultaneous user sessions on the BUI. Same is true in dual-card configuration. There can be up to 500 users per card.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • Maximum number of TUI sessions

                37
              • Only one user can be active in a TUI session. While one TUI user is active, other users will wait in the ACD queue.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • PCMCIA card

                37
              • PCMCIA Type II or III.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • System interface

                37
              • DS-30X, CE-MUX, Card LAN, Ethernet Adapter.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • Maintenance terminal

                37
              • Optivity, VT-100 terminal or PC with VT100 emulation.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • Power requirements

                37
              • Power is supplied by the power supply of the shelf/module where the ICB card is installed. Each ICB card requires a total maximum power of 3.5 watts.

                37
            • <TABLE ROW>

              37
              • Real time impact

                37
              • Comparable to that of a digital line card (DLC).

                37
  • System capacity

    37
    • System capacity

      37
    • Physical Capacity

      37
      • Physical Capacity

        37
      • Each ICB card occupies one slot on the Gateway/IPE chassis shelf. The total number of ICB cards per system is limited by these factors:

        37
        • Each ICB card occupies one slot on the Gateway/IPE chassis shelf. The total number of ICB cards per system is limited by these factors:

          37
        • . For Meridian 1 or CS 1000M: The number of IPE shelves multiplied by eight. Option 11C and Wall-Mount systems are limited to six cards.

          37
          • . For Meridian 1 or CS 1000M: The number of IPE shelves multiplied by eight. Option 11C and Wall-Mount systems are limited to six cards.

            37
            • . For Meridian 1 or CS 1000M: The number of IPE shelves multiplied by eight. Option 11C and Wall-Mount systems are limited to six cards.

              37
          • . For CS 1000: The number of Gateway chassis shelves multiplied by four cards.

            37
            • . For CS 1000: The number of Gateway chassis shelves multiplied by four cards.

              37
          • . For CS 2100/Meridian SL-100: Up to eight cards can be supported per IPE shelf.

            37
            • . For CS 2100/Meridian SL-100: Up to eight cards can be supported per IPE shelf.

              37
  • System compatibility

    37
    • System compatibility

      37
    • Meridian 1 and Option 11

      37
      • Meridian 1 and Option 11

        37
      • ICB Release 4 is compatible with the following Meridian 1/Option 11 systems:

        37
        • ICB Release 4 is compatible with the following Meridian 1/Option 11 systems:

          37
        • . Option 11C, 11E, 11C Mini

          37
          • . Option 11C, 11E, 11C Mini

            37
            • . Option 11C, 11E, 11C Mini

              37
          • . Option 21 and 21E

            37
            • . Option 21 and 21E

              37
          • . Option 51, 51C

            37
            • . Option 51, 51C

              37
          • . Option 61, 61C

            37
            • . Option 61, 61C

              37
          • . Option 71

            37
            • . Option 71

              37
          • . Option 81, 81C

            38
            • . Option 81, 81C

              38
          • . SL-1 systems with IPE upgrade (NT and XT)

            38
            • . SL-1 systems with IPE upgrade (NT and XT)

              38
    • CS 1000

      38
      • CS 1000

        38
      • ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 1000 systems.

        38
        • ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 1000 systems.

          38
    • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system compatibility

      38
      • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system compatibility

        38
      • ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system configurations.

        38
        • ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system configurations.

          38
  • Automatic call distribution resource allocation

    38
    • Automatic call distribution resource allocation

      38
    • The ACD function routes incoming calls to the ICB, where each ICB port operates as an ACD agent. All ICB ports are part of the s...

      38
      • The ACD function routes incoming calls to the ICB, where each ICB port operates as an ACD agent. All ICB ports are part of the s...

        38
    • ACD resources must be reviewed in the Incremental Software Management (ISM) of the customer configuration, if applicable. Each ICB port represents an ACD agent that uses a Terminal Number (TN)/Line Equipment Number (LEN) from the system resources.

      38
      • ACD resources must be reviewed in the Incremental Software Management (ISM) of the customer configuration, if applicable. Each ICB port represents an ACD agent that uses a Terminal Number (TN)/Line Equipment Number (LEN) from the system resources.

        38
    • The configuration DN and the corresponding TNs on the CS 1000, or LENs on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, are system resources. The...

      38
      • The configuration DN and the corresponding TNs on the CS 1000, or LENs on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, are system resources. The...

        38
      • Note: If a customer uses Agent ID and the direct meeting access method, the agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 00-31).

        38
        • Note: If a customer uses Agent ID and the direct meeting access method, the agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 00-31).

          38
    • Each ICB card, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

      38
      • Each ICB card, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

        38
        • Each ICB card, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

          38
          • Each ICB card, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

            38
          • . One ACD group for each ICB card.

            38
            • . One ACD group for each ICB card.

              38
              • . One ACD group for each ICB card.

                38
          • . Assign ACD agent TNs/LENs and corresponding M2616 digital sets. Each configured ICB port appears as an M2616 digital set of an...

            38
            • . Assign ACD agent TNs/LENs and corresponding M2616 digital sets. Each configured ICB port appears as an M2616 digital set of an...

              38
              • . Assign ACD agent TNs/LENs and corresponding M2616 digital sets. Each configured ICB port appears as an M2616 digital set of an...

                38
            • . An ICB card configured to the maximum capacity of 32 ports and 10 simultaneous conferences requires 87 ACD DNs and 32 TNs/LENs as follows:

              39
              • . An ICB card configured to the maximum capacity of 32 ports and 10 simultaneous conferences requires 87 ACD DNs and 32 TNs/LENs as follows:

                39
              • - one ACD DN assigned to the ICB card

                39
                • - one ACD DN assigned to the ICB card

                  39
                  • - one ACD DN assigned to the ICB card

                    39
                • - 32 TNs/LENs assigned to the 32 ports (1 PDN and 1 SDN for each TN/LEN; these can be internal DNs - non-DID)

                  39
                  • - 32 TNs/LENs assigned to the 32 ports (1 PDN and 1 SDN for each TN/LEN; these can be internal DNs - non-DID)

                    39
                • - 20 ACD DID DNs (10 DN pairs) for dialing into the potential conferences

                  39
                  • - 20 ACD DID DNs (10 DN pairs) for dialing into the potential conferences

                    39
                  • Note: For single-number access, replace this with 1 DN.

                    39
                    • Note: For single-number access, replace this with 1 DN.

                      39
                • - 1 DN for TUI access

                  39
                  • - 1 DN for TUI access

                    39
        • Full 62-port dual-card conferencing, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

          39
          • Full 62-port dual-card conferencing, using the direct meeting access method, requires the following:

            39
          • . Two ICB cards and six ACD groups as follows:

            39
            • . Two ICB cards and six ACD groups as follows:

              39
              • . Two ICB cards and six ACD groups as follows:

                39
              • - 64 ACD agents (32 for each card), non-DID

                39
                • - 64 ACD agents (32 for each card), non-DID

                  39
                  • - 64 ACD agents (32 for each card), non-DID

                    39
                • - 64 secondary DNs for these agents, non-DID

                  39
                  • - 64 secondary DNs for these agents, non-DID

                    39
                • - 36 DNs for simple conferences (9 pairs in each card)

                  39
                  • - 36 DNs for simple conferences (9 pairs in each card)

                    39
                  • Note: For single-number access, replace this with 2 DNs (1 for each card).

                    39
                    • Note: For single-number access, replace this with 2 DNs (1 for each card).

                      39
                • - 1 DN for dual-card conference access

                  39
                  • - 1 DN for dual-card conference access

                    39
                • - 1 DN for dual-card chairperson access

                  39
                  • - 1 DN for dual-card chairperson access

                    39
                • - 1 DN for the link DN, non-DID

                  39
                  • - 1 DN for the link DN, non-DID

                    39
                • - 1 DN for the transfer DN, non-DID

                  39
                  • - 1 DN for the transfer DN, non-DID

                    39
                • - 2 DNs for TUI access (1 for each card)

                  39
                  • - 2 DNs for TUI access (1 for each card)

                    39
              • This provides a total of 170 DNs, 40 of which are DID.

                39
            • . Assign an Ethernet port to each ICB card with an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway during installation.

              39
              • . Assign an Ethernet port to each ICB card with an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway during installation.

                39
          • Note: On the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, verify that there are enough DS30A links back to the extended peripheral module (XPM) to handle the traffic.

            39
            • Note: On the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, verify that there are enough DS30A links back to the extended peripheral module (XPM) to handle the traffic.

              39
  • LAN configuration

    40
    • LAN configuration

      40
    • ICB customers should select one of the following alternatives for BUI access:

      40
      • ICB customers should select one of the following alternatives for BUI access:

        40
      • . users and administrators access the ICB from the global internet (the new capability of MICB Release 3)

        40
        • . users and administrators access the ICB from the global internet (the new capability of MICB Release 3)

          40
          • . users and administrators access the ICB from the global internet (the new capability of MICB Release 3)

            40
        • . users and administrators access the ICB from the customer LAN/intranet only (existing MICB Release 2 capability)

          40
          • . users and administrators access the ICB from the customer LAN/intranet only (existing MICB Release 2 capability)

            40
    • Global internet access

      40
      • Global internet access

        40
      • Global internet access requires careful configuration of security elements.

        40
        • Global internet access requires careful configuration of security elements.

          40
          • Figure 6

            40
        • Figure 6 Global internet access example

          40
          • Figure 6 Global internet access example

            40
      • In typical configurations, the firewall does not allow any kind of access from the World Wide Web into the C-LAN. Only access from the C-LAN hosts to the World Wide Web is allowed (for example, HTTP and FTP).

        40
        • In typical configurations, the firewall does not allow any kind of access from the World Wide Web into the C-LAN. Only access from the C-LAN hosts to the World Wide Web is allowed (for example, HTTP and FTP).

          40
      • Hosts that need to be accessed from the World Wide Web must be placed in a special sub-network called the Green and Red LAN. The...

        41
        • Hosts that need to be accessed from the World Wide Web must be placed in a special sub-network called the Green and Red LAN. The...

          41
      • On the other hand, C-LAN hosts require open access to the ICB for administration and maintenance.

        41
        • On the other hand, C-LAN hosts require open access to the ICB for administration and maintenance.

          41
      • Table 3 summarizes the recommended access permissions allowed by the firewall. All other paths not in the table should be denied.

        41
        • Table 3 summarizes the recommended access permissions allowed by the firewall. All other paths not in the table should be denied.

          41
          • Table 3

            41
        • <TABLE>

          41
          • Table 3 Firewall access permissions

            41
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • Source

                41
              • Destination

                41
              • Protocol

                41
          • <TABLE BODY>

            41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • WWW

                41
              • ICB

                41
              • HTTP

                41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • C-LAN

                41
              • ICB

                41
              • HTTP, FTP, TELNET

                41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • ICB

                41
              • WWW

                41
              • FTP (optional; allows upgrade from the web)

                41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • ICB

                41
              • C-LAN

                41
              • FTP

                41
            • <TABLE ROW>

              41
              • ICB

                41
              • Mail Server

                41
              • SMTP

                41
      • Notes

        41
        • Notes

          41
        • Take the following notes into consideration:

          41
          • Take the following notes into consideration:

            41
          • . Technically, a firewall can be configured to enforce these access restrictions even when the ICB is in the C-LAN. However, a Green and Red LAN is usually used, because it is safer.

            41
            • . Technically, a firewall can be configured to enforce these access restrictions even when the ICB is in the C-LAN. However, a Green and Red LAN is usually used, because it is safer.

              41
              • . Technically, a firewall can be configured to enforce these access restrictions even when the ICB is in the C-LAN. However, a Green and Red LAN is usually used, because it is safer.

                41
            • . Cards of a dual-ICB set must be in the same LAN segment, with no restrictions between them.

              41
              • . Cards of a dual-ICB set must be in the same LAN segment, with no restrictions between them.

                41
    • LAN/intranet access only

      41
      • LAN/intranet access only

        41
      • In this configuration, the ICB is not accessible from anywhere in the World Wide Web (assuming this policy is enforced by the firewall). There are two options for this type of configuration: C-LAN connection and E-LAN connection.

        41
        • In this configuration, the ICB is not accessible from anywhere in the World Wide Web (assuming this policy is enforced by the firewall). There are two options for this type of configuration: C-LAN connection and E-LAN connection.

          41
      • Figure 7 on page 42 shows an example of the C-LAN connection.

        41
        • Figure 7 on page 42 shows an example of the C-LAN connection.

          41
          • Figure 7 on page 42

            41
        • Figure 7 LAN/intranet access only - C-LAN connection

          42
          • Figure 7 LAN/intranet access only - C-LAN connection

            42
      • Figure 8 on page 43 shows an example of the E-LAN connection.

        42
        • Figure 8 on page 43 shows an example of the E-LAN connection.

          42
          • Figure 8 on page 43

            42
        • Figure 8 LAN/intranet access only - E-LAN connection

          43
          • Figure 8 LAN/intranet access only - E-LAN connection

            43
    • Notes

      43
      • Notes

        43
      • The following notes apply to LAN/intranet access only:

        43
        • The following notes apply to LAN/intranet access only:

          43
        • . The ICB does not interact with the Meridian system through the E-LAN, so logically there is no requirement to put it there. In addition, if the E-LAN is completely separated from the C-LAN, the ICB cannot be in the E-LAN.

          43
          • . The ICB does not interact with the Meridian system through the E-LAN, so logically there is no requirement to put it there. In addition, if the E-LAN is completely separated from the C-LAN, the ICB cannot be in the E-LAN.

            43
            • . The ICB does not interact with the Meridian system through the E-LAN, so logically there is no requirement to put it there. In addition, if the E-LAN is completely separated from the C-LAN, the ICB cannot be in the E-LAN.

              43
          • . Nortel Networks recommends that customer try not to put any BUI traffic on the E-LAN if possible.

            43
            • . Nortel Networks recommends that customer try not to put any BUI traffic on the E-LAN if possible.

              43
          • . Each site should select the most convenient option, taking into account the physical LAN endpoints available near the ICB card.

            43
            • . Each site should select the most convenient option, taking into account the physical LAN endpoints available near the ICB card.

              43
          • . When there are multiple ICBs (that is, more than three) and the BUI is used frequently, the BUI traffic can load the E-LAN, so it may be better to connect the cards to the C-LAN.

            44
            • . When there are multiple ICBs (that is, more than three) and the BUI is used frequently, the BUI traffic can load the E-LAN, so it may be better to connect the cards to the C-LAN.

              44
          • . The ICB has a broadcast-storm protection mechanism: it shuts off the LAN port (temporarily) when traffic is too heavy. Nortel Networks recommends that the ICB be put in a “quiet” LAN segment to get a better response time.

            44
            • . The ICB has a broadcast-storm protection mechanism: it shuts off the LAN port (temporarily) when traffic is too heavy. Nortel Networks recommends that the ICB be put in a “quiet” LAN segment to get a better response time.

              44
    • Summary of LAN installation information

      44
      • Summary of LAN installation information

        44
      • Use the following steps when installing and configuring the LAN:

        44
        • Use the following steps when installing and configuring the LAN:

          44
        • 1 Determine whether the ICB is to be accessed from the World Wide Web.

          44
          • 1 Determine whether the ICB is to be accessed from the World Wide Web.

            44
            • 1 Determine whether the ICB is to be accessed from the World Wide Web.

              44
          • 2 If yes, coordinate the firewall configuration with your IS group according to

            44
            • 2 If yes, coordinate the firewall configuration with your IS group according to

              44
              • Table 3 on page 41

                44
          • 3 Determine what is the physical connection point of the ICB. Note these requirements: 10Base-T or 100Base-T, full-duplex.

            44
            • 3 Determine what is the physical connection point of the ICB. Note these requirements: 10Base-T or 100Base-T, full-duplex.

              44
          • 4 Get the following ICB IP parameters from your IS group: IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask.

            44
            • 4 Get the following ICB IP parameters from your IS group: IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask.

              44
          • 5 Get the Mail Server IP address from your IS group. Confirm that the ICB is allowed to access this server by SMTP.

            44
            • 5 Get the Mail Server IP address from your IS group. Confirm that the ICB is allowed to access this server by SMTP.

              44
      • Testing:

        44
        • Testing:

          44
        • Use the following steps to test the LAN configuration:

          44
          • Use the following steps to test the LAN configuration:

            44
          • 1 After the ICB is installed and the IP parameters are configured, try to “ping” from any host in the C-LAN to the ICB or from the ICB to a host on the C-LAN.

            44
            • 1 After the ICB is installed and the IP parameters are configured, try to “ping” from any host in the C-LAN to the ICB or from the ICB to a host on the C-LAN.

              44
              • 1 After the ICB is installed and the IP parameters are configured, try to “ping” from any host in the C-LAN to the ICB or from the ICB to a host on the C-LAN.

                44
            • 2 In the case of World Wide Web access, try accessing the ICB from a browser (HTTP access).

              44
              • 2 In the case of World Wide Web access, try accessing the ICB from a browser (HTTP access).

                44
• Installation and configuration

  45
  • Installation and configuration

    45
  • Purpose

    45
    • Purpose

      45
    • This chapter describes how to prepare the system for installation, install the ICB into:

      45
      • This chapter describes how to prepare the system for installation, install the ICB into:

        45
      • . the IPE module for Meridian 1

        45
        • . the IPE module for Meridian 1

          45
          • . the IPE module for Meridian 1

            45
        • . the Option 11 shelf

          45
          • . the Option 11 shelf

            45
        • . the Media Gateway for CS 1000

          45
          • . the Media Gateway for CS 1000

            45
        • . the IPE module for CS 2100/Meridian SL-100

          45
          • . the IPE module for CS 2100/Meridian SL-100

            45
    • This chapter also describes how to connect the ICB to the administration terminal, and configure the card.

      45
      • This chapter also describes how to connect the ICB to the administration terminal, and configure the card.

        45
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      45
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        45
      • . “Getting started” on page 45 - describes the steps to use when preparing for an installation.

        45
        • . “Getting started” on page 45 - describes the steps to use when preparing for an installation.

          45
          • . “Getting started” on page 45 - describes the steps to use when preparing for an installation.

            45
            • . “Getting started” on page 45

              45
        • . “CS 1000 configuration” on page 47 - shows how to configure the Meridian 1 and CS 1000.

          45
          • . “CS 1000 configuration” on page 47 - shows how to configure the Meridian 1 and CS 1000.

            45
            • . “CS 1000 configuration” on page 47

              45
        • . “CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration” on page 55 - shows how to configure the Meridian SL-100.

          45
          • . “CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration” on page 55 - shows how to configure the Meridian SL-100.

            45
            • . “CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration” on page 55

              45
        • . “ICB installation and configuration procedures” on page 65 - shows how to install the card and set up the web server.

          45
          • . “ICB installation and configuration procedures” on page 65 - shows how to install the card and set up the web server.

            45
            • . “ICB installation and configuration procedures” on page 65

              45
        • . “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72 - describes how to use the BUI’s Installation Wizard to complete configuration.

          45
          • . “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72 - describes how to use the BUI’s Installation Wizard to complete configuration.

            45
            • . “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72

              45
  • Getting started

    45
    • Getting started

      45
    • To begin the installation, unpack and inspect the components, take inventory, and determine which IPE card slot(s) in which to install the ICB card(s). See

      45
      • To begin the installation, unpack and inspect the components, take inventory, and determine which IPE card slot(s) in which to install the ICB card(s). See

        45
        • Table 1 on page 24

          45
    • Unpack and inspect the equipment

      46
      • Unpack and inspect the equipment

        46
      • Unpack and inspect the equipment for damage. Follow the steps in

        46
        • Unpack and inspect the equipment for damage. Follow the steps in

          46
          • Procedure 1

            46
      • Procedure 1 Prepare for the installation

        46
        • Procedure 1 Prepare for the installation

          46
          • 1 Remove items from the installation site that can generate static charge.

            46
            • 1 Remove items from the installation site that can generate static charge.

              46
          • 2 Use antistatic spray if the site is carpeted.

            46
            • 2 Use antistatic spray if the site is carpeted.

              46
          • 3 Ground yourself before handling any equipment.

            46
            • 3 Ground yourself before handling any equipment.

              46
          • 4 Remove equipment carefully from its packaging. Save the packaging, in case the card has to be returned.

            46
            • 4 Remove equipment carefully from its packaging. Save the packaging, in case the card has to be returned.

              46
          • 5 Inspect the equipment for faults or damage. Report any damaged component to your Nortel Networks representative and the company who delivered the equipment.

            46
            • 5 Inspect the equipment for faults or damage. Report any damaged component to your Nortel Networks representative and the company who delivered the equipment.

              46
    • Take inventory

      46
      • Take inventory

        46
      • After unpacking and inspecting the equipment, verify that all necessary components are on site before beginning the installation...

        46
        • After unpacking and inspecting the equipment, verify that all necessary components are on site before beginning the installation...

          46
    • Verify IPE Slot(s)

      46
      • Verify IPE Slot(s)

        46
      • The ICB card can be installed in any IPE card slot associated with full 50-pin I/O cables.

        46
        • The ICB card can be installed in any IPE card slot associated with full 50-pin I/O cables.

          46
          • Table 4

            46
        • <TABLE>

          46
          • Table 4 ICB installation into card slots

            46
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            46
            • <TABLE ROW>

              46
              • Meridian system modules

                46
              • ICB card slots

                46
          • <TABLE BODY>

            46
            • <TABLE ROW>

              46
              • NT8D37BA/EC IPE modules, and NT8D11BC/ED CE/PE modules.

                46
              • All available IPE card slots.

                46
            • <TABLE ROW>

              46
              • NT8D37AA/DC IPE modules.

                46
              • IPE card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12.

                46
            • <TABLE ROW>

              46
              • CS 1000.

                46
              • 1, 2, or 3 of the Media Gateway, or slots 7, 8, 9, or 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.

                46
    • Determine the access method

      46
      • Determine the access method

        46
      • Select the access method, single-number or direct meeting access, the system will be using. With direct access, configure 10 DN ...

        46
        • Select the access method, single-number or direct meeting access, the system will be using. With direct access, configure 10 DN ...

          46
    • Installing the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a Large System

      47
      • Installing the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a Large System

        47
      • For Large Systems, the standard IPE module I/O filtering is provided by the 50-pin filter connectors mounted in the I//O panel o...

        47
        • For Large Systems, the standard IPE module I/O filtering is provided by the 50-pin filter connectors mounted in the I//O panel o...

          47
        • Note: The NTCW84JA ITG-filter connector is not required on Small Systems or Succession 1000 systems.

          47
          • Note: The NTCW84JA ITG-filter connector is not required on Small Systems or Succession 1000 systems.

            47
      • CAUTION: For Large systems manufactured between 1998-1999 and shipped in North America, IPE modules have the NT8D81BA backplane ...

        47
        • CAUTION: For Large systems manufactured between 1998-1999 and shipped in North America, IPE modules have the NT8D81BA backplane ...

          47
  • CS 1000 configuration

    47
    • CS 1000 configuration

      47
    • Prior to installing any of the ICB hardware, configure the system software for the ICB card(s) through the system TTY terminal.

      47
      • Prior to installing any of the ICB hardware, configure the system software for the ICB card(s) through the system TTY terminal.

        47
    • Summary

      47
      • Summary

        47
      • The following summarizes the tasks for configuring the CS 1000:

        47
        • The following summarizes the tasks for configuring the CS 1000:

          47
        • 1 LD 23 - Define the ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.

          47
          • 1 LD 23 - Define the ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.

            47
            • 1 LD 23 - Define the ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.

              47
          • 2 Define DNs using either:

            47
            • 2 Define DNs using either:

              47
            • LD 23 - Define ACD DNs and assign them to the ICB card.

              47
            • or

              47
            • LD 10 - Define Phantom TNs and forward them to the ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.

              47
          • 3 LD 11 - Configure ICB ports as digital sets.

            47
            • 3 LD 11 - Configure ICB ports as digital sets.

              47
          • 4 LD 23 - Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences.

            47
            • 4 LD 23 - Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences.

              47
          • 5 LD 15 - Configure the CDR data if the feature Charge Account is used for billing.

            47
            • 5 LD 15 - Configure the CDR data if the feature Charge Account is used for billing.

              47
    • Assign ACD DNs

      48
      • Assign ACD DNs

        48
      • The first step is to assign ACD queue.

        48
        • The first step is to assign ACD queue.

          48
        • <TABLE>

          48
          • Table 5 LD 23 - Define the ACD queue assigned to the ICB card

            48
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • Prompt

                48
              • Response

                48
              • Description

                48
          • <TABLE BODY>

            48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • REQ

                48
              • NEW

                48
              • Add new data.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • TYPE

                48
              • ACD

                48
              • ACD data block.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • CUST

                48
              • xx

                48
              • Customer number.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • ACDN

                48
              • xxxx

                48
              • ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • MAXP

                48
              • Maximum number of ACD agent positions.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • HOML

                48
              • NO

                48
              • Logout on handset removal.

                48
        • <TABLE>

          48
          • Table 6 LD 23 - Assign the ACD DNs for the ICB card

            48
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • Prompt

                48
              • Response

                48
              • Description

                48
          • <TABLE BODY>

            48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • REQ

                48
              • NEW

                48
              • New control data block.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • TYPE

                48
              • ACD

                48
              • ACD data block.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • CUST

                48
              • xx

                48
              • Customer number.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • ACDN

                48
              • xxxx

                48
              • Conferee (main) or chairperson DN.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • MAXP

                48
              • Maximum number of ACD agent positions.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • NCFW

                48
              • xxxx

                48
              • ACD DN assigned to ICB card.

                48
            • <TABLE ROW>

              48
              • Note: Repeat commands in this table for each ACD DN being configured.

                48
                • Note: Repeat commands in this table for each ACD DN being configured.

                  48
                  • Note: Repeat commands in this table for each ACD DN being configured.

                    48
        • Note: The number of DNs defined for each ICB card using direct meeting access depends on the number of conferences and bridges s...

          48
          • Note: The number of DNs defined for each ICB card using direct meeting access depends on the number of conferences and bridges s...

            48
    • Define Phantom TN blocks

      48
      • Define Phantom TN blocks

        48
      • Phantom TNs can be used, instead of ACD DNs, to serve as chairperson DNs, conferees DNs and TUI DNs.

        48
        • Phantom TNs can be used, instead of ACD DNs, to serve as chairperson DNs, conferees DNs and TUI DNs.

          48
      • Enter the CS 1000 definitions for the Phantom TN in LD 10 as follows:

        49
        • Enter the CS 1000 definitions for the Phantom TN in LD 10 as follows:

          49
        • 1 The specific TN and DN vary by site.

          49
          • 1 The specific TN and DN vary by site.

            49
            • 1 The specific TN and DN vary by site.

              49
            • Those variables are represented by “x” in

              49
              • Figure 9 on page 49

                49
          • 2 CFXA is the Class of Service (CLS) that enables Call Forwarding.

            49
            • 2 CFXA is the Class of Service (CLS) that enables Call Forwarding.

              49
          • 3 The last four variables in the screen (under FTR) are the main ACD DNs in LD 23.

            49
            • 3 The last four variables in the screen (under FTR) are the main ACD DNs in LD 23.

              49
      • Figure 9 Phantom TN definitions (LD 10)

        49
        • Figure 9 Phantom TN definitions (LD 10)

          49
          • Figure 9 Phantom TN definitions (LD 10)

            49
      • The next step is to configure ICB ports as digital sets.

        49
        • The next step is to configure ICB ports as digital sets.

          49
        • <TABLE>

          49
          • Table 7 LD 11 - Configure ICB ports as digital sets

            49
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            49
            • <TABLE ROW>

              49
              • Prompt

                49
              • Response

                49
              • Description

                49
          • <TABLE BODY>

            49
            • <TABLE ROW>

              49
              • REQ

                49
              • NEW

                49
              • Add new data.

                49
            • <TABLE ROW>

              49
              • TYPE

                49
              • Digital telephone set M2616.

                49
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • TN

                50
              • l s c u s c u

                50
              • Terminal number of the ICB card, Options 51C, 61C, and 81C. For Option 11C and CS 1000.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • CUST

                50
              • xx

                50
              • Customer number.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • CLS

                50
              • FLXA VCE, WTA

                50
              • FLXA = Flexible Voice/Data Allowed. VCE = Voice. WTA = Warning Tone Allowed. ACD agent (Use FLXA).

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 0 ACD <ACD DN> <CLI> <pos ID>

                50
              • ACD DN plus CLI plus position ID.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 1 SCR <any DN>

                50
              • Line key.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 2 NRD

                50
              • Not ready key.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 3 MSB

                50
              • Make set busy key.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 4 TRN

                50
              • Call transfer key.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • KEY

                50
              • 9 CHG

                50
              • Change key. Use with CDR and billing feature.

                50
            • <TABLE ROW>

              50
              • Note: The administrator should consider chairperson dial-out restrictions through the ICB ports to prevent international dial-out.

                50
                • Note: The administrator should consider chairperson dial-out restrictions through the ICB ports to prevent international dial-out.

                  50
                  • Note: The administrator should consider chairperson dial-out restrictions through the ICB ports to prevent international dial-out.

                    50
      • The number of virtual ACD agents of the ACD queue is equal to the number of ICB ports. For example, if 12 ports are enabled, def...

        50
        • The number of virtual ACD agents of the ACD queue is equal to the number of ICB ports. For example, if 12 ports are enabled, def...

          50
        • Note: Agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 2000-2031).

          50
          • Note: Agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 2000-2031).

            50
      • Figure 10 on page 51 shows a sample LD 20 printout of a built ICB port.

        50
        • Figure 10 on page 51 shows a sample LD 20 printout of a built ICB port.

          50
          • Figure 10 on page 51

            50
        • Figure 10 LD 20 ICB configuration

          51
          • Figure 10 LD 20 ICB configuration

            51
    • Configure DNs for a dual-card conference

      52
      • Configure DNs for a dual-card conference

        52
      • When a dual-card conference is defined, two meetings are defined on two cards. First, the meeting is booked on the primary card ...

        52
        • When a dual-card conference is defined, two meetings are defined on two cards. First, the meeting is booked on the primary card ...

          52
      • When a user dials into a dual-card conference, the call can terminate either on the primary or on the secondary card. Calls to the dual-card conference main ACD DN are forwarded according to the ACD time overflow night table.

        52
        • When a user dials into a dual-card conference, the call can terminate either on the primary or on the secondary card. Calls to the dual-card conference main ACD DN are forwarded according to the ACD time overflow night table.

          52
      • On both cards (primary and secondary), the user cannot use the dual-card conference pair DNs for a simple meeting. Therefore, nine DNs are available for simple meeting and bridges.

        52
        • On both cards (primary and secondary), the user cannot use the dual-card conference pair DNs for a simple meeting. Therefore, nine DNs are available for simple meeting and bridges.

          52
      • For a dual-card configuration, one card functions as the primary card and the other as the secondary card. Define for each card an ACD data block with an ACD DN in LD 23, as shown in

        52
        • For a dual-card configuration, one card functions as the primary card and the other as the secondary card. Define for each card an ACD data block with an ACD DN in LD 23, as shown in

          52
          • Table 5 on page 48

            52
      • For the primary card, configure the following DNs:

        52
        • For the primary card, configure the following DNs:

          52
        • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the primary card.

          52
          • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the primary card.

            52
            • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the primary card.

              52
            • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this step which callers use to access a simple conference on the primary card.

              52
              • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this step which callers use to access a simple conference on the primary card.

                52
          • . TUI DN - This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card conferences on the primary card. Do not configure this DN, if the TUI is not going to be used.

            52
            • . TUI DN - This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card conferences on the primary card. Do not configure this DN, if the TUI is not going to be used.

              52
          • . Chairperson DN - This is the DN that chairperson of a dual-card conference dials to enter a dual-card conference. This DN is required for dual-card setup.

            52
            • . Chairperson DN - This is the DN that chairperson of a dual-card conference dials to enter a dual-card conference. This DN is required for dual-card setup.

              52
      • Therefore, for the primary card, configure up to 20 DNs in LD 23 that Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the primary card.

        52
        • Therefore, for the primary card, configure up to 20 DNs in LD 23 that Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the primary card.

          52
      • For the secondary card, configure the following DNs:

        53
        • For the secondary card, configure the following DNs:

          53
        • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the secondary card.

          53
          • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the secondary card.

            53
            • . DN pairs (up to nine) - These pairs serve as chairperson and conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on the secondary card.

              53
            • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this step which callers use to access a simple conference on the secondary card.

              53
              • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this step which callers use to access a simple conference on the secondary card.

                53
          • . TUI DN - This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card conferences on the secondary card. Do not configure this DN, if the the TUI is not going to be used.

            53
            • . TUI DN - This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card conferences on the secondary card. Do not configure this DN, if the the TUI is not going to be used.

              53
          • . Transfer DN - This is the DN that transfers dual-card conference participants from the primary card to the secondary card when...

            53
            • . Transfer DN - This is the DN that transfers dual-card conference participants from the primary card to the secondary card when...

              53
          • . Link DN - This is the DN the creates a speech path between the primary card and the secondary card for dual-card conferences. Configure this DN for dual-card setup.

            53
            • . Link DN - This is the DN the creates a speech path between the primary card and the secondary card for dual-card conferences. Configure this DN for dual-card setup.

              53
      • Therefore, for the secondary card, configure up to 22 DNs in LD 23 that Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the secondary card.

        53
        • Therefore, for the secondary card, configure up to 22 DNs in LD 23 that Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the secondary card.

          53
      • The main DN must also be configured for the dual-card conference. The main DN is the DN that conferees dial to enter the dual-ca...

        53
        • The main DN must also be configured for the dual-card conference. The main DN is the DN that conferees dial to enter the dual-ca...

          53
          • Table 8

            53
        • <TABLE>

          53
          • Table 8 LD 23 - Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences

            53
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • Prompt

                53
              • Response

                53
              • Description

                53
          • <TABLE BODY>

            53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • REQ

                53
              • NEW

                53
              • Add new data.

                53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • TYPE

                53
              • ACD

                53
              • ACD data block.

                53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • CUST

                53
              • xx

                53
              • Customer number.

                53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • ACDN

                53
              • xxxx

                53
              • The main DN for dual-card conferences.

                53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              53
              • MAXP

                53
              • Maximum number of ACD agent positions.

                53
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Note: Carriage return to the end and start again.

                54
                • Note: Carriage return to the end and start again.

                  54
                  • Note: Carriage return to the end and start again.

                    54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • REQ

                54
              • NEW

                54
              • New control data block.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • TYPE

                54
              • NACD

                54
              • Network ACD data block.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • CUST

                54
              • xx

                54
              • Customer number.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • ACDN

                54
              • xxxx

                54
              • The main DN for dual-card conferences.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • TABL

                54
              • N

                54
              • Night time overflow table.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • - TRGT

                54
              • xxxx 0

                54
              • xxxx is the ACD DN of the primary card. 0 is the time, in seconds, for an immediate transfer to the primary card.

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • - TRGT

                54
              • yyyy 2

                54
              • yyyy is the ACD DN of the secondary card. 2 is the time, in seconds, for a delayed transfer to the secondary card.

                54
      • Table 9 shows a sample dialing plan for a 62-port dual-card configuration.

        54
        • Table 9 shows a sample dialing plan for a 62-port dual-card configuration.

          54
          • Table 9

            54
        • <TABLE>

          54
          • Table 9 Sample dialing plan for a 62-port dual-card configuration

            54
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Description of DNs

                54
              • DNs for the primary card

                54
              • DNs for the secondary card

                54
              • Configure in...

                54
          • <TABLE BODY>

            54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • ACD DN

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Pair DNs for single- card conferences

                54
              • 7001-7018 (NCFW = 7000 in LD 23)

                54
              • 8001-8018 (NCFW = 8000 in LD 23)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • TUI DNs

                54
              • 7019 (NCFW = 7000)

                54
              • 8019 (NCFW = 8000)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Chairperson DNs

                54
              • 7020 (NCFW = 7000)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Transfer DN

                54
              • N/A

                54
              • 8021 (NCFW = 8000)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Link DN

                54
              • N/A

                54
              • 8022 (NCFW = 8000)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
            • <TABLE ROW>

              54
              • Main DN

                54
              • 7021 (TRGT = 7000 0)

                54
              • 7021 (TRGT = 8000 2)

                54
              • LD 23

                54
        • Note: Because of the number and variety of DNs programmed for the dual-card setup, Nortel Networks recommends creating a dialing plan chart similar to Table 9 on page 54. Refer to this chart when configuring the primary and secondary card attributes, in

          55
          • Note: Because of the number and variety of DNs programmed for the dual-card setup, Nortel Networks recommends creating a dialing plan chart similar to Table 9 on page 54. Refer to this chart when configuring the primary and secondary card attributes, in

            55
      • Finally, configure each port on the primary and secondary cards as a digital set. See

        55
        • Finally, configure each port on the primary and secondary cards as a digital set. See

          55
          • Table 7 on page 49

            55
    • Assign CDR data

      55
      • Assign CDR data

        55
      • If charge account is used for CDR billing, then configure the feature Charge Account for CDR billing. Remember to define Key 9 on all ICB key ports. See

        55
        • If charge account is used for CDR billing, then configure the feature Charge Account for CDR billing. Remember to define Key 9 on all ICB key ports. See

          55
          • Table 10

            55
        • <TABLE>

          55
          • Table 10 LD 15 - Define the charge account for CDR data

            55
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            55
            • <TABLE ROW>

              55
              • Prompt

                55
              • Response

                55
              • Description

                55
          • <TABLE BODY>

            55
            • <TABLE ROW>

              55
              • REQ

                55
              • CHG

                55
              • Change customer data.

                55
            • <TABLE ROW>

              55
              • TYPE

                55
              • CDR_DATA

                55
              • CDR data block.

                55
            • <TABLE ROW>

              55
              • CHLN

                55
              • Set the charge account number length to 23.

                55
  • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration

    55
    • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration

      55
    • Single-card configuration

      55
      • Single-card configuration

        55
      • After installing the ICB card(s) and connecting the terminal for CLI access and the server for BUI access, perform CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 database configuration.

        55
        • After installing the ICB card(s) and connecting the terminal for CLI access and the server for BUI access, perform CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 database configuration.

          55
          • Figure 11 on page 56

            55
        • Note: If single-number access is being used, the DN pairs are not required. Instead configure a single-number access DN.

          55
          • Note: If single-number access is being used, the DN pairs are not required. Instead configure a single-number access DN.

            55
        • Figure 11 Single-card conference, 10 conferences, 32 ports

          56
          • Figure 11 Single-card conference, 10 conferences, 32 ports

            56
      • Configuration procedure

        56
        • Configuration procedure

          56
        • Single-card installation enables up to 10 conferences on one 32-port ICB card. Each ICB card can use one ICB ACD Group to handle all the access DNs required.

          56
          • Single-card installation enables up to 10 conferences on one 32-port ICB card. Each ICB card can use one ICB ACD Group to handle all the access DNs required.

            56
        • To configure an ICB single-card conference with direct meeting access, from a maintenance and administration position (MAP) terminal follow the steps in

          56
          • To configure an ICB single-card conference with direct meeting access, from a maintenance and administration position (MAP) terminal follow the steps in

            56
            • Procedure 2

              56
        • Procedure 2 Configure a single-card conference

          56
          • Procedure 2 Configure a single-card conference

            56
            • 1 Define LENs as FLXA (MSL09 or above) in table LNINV for a 32-port conference. Refer to

              56
              • 1 Define LENs as FLXA (MSL09 or above) in table LNINV for a 32-port conference. Refer to

                56
                • Figure 12 on page 57

                  56
            • 2 Define the ICB ACDGRP and ACD agents assigned to the ICB card. See

              56
              • 2 Define the ICB ACDGRP and ACD agents assigned to the ICB card. See

                56
                • Figure 13 on page 57

                  56
                • Figure 14 on page 58

                  56
                • Figure 15 on page 58

                  56
            • 3 Define the ICB conference and chairperson bridge DNs. Refer to

              57
              • 3 Define the ICB conference and chairperson bridge DNs. Refer to

                57
                • Figure 16 on page 58

                  57
              • a Main DN for conference ACD groups to access the ICB agents on the card.

                57
                • a Main DN for conference ACD groups to access the ICB agents on the card.

                  57
              • b Conference DNs and Chairperson DNs.

                57
                • b Conference DNs and Chairperson DNs.

                  57
              • c TUI DN and Assistant DN.

                57
                • c TUI DN and Assistant DN.

                  57
              • d Single number access conference and chairperson DN.

                57
                • d Single number access conference and chairperson DN.

                  57
            • 4 Define the night service route from ACDGRP NSROUTE. The night service DN assigned in table OFRT allows conference and chairperson ACDGRPs to route to the ICB card ACD agents. Table DNROUTE defines the routes.

              57
              • 4 Define the night service route from ACDGRP NSROUTE. The night service DN assigned in table OFRT allows conference and chairperson ACDGRPs to route to the ICB card ACD agents. Table DNROUTE defines the routes.

                57
                • Figure 17 on page 58

                  57
            • 5 Use the following tables and command interfaces (CIs) to datafill the ICB for single-card configuration:

              57
              • 5 Use the following tables and command interfaces (CIs) to datafill the ICB for single-card configuration:

                57
              • . Table LNINV.

                57
                • . Table LNINV.

                  57
                  • . Table LNINV.

                    57
                • . Table ACDGRP.

                  57
                  • . Table ACDGRP.

                    57
                • . Table ACDSGRP.

                  57
                  • . Table ACDSGRP.

                    57
                • . Table ACDLOGIN.

                  57
                  • . Table ACDLOGIN.

                    57
                • . Table CUSTACD (optional).

                  57
                  • . Table CUSTACD (optional).

                    57
                • . Table ACDENLOG (optional).

                  57
                  • . Table ACDENLOG (optional).

                    57
                • . Table DNROUTE.

                  57
                  • . Table DNROUTE.

                    57
                • . Table OFRT.

                  57
                  • . Table OFRT.

                    57
                • . Table OFCENG.

                  57
                  • . Table OFCENG.

                    57
                • . Service Orders.

                  57
                  • . Service Orders.

                    57
              • Figure 12 LNINV example

                57
                • Figure 12 LNINV example

                  57
                • <GRAPHIC>

                  57
                • Note: Cardcode can also be configured as an 8D02 digital line card.

                  57
                  • Note: Cardcode can also be configured as an 8D02 digital line card.

                    57
              • Figure 13 ACDGRP example

                57
                • Figure 13 ACDGRP example

                  57
              • Figure 14 ACDSGRP example

                58
                • Figure 14 ACDSGRP example

                  58
              • Figure 15 ACDLOGIN example

                58
                • Figure 15 ACDLOGIN example

                  58
            • 6 The ACD login ID must match the ICB physical port connection to the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100. The ACD agents login must be in d...

              58
              • 6 The ACD login ID must match the ICB physical port connection to the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100. The ACD agents login must be in d...

                58
                • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                  58
              • Note: If using Enhanced ACD Login to login specific ACD agent IDs, datafill tables CUSTACD and ACDENLOG to make sure ICB ACD agents can log in.

                58
                • Note: If using Enhanced ACD Login to login specific ACD agent IDs, datafill tables CUSTACD and ACDENLOG to make sure ICB ACD agents can log in.

                  58
              • Figure 16 DNROUTE example

                58
                • Figure 16 DNROUTE example

                  58
              • Figure 17 OFRT example

                58
                • Figure 17 OFRT example

                  58
              • Note: Use this table to forward, through night service, the ACD main conference and chairperson conference to the ICB ACD prime DN. This example uses 997 1400 as the ACD Prime DN.

                58
                • Note: Use this table to forward, through night service, the ACD main conference and chairperson conference to the ICB ACD prime DN. This example uses 997 1400 as the ACD Prime DN.

                  58
            • 7 Define each ICB port as an M2616 digital telephone set. Define ICB ports as ACD agents in SERVORD. Define the digital set keys as follows:

              58
              • 7 Define each ICB port as an M2616 digital telephone set. Define ICB ports as ACD agents in SERVORD. Define the digital set keys as follows:

                58
              • . Key 1: ACD

                58
                • . Key 1: ACD

                  58
                  • . Key 1: ACD

                    58
                • . Key 1: M0200

                  58
                  • . Key 1: M0200

                    58
                • . Key 1: COMMUNICTR

                  58
                  • . Key 1: COMMUNICTR

                    58
                • . Key 2: Secondary DN

                  59
                  • . Key 2: Secondary DN

                    59
                • . Key 3: Not Ready (NRD)

                  59
                  • . Key 3: Not Ready (NRD)

                    59
                • . Key 4: ACD Not Ready (ACDNR)

                  59
                  • . Key 4: ACD Not Ready (ACDNR)

                    59
                • . Key 5: Fast Transfer (FXR)

                  59
                  • . Key 5: Fast Transfer (FXR)

                    59
              • The following example shows how to datafill the ACD agents using SERVORD. The configuration requires up to 32 LENs and 64 DNs. ACD Incalls and Key 2 use a secondary DN.

                59
              • Figure 18 QLEN example

                59
                • Figure 18 QLEN example

                  59
              • Note: When adding the display feature to the M2616 set, use OPTKEY1, Option M0200.

                59
                • Note: When adding the display feature to the M2616 set, use OPTKEY1, Option M0200.

                  59
              • Define Agent IDs as consecutive numbers within the lower and upper limit (see

                59
                • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                  59
            • 8 In table OFCENG, set configure ALL_ACD_LOGIN_IDS_VALID Y.

              59
              • 8 In table OFCENG, set configure ALL_ACD_LOGIN_IDS_VALID Y.

                59
              • Figure 19 OFCENG example

                59
                • Figure 19 OFCENG example

                  59
    • Dual-card configuration

      60
      • Dual-card configuration

        60
      • The dual-card configuration enables a single conference to occur on two cards and have up to 62 participants depending on access...

        60
        • The dual-card configuration enables a single conference to occur on two cards and have up to 62 participants depending on access...

          60
        • Note: There is no need for ICB cards in a dual-card configuration to reside next to each other in an IPE shelf. Software establishes the audio connections between the two cards. There is no hardware connection between the two cards.

          60
          • Note: There is no need for ICB cards in a dual-card configuration to reside next to each other in an IPE shelf. Software establishes the audio connections between the two cards. There is no hardware connection between the two cards.

            60
      • Datafill the following tables and command interfaces for dual-card configuration:

        60
        • Datafill the following tables and command interfaces for dual-card configuration:

          60
        • . table LNINV

          60
          • . table LNINV

            60
            • . table LNINV

              60
          • . table ACDGRP

            60
            • . table ACDGRP

              60
          • . table ACDSGRP

            60
            • . table ACDSGRP

              60
          • . table ACDRTE (requires a new entry)

            60
            • . table ACDRTE (requires a new entry)

              60
          • . table ACDLOGIN

            60
            • . table ACDLOGIN

              60
          • . table DNROUTE

            60
            • . table DNROUTE

              60
          • . table OFRT

            60
            • . table OFRT

              60
      • Figure 20 on page 61 provides an example of the datafill for dual-card setup.

        60
        • Figure 20 on page 61 provides an example of the datafill for dual-card setup.

          60
          • Figure 20 on page 61

            60
        • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead configure two single-number access DNs: one for ...

          60
          • Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not required. Instead configure two single-number access DNs: one for ...

            60
        • Figure 20 Dual-card conference, 1 conference, 62 ports

          61
          • Figure 20 Dual-card conference, 1 conference, 62 ports

            61
      • Service Orders

        62
        • Service Orders

          62
        • Add an additional ACD group for the second card.

          62
          • Add an additional ACD group for the second card.

            62
          • Figure 21 ACDGRP example

            62
            • Figure 21 ACDGRP example

              62
        • Add additional ACD subgroup information for the second card.

          62
          • Add additional ACD subgroup information for the second card.

            62
          • Figure 22 ACDSGRP example

            62
            • Figure 22 ACDSGRP example

              62
        • Add additional login IDs for the second card agent logins. These login IDs must be in sequential order.

          62
          • Add additional login IDs for the second card agent logins. These login IDs must be in sequential order.

            62
          • Figure 23 ACDLOGIN example

            62
            • Figure 23 ACDLOGIN example

              62
        • Add table DNROUTE to provide DNs for the following:

          62
          • Add table DNROUTE to provide DNs for the following:

            62
          • . second ICB card (for single-card conference and chairperson)

            62
            • . second ICB card (for single-card conference and chairperson)

              62
              • . second ICB card (for single-card conference and chairperson)

                62
            • . transfer DN (to transfer conference calls from ICB card 1 to ICB card 2)

              62
              • . transfer DN (to transfer conference calls from ICB card 1 to ICB card 2)

                62
            • . link DN (provides speech path between the two cards)

              62
              • . link DN (provides speech path between the two cards)

                62
            • . 62-port Main conference DN

              62
              • . 62-port Main conference DN

                62
            • . chairperson DN for ICB card 1

              62
              • . chairperson DN for ICB card 1

                62
              • Note: From all of these DNs, part are for the primary card and the rest are for the secondary card. However, when configuring these DNs in the ICB BUI, all dual-card DNs are configured on the primary card.

                62
                • Note: From all of these DNs, part are for the primary card and the rest are for the secondary card. However, when configuring these DNs in the ICB BUI, all dual-card DNs are configured on the primary card.

                  62
          • Figure 24 DNROUTE example

            63
            • Figure 24 DNROUTE example

              63
        • Use table ACDRTE to allow a dual-card conference to overflow from ICB card 1 to ICB card 2 when there are no more available ports on card 1.

          63
          • Use table ACDRTE to allow a dual-card conference to overflow from ICB card 1 to ICB card 2 when there are no more available ports on card 1.

            63
          • Figure 25 ACDRTE example

            63
            • Figure 25 ACDRTE example

              63
        • Use table OFRT to add the DN routing for the second ICB card.

          63
          • Use table OFRT to add the DN routing for the second ICB card.

            63
          • Figure 26 OFRT example

            63
            • Figure 26 OFRT example

              63
      • Configuration procedure

        63
        • Configuration procedure

          63
        • To set up a dual-card configuration using direct meeting access, follow the steps in

          63
          • To set up a dual-card configuration using direct meeting access, follow the steps in

            63
            • Procedure 3 on page 64

              63
        • Procedure 3 Configure a dual-card conference

          64
          • Procedure 3 Configure a dual-card conference

            64
            • 1 Install the two cards and their Ethernet adapters identical to single-card installation. See

              64
              • 1 Install the two cards and their Ethernet adapters identical to single-card installation. See

                64
                • Procedure 4 on page 66

                  64
              • Note: There is no need for the two cards to be next to each other in the shelf or cabinet.

                64
                • Note: There is no need for the two cards to be next to each other in the shelf or cabinet.

                  64
            • 2 Busy and Return to Service (RTS) the two cards in the IPE PM level of the MAP terminal.

              64
              • 2 Busy and Return to Service (RTS) the two cards in the IPE PM level of the MAP terminal.

                64
            • 3 For each card, connect a VT100 terminal to the card and enter the keycode information, including the appropriate number of ports. Wait for each card to verify the keycode information.

              64
              • 3 For each card, connect a VT100 terminal to the card and enter the keycode information, including the appropriate number of ports. Wait for each card to verify the keycode information.

                64
            • 4 For each card, log into the card through the CLI (default login: admin). Enter the System Attributes Editor, enter sa then sy, and modify the following information: The subnet mask, the gateway address, and the IP address

              64
              • 4 For each card, log into the card through the CLI (default login: admin). Enter the System Attributes Editor, enter sa then sy, and modify the following information: The subnet mask, the gateway address, and the IP address

                64
              • Note: After entering the Ethernet information, the CLI asks if you want to restart the cards. Select YES at this point.

                64
                • Note: After entering the Ethernet information, the CLI asks if you want to restart the cards. Select YES at this point.

                  64
            • 5 From a PC, ping each ICB card to make sure that they have a correct connection to the LAN. To ping an IP card, perform the following:

              64
              • 5 From a PC, ping each ICB card to make sure that they have a correct connection to the LAN. To ping an IP card, perform the following:

                64
              • a Click on the Start button and select Run from the Start Menu.

                64
                • a Click on the Start button and select Run from the Start Menu.

                  64
              • b In the Open: field, enter ping <IP address> where <IP address> is the IP address of one of the ICB cards.

                64
                • b In the Open: field, enter ping <IP address> where <IP address> is the IP address of one of the ICB cards.

                  64
              • c Click the OK button, and observe the DOS window that opens. If you receive the message: “Reply from <IP address>...”, you have...

                64
                • c Click the OK button, and observe the DOS window that opens. If you receive the message: “Reply from <IP address>...”, you have...

                  64
            • 6 Configure the DNs for the dual-card configuration.

              64
              • 6 Configure the DNs for the dual-card configuration.

                64
            • 7 Configure each port on the two new cards as an M2616 set. See

              64
              • 7 Configure each port on the two new cards as an M2616 set. See

                64
                • Procedure 2 on page 56

                  64
                • Figure 18 on page 59

                  64
            • 8 Open up the web browser on your PC. In the URL field of the browser, enter the following: <IP address> where < IP address> is the ICB IP address.

              64
              • 8 Open up the web browser on your PC. In the URL field of the browser, enter the following: <IP address> where < IP address> is the ICB IP address.

                64
            • 9 Log into the BUI (defaults: admin and 000000) and select the ICB Installation Wizard (see

              64
              • 9 Log into the BUI (defaults: admin and 000000) and select the ICB Installation Wizard (see

                64
                • “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72

                  64
  • ICB installation and configuration procedures

    65
    • ICB installation and configuration procedures

      65
    • Once the site is prepared for installation and the Meridian system software is configured, use the steps in

      65
      • Once the site is prepared for installation and the Meridian system software is configured, use the steps in

        65
        • Table 11

          65
      • <TABLE>

        65
        • Table 11 ICB installation summary

          65
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          65
          • <TABLE ROW>

            65
            • Step

              65
            • Description

              65
        • <TABLE BODY>

          65
          • <TABLE ROW>

            65
            • Install a serial Maintenance terminal for preliminary card setup using the following procedures:

              65
              • . Procedure 4, “Install the Ethernet Adapter card,” on page 66

                65
                • . Procedure 4, “Install the Ethernet Adapter card,” on page 66

                  65
                  • . Procedure 4, “Install the Ethernet Adapter card,” on page 66

                    65
                    • . Procedure 4, “Install the Ethernet Adapter card,” on page 66

                      65
              • Use one of the following three procedures to connect the serial Maintenance terminal to the ICB as follows:

                65
              • . Procedure 5, “Access the ICB directly,” on page 67

                65
                • . Procedure 5, “Access the ICB directly,” on page 67

                  65
                  • . Procedure 5, “Access the ICB directly,” on page 67

                    65
                    • . Procedure 5, “Access the ICB directly,” on page 67

                      65
              • . Procedure 6, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem,” on page 68

                65
                • . Procedure 6, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem,” on page 68

                  65
                  • . Procedure 6, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem,” on page 68

                    65
                    • . Procedure 6, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem,” on page 68

                      65
              • . Procedure 7, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub,” on page 68

                65
                • . Procedure 7, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub,” on page 68

                  65
                  • . Procedure 7, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub,” on page 68

                    65
                    • . Procedure 7, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub,” on page 68

                      65
              • If your system is an CS 1000 or Option 11C, use one of the following three procedures to connect the serial Maintenance terminal to the ICB as follows:

                65
              • . Procedure 8, “Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                65
                • . Procedure 8, “Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                  65
                  • . Procedure 8, “Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                    65
                    • . Procedure 8, “Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                      65
              • . Procedure 9, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                65
                • . Procedure 9, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                  65
                  • . Procedure 9, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                    65
                    • . Procedure 9, “Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 69

                      65
              • . Procedure 10, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 70

                65
                • . Procedure 10, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 70

                  65
                  • . Procedure 10, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 70

                    65
                    • . Procedure 10, “Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000,” on page 70

                      65
          • <TABLE ROW>

            65
            • Install the ICB card(s) using the following:

              65
              • . Procedure 11, “Install ICB cards,” on page 70

                65
                • . Procedure 11, “Install ICB cards,” on page 70

                  65
                  • . Procedure 11, “Install ICB cards,” on page 70

                    65
                    • . Procedure 11, “Install ICB cards,” on page 70

                      65
          • <TABLE ROW>

            65
            • Configure the Maintenance terminal for command line interface (CLI) access as follows:

              65
              • . Procedure 12, “Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal,” on page 71

                65
                • . Procedure 12, “Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal,” on page 71

                  65
                  • . Procedure 12, “Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal,” on page 71

                    65
                    • . Procedure 12, “Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal,” on page 71

                      65
              • Define the ICB Ethernet parameters using the CLI System Attributes Editor as follows:

                65
              • . Procedure 13, “Configure initial card parameters using the CLI,” on page 71

                65
                • . Procedure 13, “Configure initial card parameters using the CLI,” on page 71

                  65
                  • . Procedure 13, “Configure initial card parameters using the CLI,” on page 71

                    65
                    • . Procedure 13, “Configure initial card parameters using the CLI,” on page 71

                      65
          • <TABLE ROW>

            65
            • Complete the installation using the ICB BUI Install Wizard as follows:

              65
              • . Procedure 14, “Access the administration BUI,” on page 72

                65
                • . Procedure 14, “Access the administration BUI,” on page 72

                  65
                  • . Procedure 14, “Access the administration BUI,” on page 72

                    65
                    • . Procedure 14, “Access the administration BUI,” on page 72

                      65
              • . See

                65
                • . See

                  65
                  • . See

                    65
                    • “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72

                      65
    • Procedure 4 Install the Ethernet Adapter card

      66
      • Procedure 4 Install the Ethernet Adapter card

        66
        • 1 Remove the cover plate from the I/O panel at the rear of the IPE module.

          66
          • 1 Remove the cover plate from the I/O panel at the rear of the IPE module.

            66
        • 2 Remove the I/O panel retaining screws and lift the I/O panel from the module.

          66
          • 2 Remove the I/O panel retaining screws and lift the I/O panel from the module.

            66
        • 3 Set up the I/O panel filter connector for the card slot you have assigned for the ICB card installation.

          66
          • 3 Set up the I/O panel filter connector for the card slot you have assigned for the ICB card installation.

            66
        • 4 Your next step depends on the configuration of that filter connector.

          66
          • 4 Your next step depends on the configuration of that filter connector.

            66
          • a If this connector has a permanent connection to the backplane cable, remove the filter connector from the I/O panel.

            66
            • a If this connector has a permanent connection to the backplane cable, remove the filter connector from the I/O panel.

              66
          • b If a 50-pin connector joins the filter connector and the backplane cable, disconnect the 50-pin connector from the I/O panel filter connector. Then, being careful to save the retaining screws, remove the filter connector from the I/O panel.

            66
            • b If a 50-pin connector joins the filter connector and the backplane cable, disconnect the 50-pin connector from the I/O panel filter connector. Then, being careful to save the retaining screws, remove the filter connector from the I/O panel.

              66
        • 5 Install the NT5D52AC Ethernet Adapter card into the selected I/O panel connector cutout using the saved retaining screws.

          66
          • 5 Install the NT5D52AC Ethernet Adapter card into the selected I/O panel connector cutout using the saved retaining screws.

            66
        • 6 Fasten the I/O panel to the module using the retaining screws.

          66
          • 6 Fasten the I/O panel to the module using the retaining screws.

            66
        • 7 Replace the module cover plate.

          66
          • 7 Replace the module cover plate.

            66
    • Table 12 lists the pin number assignments for the Maintenance terminal cable that connects the IPE module I/O panel that the following p...

      66
      • Table 12 lists the pin number assignments for the Maintenance terminal cable that connects the IPE module I/O panel that the following p...

        66
        • Table 12

          66
      • <TABLE>

        66
        • Table 12 Maintenance cable

          66
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • J2 DB-25 pin

              66
            • J1 50-pin

              66
            • Description

              66
            • J2 DB-25 pin

              66
            • J1 50-pin

              66
            • Description

              66
        • <TABLE BODY>

          66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • LAN_Rx-

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • RS-232 Tx

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • RS-232 Rx

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • GND

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • Reserved

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • LAN_Tx+

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            66
            • LAN_Tx-

              66
            • Reserved

              66
          • <TABLE ROW>

            67
            • Reserved

              67
            • N.C.

              67
            • Not Connected

              67
          • <TABLE ROW>

            67
            • LAN_Rx+

              67
    • Refer to

      67
      • Refer to

        67
        • Figure 27

          67
      • Figure 27 Terminal connection through the Ethernet Adapter

        67
        • Figure 27 Terminal connection through the Ethernet Adapter

          67
    • Procedure 5 Access the ICB directly

      67
      • Procedure 5 Access the ICB directly

        67
        • 1 Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.

          67
          • 1 Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.

            67
        • 2 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

          67
          • 2 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

            67
            • Procedure 4 on page 66

              67
        • 3 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.

          67
          • 3 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.

            67
        • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the RS-232 connector on the terminal. A nullmodem is not required. If a gender changer is required, purchase one from a local electronics store.

          68
          • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the RS-232 connector on the terminal. A nullmodem is not required. If a gender changer is required, purchase one from a local electronics store.

            68
    • Procedure 6 Access the ICB remotely using a modem

      68
      • Procedure 6 Access the ICB remotely using a modem

        68
        • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

          68
          • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

            68
            • Procedure 4 on page 66

              68
        • 2 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.

          68
          • 2 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.

            68
        • 3 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the DB-25 female connector of a DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter. If a female-to-female nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied nullmodem.

          68
          • 3 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the DB-25 female connector of a DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter. If a female-to-female nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied nullmodem.

            68
        • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector of the nullmodem adapter DB-25F/DB-25M into the DB-25 female connector on the modem. If a female-to-female nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied nullmodem.

          68
          • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector of the nullmodem adapter DB-25F/DB-25M into the DB-25 female connector on the modem. If a female-to-female nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied nullmodem.

            68
        • 5 Plug the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.

          68
          • 5 Plug the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.

            68
        • 6 Plug the other end of the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the wall.

          68
          • 6 Plug the other end of the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the wall.

            68
    • Procedure 7 Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub

      68
      • Procedure 7 Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub

        68
        • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

          68
          • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in

            68
            • Procedure 4 on page 66

              68
        • 2 Plug the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the NT5D52AC Ethernet Adapter card.

          68
          • 2 Plug the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the NT5D52AC Ethernet Adapter card.

            68
        • 3 Plug the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the Ethernet LAN hub.

          68
          • 3 Plug the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the Ethernet LAN hub.

            68
        • 4 Make the remaining Ethernet connections as required using standard Ethernet connection rules.

          68
          • 4 Make the remaining Ethernet connections as required using standard Ethernet connection rules.

            68
        • Note: For local testing purposes, or direct connection from the Ethernet port to a PC, use an Ethernet cross-over cable purchased at a local computer store.

          68
          • Note: For local testing purposes, or direct connection from the Ethernet port to a PC, use an Ethernet cross-over cable purchased at a local computer store.

            68
    • If installing the ICB card in an Option 11C or CS 1000, use the following procedures to connect the Maintenance terminal.

      68
      • If installing the ICB card in an Option 11C or CS 1000, use the following procedures to connect the Maintenance terminal.

        68
      • Note: These procedures do not apply to the Meridian 1 Options 51C, 61C or 81C or the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

        68
        • Note: These procedures do not apply to the Meridian 1 Options 51C, 61C or 81C or the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

          68
    • In the procedures that follow, the connections are the same for the Option 11C and the CS 1000, the only difference is that the ...

      69
      • In the procedures that follow, the connections are the same for the Option 11C and the CS 1000, the only difference is that the ...

        69
    • Table 13 describes the DB-9 pin assignment that the next two procedures use.

      69
      • Table 13 describes the DB-9 pin assignment that the next two procedures use.

        69
        • Table 13

          69
      • <TABLE>

        69
        • Table 13 DB-9 RS-232 port pin out

          69
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          69
          • <TABLE ROW>

            69
            • 9-pin (male) serial connector pin #

              69
            • Signal Description

              69
        • <TABLE BODY>

          69
          • <TABLE ROW>

            69
            • RS-232 TX (transmit)

              69
          • <TABLE ROW>

            69
            • RS-232 RX (receive)

              69
          • <TABLE ROW>

            69
            • GND

              69
    • Procedure 8 Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000

      69
      • Procedure 8 Access the ICB directly - Option 11C or CS 1000

        69
        • 1 Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.

          69
          • 1 Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.

            69
        • 2 If the system is an Option 11C perform the following:

          69
          • 2 If the system is an Option 11C perform the following:

            69
          • a Verify that the Ethernet Adapter is installed in the Option 11C.

            69
            • a Verify that the Ethernet Adapter is installed in the Option 11C.

              69
          • b Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter on the I/O panel.

            69
            • b Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter on the I/O panel.

              69
          • c Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the RS-232 connector on the terminal. If the connection requires a gender changer, obtain one at a local electronics store.

            69
            • c Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the RS-232 connector on the terminal. If the connection requires a gender changer, obtain one at a local electronics store.

              69
        • 3 If your system is a CS 1000, connect the NTBK48 three-port SDI cable to the 9-pin SDI connection (COM RS-232) at the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

          69
          • 3 If your system is a CS 1000, connect the NTBK48 three-port SDI cable to the 9-pin SDI connection (COM RS-232) at the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

            69
    • Procedure 9 Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000

      69
      • Procedure 9 Access the ICB remotely using a modem - Option 11C or CS 1000

        69
        • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/Medium Access Unit (MAU) is installed in the Option 11C or CS 1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet Connection on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

          69
          • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/Medium Access Unit (MAU) is installed in the Option 11C or CS 1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet Connection on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

            69
          • Note: The Ethernet MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media Gateway.

            69
            • Note: The Ethernet MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media Gateway.

              69
        • 2 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter/MAU on the I/O panel.

          69
          • 2 Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector on the Ethernet Adapter/MAU on the I/O panel.

            69
        • 3 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the DB-25 female connector of the customer-supplied DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter.

          70
          • 3 Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the DB-25 female connector of the customer-supplied DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter.

            70
        • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector of the DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter into the DB-25 female connector on the modem.

          70
          • 4 Plug the DB-25 male connector of the DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter into the DB-25 female connector on the modem.

            70
        • 5 Insert the modular RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.

          70
          • 5 Insert the modular RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.

            70
        • 6 Insert the other end of the RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the wall.

          70
          • 6 Insert the other end of the RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the wall.

            70
    • Procedure 10 Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000

      70
      • Procedure 10 Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub - Option 11C or CS 1000

        70
        • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/MAU is installed in the Option 11C or CS 1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet Connection on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

          70
          • 1 Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/MAU is installed in the Option 11C or CS 1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet Connection on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.

            70
          • Note: The MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media Gateway.

            70
            • Note: The MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media Gateway.

              70
        • 2 Insert the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the Ethernet Adapter/MAU.

          70
          • 2 Insert the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the Ethernet Adapter/MAU.

            70
        • 3 Insert the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the LAN hub.

          70
          • 3 Insert the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the LAN hub.

            70
        • 4 Make the rest of the Ethernet connections as required using standard Ethernet connection rules.

          70
          • 4 Make the rest of the Ethernet connections as required using standard Ethernet connection rules.

            70
    • Procedure 11 Install ICB cards

      70
      • Procedure 11 Install ICB cards

        70
        • 1 Identify the card slots selected for ICB card(s). Refer to

          70
          • 1 Identify the card slots selected for ICB card(s). Refer to

            70
            • Table 4 on page 46

              70
        • 2 Make sure to properly place the PCMCIA hard drive card in the lower faceplate PCMCIA slot.

          70
          • 2 Make sure to properly place the PCMCIA hard drive card in the lower faceplate PCMCIA slot.

            70
        • 3 Pull the top and bottom extractors away from the ICB faceplate.

          70
          • 3 Pull the top and bottom extractors away from the ICB faceplate.

            70
        • 4 Insert the ICB card into the card guides and carefully push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector.

          70
          • 4 Insert the ICB card into the card guides and carefully push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector.

            70
        • 5 Push the top and the bottom extractors towards the faceplate to insert the ICB card into the faceplate connector and to lock it in place.

          70
          • 5 Push the top and the bottom extractors towards the faceplate to insert the ICB card into the faceplate connector and to lock it in place.

            70
        • 6 Observe the red LED at the top of the faceplate (the card LED). This LED blinks three times after the self-test successfully c...

          70
          • 6 Observe the red LED at the top of the faceplate (the card LED). This LED blinks three times after the self-test successfully c...

            70
        • 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each additional ICB card.

          70
          • 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each additional ICB card.

            70
    • Procedure 12 Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal

      71
      • Procedure 12 Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal

        71
        • 1 Specify the VT-100 type terminal interface characteristics to make sure they are compatible with the ICB RS-232 interface.

          71
          • 1 Specify the VT-100 type terminal interface characteristics to make sure they are compatible with the ICB RS-232 interface.

            71
        • 2 Set the interface parameters as follows:

          71
          • 2 Set the interface parameters as follows:

            71
          • . Transmission speed: 9600 bps

            71
            • . Transmission speed: 9600 bps

              71
              • . Transmission speed: 9600 bps

                71
            • . Data bits: 8

              71
              • . Data bits: 8

                71
            • . Stop bit: 1

              71
              • . Stop bit: 1

                71
            • . Parity: No

              71
              • . Parity: No

                71
            • . Flow control: none

              71
              • . Flow control: none

                71
          • Note: Do not use XON/XFF flow control.

            71
            • Note: Do not use XON/XFF flow control.

              71
    • The next step is to define IP parameters using the CLI.

      71
      • The next step is to define IP parameters using the CLI.

        71
    • Procedure 13 Configure initial card parameters using the CLI

      71
      • Procedure 13 Configure initial card parameters using the CLI

        71
        • 1 Enter the key-code.

          71
          • 1 Enter the key-code.

            71
        • 2 Enter the card feature (Basic or Advanced).

          71
          • 2 Enter the card feature (Basic or Advanced).

            71
        • 3 From the VT-100 type terminal press the Enter key. The logon window appears.

          71
          • 3 From the VT-100 type terminal press the Enter key. The logon window appears.

            71
        • 4 At the login prompt, enter the following: admin The default password is blank. Press the Enter key at the password prompt.

          71
          • 4 At the login prompt, enter the following: admin The default password is blank. Press the Enter key at the password prompt.

            71
        • 5 Access the System Administration menu. Enter: SA The System Administration menu opens.

          71
          • 5 Access the System Administration menu. Enter: SA The System Administration menu opens.

            71
        • 6 Access the System Attributes Editor. Enter: SY The System Attributes Editor opens.

          71
          • 6 Access the System Attributes Editor. Enter: SY The System Attributes Editor opens.

            71
        • 7 Enter the following IP attributes for the ICB card:

          71
          • 7 Enter the following IP attributes for the ICB card:

            71
          • . IP address - The internet protocol address which has the same format as the gateway address.

            71
            • . IP address - The internet protocol address which has the same format as the gateway address.

              71
              • . IP address - The internet protocol address which has the same format as the gateway address.

                71
            • . Subnet mask - The part of the IP address which represents a subnetwork within a network. The subnet mask has a format of XXX.X...

              71
              • . Subnet mask - The part of the IP address which represents a subnetwork within a network. The subnet mask has a format of XXX.X...

                71
            • . Gateway address - Is in the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where every token is in the range 0-255.

              72
              • . Gateway address - Is in the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where every token is in the range 0-255.

                72
        • 8 Enter S to save the parameters.

          72
          • 8 Enter S to save the parameters.

            72
        • 9 Exit the CLI and proceed to

          72
          • 9 Exit the CLI and proceed to

            72
            • Procedure 14

              72
    • Procedure 14 Access the administration BUI

      72
      • Procedure 14 Access the administration BUI

        72
        • 1 Check the installation by doing the following:

          72
          • 1 Check the installation by doing the following:

            72
          • a Run a browser, either Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer.

            72
            • a Run a browser, either Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer.

              72
          • b In the location field, enter: http://<ICB IP address>

            72
            • b In the location field, enter: http://<ICB IP address>

              72
          • c Login as an administrator. The default ID and password are admin and carriage return (enter key).

            72
            • c Login as an administrator. The default ID and password are admin and carriage return (enter key).

              72
          • d Proceed with the installation using the Installation Wizard (see below).

            72
            • d Proceed with the installation using the Installation Wizard (see below).

              72
  • ICB Installation Wizard

    72
    • ICB Installation Wizard

      72
    • Overview

      72
      • Overview

        72
      • The ICB Installation Wizard provides an easy method for configuring new systems. Only a user who logs in as an administrator can...

        72
        • The ICB Installation Wizard provides an easy method for configuring new systems. Only a user who logs in as an administrator can...

          72
          • “Administration BUI” on page 105

            72
      • After completing a Wizard session, the administrator can try operating the card (that is, schedule a conference and place a call...

        72
        • After completing a Wizard session, the administrator can try operating the card (that is, schedule a conference and place a call...

          72
      • The Installation Wizard consists of four steps, each of which appears on a separate window. For a new installation, follow the W...

        73
        • The Installation Wizard consists of four steps, each of which appears on a separate window. For a new installation, follow the W...

          73
        • 1 Basic Card Settings - use this window when getting started. The Administrator must enter the time zone of the ICB card.

          73
          • 1 Basic Card Settings - use this window when getting started. The Administrator must enter the time zone of the ICB card.

            73
            • 1 Basic Card Settings - use this window when getting started. The Administrator must enter the time zone of the ICB card.

              73
          • 2 Access Numbers - select the dialing method (that is, direct meeting or single-number) and enter the DNs according to Meridian system configuration.

            73
            • 2 Access Numbers - select the dialing method (that is, direct meeting or single-number) and enter the DNs according to Meridian system configuration.

              73
          • 3 Define First User - define at least one user in order to perform sanity tests, such as scheduling conferences and placing call...

            73
            • 3 Define First User - define at least one user in order to perform sanity tests, such as scheduling conferences and placing call...

              73
          • 4 Dual Card Meetings - define the parameters for dual-card meetings. This step appears only in the primary card of a dual-card ICB configuration.

            73
            • 4 Dual Card Meetings - define the parameters for dual-card meetings. This step appears only in the primary card of a dual-card ICB configuration.

              73
      • Conventions

        73
        • Conventions

          73
        • All Installation Wizard windows list the steps on the left of the window. During installation advance step-by-step by clicking o...

          73
          • All Installation Wizard windows list the steps on the left of the window. During installation advance step-by-step by clicking o...

            73
    • Step 1 - Basic Card Settings

      73
      • Step 1 - Basic Card Settings

        73
      • Figure 28 on page 74 shows the Basic Card Settings window. Click on the Install Wizard link on the ICB Dashboard to access this window.

        73
        • Figure 28 on page 74 shows the Basic Card Settings window. Click on the Install Wizard link on the ICB Dashboard to access this window.

          73
          • Figure 28 on page 74

            73
        • Figure 28 Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window

          74
          • Figure 28 Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window

            74
      • Table 14 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Basic Card Settings window.

        74
        • Table 14 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Basic Card Settings window.

          74
          • Table 14

            74
        • <TABLE>

          74
          • Table 14 Basic Card Settings parameters

            74
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            74
            • <TABLE ROW>

              74
              • Item

                74
              • Description

                74
          • <TABLE BODY>

            74
            • <TABLE ROW>

              74
              • Name

                74
              • Enter the card’s name. Range: Free text up to 20 characters.

                74
            • <TABLE ROW>

              74
              • IP Address

                74
              • Shows the IP address of the card, which appears as view only.

                74
                • Note: Define the card address using the CLI.

                  74
                  • Note: Define the card address using the CLI.

                    74
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • Type

                75
              • Define the card’s configuration type as follows:

                75
                • . Single card (stand-alone).

                  75
                  • . Single card (stand-alone).

                    75
                    • . Single card (stand-alone).

                      75
                • . Primary card in a dual-card pair.

                  75
                  • . Primary card in a dual-card pair.

                    75
                    • . Primary card in a dual-card pair.

                      75
                • . Secondary card in a dual-card pair.

                  75
                  • . Secondary card in a dual-card pair.

                    75
                    • . Secondary card in a dual-card pair.

                      75
                • Note 1: Dual-card meeting configuration in Step 4 uses this information. If information is changed here, a window opens reminding you to change the settings of a dual-card meeting.

                  75
                  • Note 1: Dual-card meeting configuration in Step 4 uses this information. If information is changed here, a window opens reminding you to change the settings of a dual-card meeting.

                    75
                • Note 2: When an ICB card of type “single” already configured with 10 DNs pairs is changed to “primary” or “secondary”, one of th...

                  75
                  • Note 2: When an ICB card of type “single” already configured with 10 DNs pairs is changed to “primary” or “secondary”, one of th...

                    75
                • Note 3: When a “primary” or “secondary” card is changed to be “single”, all dual meetings are changed to simple meetings and their port size is reduced to the capacity of this card.

                  75
                  • Note 3: When a “primary” or “secondary” card is changed to be “single”, all dual meetings are changed to simple meetings and their port size is reduced to the capacity of this card.

                    75
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • Default Conference Language

                75
              • Determine the default voice-prompt language for conferences and the TUI. When scheduling a conference, users can select a language from the available set, but if the user does not specify a language this parameter applies. Default: American English.

                75
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • Time Zone

                75
              • Select the appropriate time zone for the ICB card. If this field is not entered, conferences will not be scheduled at the proper times.

                75
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • IP address of E-mail Server

                75
              • Enter the IP address of the server that the ICB uses to send scheduling confirmation and administration E-mail messages. If this...

                75
                • Note: The E-mail server must support the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).

                  75
                  • Note: The E-mail server must support the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).

                    75
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • “From” E-mail address, by which the ICB identifies itself

                75
              • Enter the E-mail address which the ICB uses to identify itself when sending E-mails. This item appears in the “From:” field of sent E-mails.

                75
                • Note 1: Some E-mail servers require this information as a mandatory field. It cannot be empty, but it can be a non-existent address. Some servers will not deliver the E-mail if it is not correct.

                  75
                  • Note 1: Some E-mail servers require this information as a mandatory field. It cannot be empty, but it can be a non-existent address. Some servers will not deliver the E-mail if it is not correct.

                    75
                • Note 2: ICB never receives E-mails, so it does not require an address. However, the “from” address is used when returned mail oc...

                  75
                  • Note 2: ICB never receives E-mails, so it does not require an address. However, the “from” address is used when returned mail oc...

                    75
            • <TABLE ROW>

              75
              • Automatic Call Distribution

                75
              • Define the ACD setup according to the Meridian system ACD configuration.

                75
                • Use an agent ID - Indicate whether ACD is configured with the agent ID option. If yes, enter the four-digit agent ID of the first ICB port in the adjacent text box. The other ports use the succeeding agent IDs.

                  75
                  • Use an agent ID - Indicate whether ACD is configured with the agent ID option. If yes, enter the four-digit agent ID of the first ICB port in the adjacent text box. The other ports use the succeeding agent IDs.

                    75
                • Use multiple queue assignment - Indicate if ACD is configured with the multiple-queue option. An entry is required, because this option affects the agent login process which the system applies to the ports.

                  75
                  • Use multiple queue assignment - Indicate if ACD is configured with the multiple-queue option. An entry is required, because this option affects the agent login process which the system applies to the ports.

                    75
    • Step 2 - Access Numbers

      76
      • Step 2 - Access Numbers

        76
      • Use this step to define the access method, direct meeting or single-number, and the DNs according to Meridian system configuration.

        76
        • Use this step to define the access method, direct meeting or single-number, and the DNs according to Meridian system configuration.

          76
          • Figure 29

            76
        • Figure 29 Installation Wizard: Step 2 - Access Numbers window

          76
          • Figure 29 Installation Wizard: Step 2 - Access Numbers window

            76
      • Table 15 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Access Numbers window. Configure all the DNs in this window according to Meridian system configuration.

        77
        • Table 15 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Access Numbers window. Configure all the DNs in this window according to Meridian system configuration.

          77
          • Table 15

            77
        • <TABLE>

          77
          • Table 15 Access Numbers parameters

            77
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            77
            • <TABLE ROW>

              77
              • Item

                77
              • Description

                77
          • <TABLE BODY>

            77
            • <TABLE ROW>

              77
              • Use a single access number

                77
              • Enter the single DN to use for accessing all conferences.

                77
            • <TABLE ROW>

              77
              • Use a list of access numbers

                77
              • This field requires a list of DN pairs, because with direct meeting access users dial the conference DN and then the chairperson...

                77
                • Note: Define only nine DN pairs for primary or secondary cards in a dual-card set. One DN must be reserved pair for dual-card meetings (see

                  77
                  • Note: Define only nine DN pairs for primary or secondary cards in a dual-card set. One DN must be reserved pair for dual-card meetings (see

                    77
                    • “Step 4 - Dual Card Meetings” on page 77

                      77
                • Delete DNs by clicking on a table cell and pressing the Delete key, which leaves the cell empty. DNs that are in use by a future or current conference cannot be deleted; an error message appears when submitting the form.

                  77
                • When upgrading from MICB Release 2, the system uses the same table. The old DN pairs appear in the table.

                  77
                  • When upgrading from MICB Release 2, the system uses the same table. The old DN pairs appear in the table.

                    77
            • <TABLE ROW>

              77
              • Assistance DN

                77
              • Enter the DN of an operator or attendant. The system dials this DN when the chairperson in an active conference selects “call assistant” from the TUI or BUI.

                77
            • <TABLE ROW>

              77
              • TUI DN

                77
              • Enter the DN to access TUI services.

                77
    • Step 3 - Define First User

      77
      • Step 3 - Define First User

        77
      • This step appears only during a new installation. Use this window to define a new user for testing the ICB after completing installation. The user defined here can be deleted, or modified, from the regular User Administration window.

        77
        • This step appears only during a new installation. Use this window to define a new user for testing the ICB after completing installation. The user defined here can be deleted, or modified, from the regular User Administration window.

          77
      • This window is identical to the “new user” window (see

        77
        • This window is identical to the “new user” window (see

          77
          • Figure 61 on page 121

            77
    • Step 4 - Dual Card Meetings

      77
      • Step 4 - Dual Card Meetings

        77
      • Configure the parameters for a dual-card meeting in this window. This step appears only when the card is a member of a dual-card...

        77
        • Configure the parameters for a dual-card meeting in this window. This step appears only when the card is a member of a dual-card...

          77
        • Note: The secondary ICB card must be installed and configured first. Dual-card meeting parameters and DNs are defined in the pri...

          78
          • Note: The secondary ICB card must be installed and configured first. Dual-card meeting parameters and DNs are defined in the pri...

            78
      • All DNs must be configured in the Meridian system.

        78
        • All DNs must be configured in the Meridian system.

          78
      • Table 16 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Dual Card Meetings window.

        78
        • Table 16 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Dual Card Meetings window.

          78
          • Table 16

            78
        • <TABLE>

          78
          • Table 16 Dual Card Meetings parameters

            78
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Item

                78
              • Description

                78
          • <TABLE BODY>

            78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • IP address of secondary card

                78
              • Enter the IP address of the secondary card.

                78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Conference access number

                78
              • Enter the DN of the dual-card meeting. Callers will dial this number to access the dual-card meeting.

                78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Chairperson number in primary card

                78
              • Enter the chairperson DN for the dual-card meeting. The chairperson uses this number to access the dual-card meeting.

                78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Transfer number

                78
              • Enter the DN that the ICB uses to transfer calls from the primary card to the secondary card. The system hides this number from end users.

                78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Link number

                78
              • Enter the DN that the ICB uses to create a voice path between both cards. The system hides this number from end users.

                78
            • <TABLE ROW>

              78
              • Chairperson control of dual meeting

                78
              • For more information see, “Dual-card meeting” on page 104. Full control including secondary card - If this is clicked, the chair...

                78
                • “Dual-card meeting” on page 104

                  78
• Browser user interface

  79
  • Browser user interface

    79
  • Purpose

    79
    • Purpose

      79
    • This chapter describes how to use the browser user interface (BUI), a web-based application, for conference scheduling, chairperson operations, and system administration.

      79
      • This chapter describes how to use the browser user interface (BUI), a web-based application, for conference scheduling, chairperson operations, and system administration.

        79
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      79
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        79
      • . “Overview” on page 79 - introduces the browser user interface and its system requirements.

        79
        • . “Overview” on page 79 - introduces the browser user interface and its system requirements.

          79
          • . “Overview” on page 79 - introduces the browser user interface and its system requirements.

            79
            • . “Overview” on page 79

              79
        • . “Scheduling BUI” on page 86 - describes the interface that users and super-users can use to schedule conferences.

          79
          • . “Scheduling BUI” on page 86 - describes the interface that users and super-users can use to schedule conferences.

            79
            • . “Scheduling BUI” on page 86

              79
        • . “Chairperson operations” on page 98 - describes the interface that a chairperson can use to control an active conference.

          79
          • . “Chairperson operations” on page 98 - describes the interface that a chairperson can use to control an active conference.

            79
            • . “Chairperson operations” on page 98

              79
        • . “Administration BUI” on page 105 - describes the interface that an administrator uses for ICB configuration and administration.

          79
          • . “Administration BUI” on page 105 - describes the interface that an administrator uses for ICB configuration and administration.

            79
            • . “Administration BUI” on page 105

              79
  • Overview

    79
    • Overview

      79
    • The HTML/HTTP based BUI provides a fast response time and supports 20 active BUI users in a direct LAN connection. The BUI suppo...

      79
      • The HTML/HTTP based BUI provides a fast response time and supports 20 active BUI users in a direct LAN connection. The BUI suppo...

        79
      • . Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 4.01 or higher.

        79
        • . Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 4.01 or higher.

          79
          • . Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 4.01 or higher.

            79
        • . Netscape Communicator, version 4.5 or higher.

          79
          • . Netscape Communicator, version 4.5 or higher.

            79
      • Note: The system does not support browsers running on MacIntosh computers.

        79
        • Note: The system does not support browsers running on MacIntosh computers.

          79
    • The ICB web server runs on the ICB card. The ICB card acts as a stand-alone system. Users navigate their browser directly to the card’s IP address.

      79
      • The ICB web server runs on the ICB card. The ICB card acts as a stand-alone system. Users navigate their browser directly to the card’s IP address.

        79
    • User types

      80
      • User types

        80
      • When logging in to the ICB BUI, your login ID connects you to the server as a distinct user type. The administrator determines the user type for each user.

        80
        • When logging in to the ICB BUI, your login ID connects you to the server as a distinct user type. The administrator determines the user type for each user.

          80
          • Table 17

            80
        • <TABLE>

          80
          • Table 17 BUI user types

            80
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            80
            • <TABLE ROW>

              80
              • User type

                80
              • Description

                80
          • <TABLE BODY>

            80
            • <TABLE ROW>

              80
              • User

                80
              • A user can reserve meetings under their account, and modify and delete these meetings. Users can see only the meetings that they schedule.

                80
            • <TABLE ROW>

              80
              • Super-user

                80
              • In addition to normal user functions, a super-user can reserve meetings under other users’ accounts. A super-user can modify and delete the meetings of other users. Super-users can see all meetings.

                80
            • <TABLE ROW>

              80
              • Administrator

                80
              • The administrator manages ICB system parameters and resources such as user IDs and group-call tables.

                80
            • <TABLE ROW>

              80
              • Executive User

                80
              • In addition to normal user functions, an executive user can view, but not change, all meetings of other users.

                80
    • Log into the BUI

      80
      • Log into the BUI

        80
      • Figure 30 shows the first window that appears when reaching the BUI.

        80
        • Figure 30 shows the first window that appears when reaching the BUI.

          80
          • Figure 30

            80
        • Figure 30 ICB home page layout

          81
          • Figure 30 ICB home page layout

            81
      • The only possible action from this window is to click on the LOGIN button.

        81
        • The only possible action from this window is to click on the LOGIN button.

          81
      • Follow the steps in

        81
        • Follow the steps in

          81
          • Procedure 15

            81
      • Procedure 15 Login to the BUI

        81
        • Procedure 15 Login to the BUI

          81
          • 1 Click on the LOGIN button. The window in

            81
            • 1 Click on the LOGIN button. The window in

              81
              • Figure 31

                81
            • Figure 31 Login dialog box (Internet Explorer)

              82
              • Figure 31 Login dialog box (Internet Explorer)

                82
          • 2 Enter your login ID in the “User name” field. To log into the administrator BUI, enter an administrator ID.

            82
            • 2 Enter your login ID in the “User name” field. To log into the administrator BUI, enter an administrator ID.

              82
          • 3 Enter your password in the “Password” field. When logging in the first time, enter six zeroes (000000). To log into the administrator BUI, enter an administrator password.

            82
            • 3 Enter your password in the “Password” field. When logging in the first time, enter six zeroes (000000). To log into the administrator BUI, enter an administrator password.

              82
          • 4 Click on the OK button. If your login is unsuccessful, the system re-displays the dialog box. After a pre-defined number of unsuccessful logins, the system blocks the user.

            82
            • 4 Click on the OK button. If your login is unsuccessful, the system re-displays the dialog box. After a pre-defined number of unsuccessful logins, the system blocks the user.

              82
            • Note: To find a missing password, see

              82
              • Note: To find a missing password, see

                82
                • “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223

                  82
          • 5 The main window opens. See

            82
            • 5 The main window opens. See

              82
              • Figure 32

                82
            • Figure 32 Main ICB screen

              82
              • Figure 32 Main ICB screen

                82
      • Depending on the login ID type,

        83
        • Depending on the login ID type,

          83
          • Table 18

            83
        • <TABLE>

          83
          • Table 18 Login entry point

            83
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            83
            • <TABLE ROW>

              83
              • Login entry

                83
              • BUI Application

                83
          • <TABLE BODY>

            83
            • <TABLE ROW>

              83
              • Regular, super-user, or executive user ID

                83
              • Scheduling BUI.

                83
                • Schedule meetings from this window.

                  83
            • <TABLE ROW>

              83
              • Administrator user ID

                83
              • ICB Dashboard.

                83
            • <TABLE ROW>

              83
              • Meeting chairperson number and password

                83
              • Meeting Control window.

                83
                • This window allows a chairperson to control an active meeting.

                  83
    • Login password change

      83
      • Login password change

        83
      • Follow the steps in

        83
        • Follow the steps in

          83
          • Procedure 16

            83
      • Procedure 16 Change your login password

        83
        • Procedure 16 Change your login password

          83
          • 1 Click on the change Change Password button on the first window that opens after logging in (see

            83
            • 1 Click on the change Change Password button on the first window that opens after logging in (see

              83
              • Figure 32 on page 82

                83
            • Note: Change Password is a link on the Dashboard.

              83
              • Note: Change Password is a link on the Dashboard.

                83
            • The window in

              83
              • Figure 33

                83
            • Figure 33 Change password window

              84
              • Figure 33 Change password window

                84
          • 2 Enter the current password for authentication, then the new password. Enter the new password a second time for confirmation. The passwords do not appear when entered (asterisks appear).

            84
            • 2 Enter the current password for authentication, then the new password. Enter the new password a second time for confirmation. The passwords do not appear when entered (asterisks appear).

              84
          • 3 Click on the Submit button to apply the changes. Click on the Cancel button to abort the changes. In both cases, the system returns to the previous window.

            84
            • 3 Click on the Submit button to apply the changes. Click on the Cancel button to abort the changes. In both cases, the system returns to the previous window.

              84
    • Customize the BUI home page and title bar

      84
      • Customize the BUI home page and title bar

        84
      • Initially, the ICB home page comes with a set format. The Customized BUI Home Page and Title Bar feature enables administrators ...

        84
        • Initially, the ICB home page comes with a set format. The Customized BUI Home Page and Title Bar feature enables administrators ...

          84
      • The following are the prerequisites for using this feature:

        84
        • The following are the prerequisites for using this feature:

          84
        • . The image must fit reasonably in the browser window. Nortel Networks recommends that the image be no larger than 690 pixels wide and 420 pixels high.

          84
          • . The image must fit reasonably in the browser window. Nortel Networks recommends that the image be no larger than 690 pixels wide and 420 pixels high.

            84
            • . The image must fit reasonably in the browser window. Nortel Networks recommends that the image be no larger than 690 pixels wide and 420 pixels high.

              84
          • . The logo must be no larger than 124 pixels wide and 40 pixels high.

            84
            • . The logo must be no larger than 124 pixels wide and 40 pixels high.

              84
          • . The image must be in GIF format.

            84
            • . The image must be in GIF format.

              84
      • The ICB Dashboard provides a tool for uploading and installing the customer’s images (see

        84
        • The ICB Dashboard provides a tool for uploading and installing the customer’s images (see

          84
          • “Company images upload” on page 116

            84
    • Fixed title frame

      84
      • Fixed title frame

        84
      • Figure 34 shows the fixed title frame that appears on top of all conferences. Subsequent screen captures do not show this frame.

        84
        • Figure 34 shows the fixed title frame that appears on top of all conferences. Subsequent screen captures do not show this frame.

          84
          • Figure 34

            84
        • Figure 34 BUI fixed title frame

          85
          • Figure 34 BUI fixed title frame

            85
      • Help window

        85
        • Help window

          85
        • Clicking on the Help button on the title frame opens a separate browser window in which it displays the Help window. This enable...

          85
          • Clicking on the Help button on the title frame opens a separate browser window in which it displays the Help window. This enable...

            85
          • . User, Super-User, and Executive help (scheduling windows)

            85
            • . User, Super-User, and Executive help (scheduling windows)

              85
              • . User, Super-User, and Executive help (scheduling windows)

                85
            • . Chairperson control help (chairperson control window)

              85
              • . Chairperson control help (chairperson control window)

                85
            • . Administrator help (only an administrator can view this help)

              85
              • . Administrator help (only an administrator can view this help)

                85
        • The Help window has two frames; topic links appear on the left and help text appears on the right. Click on an item in the left frame help topics to access information about the required topic.

          85
          • The Help window has two frames; topic links appear on the left and help text appears on the right. Click on an item in the left frame help topics to access information about the required topic.

            85
        • Click on the Close window link to close the Help window.

          85
          • Click on the Close window link to close the Help window.

            85
          • Note: To view help text, Adobe Acrobat must be installed on the computer.

            85
            • Note: To view help text, Adobe Acrobat must be installed on the computer.

              85
  • Scheduling BUI

    86
    • Scheduling BUI

      86
    • Figure 35 shows the navigation between the Scheduling BUI windows.

      86
      • Figure 35 shows the navigation between the Scheduling BUI windows.

        86
        • Figure 35

          86
      • Figure 35 Scheduling BUI navigation flowchart

        86
        • Figure 35 Scheduling BUI navigation flowchart

          86
    • Meetings List window

      87
      • Meetings List window

        87
      • Figure 36 shows the Meeting List window that appears directly after user login. This window displays a table of the user’s meetings and provides access to scheduling operations.

        87
        • Figure 36 shows the Meeting List window that appears directly after user login. This window displays a table of the user’s meetings and provides access to scheduling operations.

          87
          • Figure 36

            87
        • Figure 36 Meetings List window (super-user’s display)

          87
          • Figure 36 Meetings List window (super-user’s display)

            87
      • If this window is accessed by a user, the window displays the conferences scheduled by that user only. If this window is accesse...

        87
        • If this window is accessed by a user, the window displays the conferences scheduled by that user only. If this window is accesse...

          87
      • The maximum number of conferences per page is 10. When the list of conferences is longer than one page, click on the “Next 10” or “Previous 10” links to view additional conferences.

        87
        • The maximum number of conferences per page is 10. When the list of conferences is longer than one page, click on the “Next 10” or “Previous 10” links to view additional conferences.

          87
      • For each conference, click on the corresponding icon next to the conference to perform the following:

        87
        • For each conference, click on the corresponding icon next to the conference to perform the following:

          87
        • . Pencil icon - edit the conference (or just view all details).

          87
          • . Pencil icon - edit the conference (or just view all details).

            87
            • . Pencil icon - edit the conference (or just view all details).

              87
          • . X icon - delete the conference (the BUI automatically updates the display).

            87
            • . X icon - delete the conference (the BUI automatically updates the display).

              87
          • . Copy icon - conference details are copied from the existing conference.

            88
            • . Copy icon - conference details are copied from the existing conference.

              88
          • . Gavel icon - jump to the “Meeting Control” window for an active conference (the icon appears only for active conferences).

            88
            • . Gavel icon - jump to the “Meeting Control” window for an active conference (the icon appears only for active conferences).

              88
      • The BUI can display past conferences, up to the “aging” factor that an administrator defines (see

        88
        • The BUI can display past conferences, up to the “aging” factor that an administrator defines (see

          88
          • Figure 53 on page 108

            88
      • A super-user and executive-user can view permanent conferences, but cannot edit or delete them. Therefore, the system does not display the Edit and Delete icons next to permanent conferences that are not accessed by an administrator.

        88
        • A super-user and executive-user can view permanent conferences, but cannot edit or delete them. Therefore, the system does not display the Edit and Delete icons next to permanent conferences that are not accessed by an administrator.

          88
      • Table 19 describes the columns in the Meeting List window.

        88
        • Table 19 describes the columns in the Meeting List window.

          88
          • Table 19

            88
        • <TABLE>

          88
          • Table 19 Meeting List window fields

            88
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Field

                88
              • Description

                88
          • <TABLE BODY>

            88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Conference title

                88
              • Shows the subject text that appears when scheduling a meeting. It can be empty.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Number of participants

                88
              • Shows the number of ports reserved for this meeting.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Date

                88
              • Shows the conference date. For permanent conferences, the date shows “Permanent”. For recurrent conferences, the letter “R” follows the date.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Start time

                88
              • Shows the conference start time. For permanent conferences, this fields is empty.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Duration

                88
              • Shows the conference duration. For permanent conferences, this fields is empty.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Dialing access

                88
              • Shows the conference access number (DN).

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Chairperson access

                88
              • Shows the chairperson access number.

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Owner

                88
              • Shows the name of the person who scheduled the conference. This column appears only for super-users, because they can view all m...

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              88
              • Edit

                88
              • Click on the Edit icon to open a window for editing this conference. The window opens with the selected item’s parameters

                88
            • <TABLE ROW>

              89
              • Delete

                89
              • Click on the Delete icon to delete this conference. When the Delete icon is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box appears:

                89
                • Click on the Delete icon to delete this conference. When the Delete icon is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box appears:

                  89
                • If the conference is active, the following additional line appears before this question: “Warning! this conference is active.”

                  89
                  • If the conference is active, the following additional line appears before this question: “Warning! this conference is active.”

                    89
            • <TABLE ROW>

              89
              • Copy

                89
              • Click on the Copy icon to open a window for copying values from this conference. The window opens with the selected item’s parameters. The copy icon is not displayed for Permanent or Ad-hoc conferences.

                89
            • <TABLE ROW>

              89
              • Control

                89
              • The Control icon applies to active conferences only. Click on the gavel icon to open the Meeting Control window for this conference.

                89
      • To schedule a new conference, click on the New Conference button on the top left-hand corner of the window. A new window appears (see

        89
        • To schedule a new conference, click on the New Conference button on the top left-hand corner of the window. A new window appears (see

          89
          • Figure 37 on page 90

            89
    • Scheduling window

      89
      • Scheduling window

        89
      • Click on the New Conference button, or click on the edit icon (a pencil), in the row of an already scheduled conference to open the Scheduling window.

        89
        • Click on the New Conference button, or click on the edit icon (a pencil), in the row of an already scheduled conference to open the Scheduling window.

          89
      • General section

        89
        • General section

          89
        • Figure 37 on page 90 shows the scheduling window when it first opens.

          89
          • Figure 37 on page 90 shows the scheduling window when it first opens.

            89
            • Figure 37 on page 90

              89
          • Figure 37 Scheduling window - Schedule a New Conference

            90
            • Figure 37 Scheduling window - Schedule a New Conference

              90
        • All fields have defaults, but users typically select the date and time, and number of participants. The system provides defaults for the other parameters or generates the values automatically.

          90
          • All fields have defaults, but users typically select the date and time, and number of participants. The system provides defaults for the other parameters or generates the values automatically.

            90
        • After scheduling a conference, view the Scheduling Confirmation window to verify the entries. See

          90
          • After scheduling a conference, view the Scheduling Confirmation window to verify the entries. See

            90
            • Figure 42 on page 97

              90
        • Table 20 describes the fields in the Scheduling window, by section.

          90
          • Table 20 describes the fields in the Scheduling window, by section.

            90
            • Table 20

              90
          • <TABLE>

            90
            • Table 20 Scheduling window fields

              90
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              90
              • <TABLE ROW>

                90
                • Field

                  90
                • Description

                  90
            • <TABLE BODY>

              90
              • <TABLE ROW>

                90
                • General section

                  90
              • <TABLE ROW>

                90
                • Subject

                  90
                • Enter text that describes the purpose of the conference. Range: Enter up to 20 characters or leave this field empty. Default: Empty.

                  90
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Number of participants

                  91
                • Enter the number of ports to reserve for this conference, including the chairperson ports. The application makes sure that the t...

                  91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Dual meeting link (not shown in Figure 37 on page 90)

                  91
                  • Figure 37 on page 90

                    91
                • Click here if a dual-card meeting is required. A similar window with the following dual-card meeting attributes opens:

                  91
                  • . Up to 60 or 62 ports are available, depending on the configuration parameter “full chairperson control”.

                    91
                    • . Up to 60 or 62 ports are available, depending on the configuration parameter “full chairperson control”.

                      91
                      • . Up to 60 or 62 ports are available, depending on the configuration parameter “full chairperson control”.

                        91
                  • . The “Access Numbers” section displays a fixed dual-card meeting DN, which cannot be changed.

                    91
                    • . The “Access Numbers” section displays a fixed dual-card meeting DN, which cannot be changed.

                      91
                      • . The “Access Numbers” section displays a fixed dual-card meeting DN, which cannot be changed.

                        91
                    • . Search for User ID.

                      91
                      • . Search for User ID.

                        91
                  • Note: This link appears only on the primary ICB card in a dual-card set.

                    91
                    • Note: This link appears only on the primary ICB card in a dual-card set.

                      91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Select date

                  91
                • Select the date the conference starts from the pull-down menus or calendar icon (left of the pull-down menus). See Figure 38 on page 92 for a depiction of this icon. Range: Current day to one year ahead of current day. Default: Current day.

                  91
                  • Figure 38 on page 92

                    91
                  • Note: This field cannot be modified when editing an existing conference.

                    91
                    • Note: This field cannot be modified when editing an existing conference.

                      91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Owner ID

                  91
                • Enter the user ID of the user who scheduled the conference and has permission to delete or edit it. When the BUI displays this f...

                  91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Chairperson

                  91
                • Enter the name of the chairperson for the user’s reference. Range: Text up to 20 characters. Default: Empty.

                  91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Free Ports section - see “Free Ports section” on page 93.

                  91
                  • “Free Ports section” on page 93

                    91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Time section

                  91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                91
                • Start time

                  91
                • Enter the time that the conference starts. The minutes box shows 15-minute increments (that is, 0, 15, 30, and 45). Range: Hours/15-minute increments. Default: Current time.

                  91
                  • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                    91
                    • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                      91
                      • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                        91
                  • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                    91
                    • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                      91
                      • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                        91
              • <TABLE ROW>

                92
                • Duration

                  92
                • Enter the duration of the conference. Range: Up to 12 hours in 15-minute increments (the selection box shows all possible values). Default: 1 hour.

                  92
              • <TABLE ROW>

                92
                • Access Numbers section

                  92
              • <TABLE ROW>

                92
                • DN pair usage option

                  92
                • Select the access DN pair to use as follows:

                  92
                  • . Automatically assigned (the default) - the ICB selects the DN pair; no user action is required.

                    92
                    • . Automatically assigned (the default) - the ICB selects the DN pair; no user action is required.

                      92
                      • . Automatically assigned (the default) - the ICB selects the DN pair; no user action is required.

                        92
                  • . Choose a number - select a number from the list. The list shows pairs of numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]. Th...

                    92
                    • . Choose a number - select a number from the list. The list shows pairs of numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]. Th...

                      92
                      • . Choose a number - select a number from the list. The list shows pairs of numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]. Th...

                        92
              • <TABLE ROW>

                92
                • Options section - see “Options section” on page 94.

                  92
                  • “Options section” on page 94

                    92
        • When the calendar icon is clicked (located next to the drop-down menu for the date), the calendar window opens as depicted in

          92
          • When the calendar icon is clicked (located next to the drop-down menu for the date), the calendar window opens as depicted in

            92
            • Figure 38

              92
          • Figure 38 Calendar icon

            92
            • Figure 38 Calendar icon

              92
        • When in edit mode, the title of this window is: “Edit Conference”. The following fields cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference:

          92
          • When in edit mode, the title of this window is: “Edit Conference”. The following fields cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference:

            92
          • . date

            92
            • . date

              92
              • . date

                92
            • . dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a single-card conference dual and vice versa)

              92
              • . dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a single-card conference dual and vice versa)

                92
            • . recurrent option

              92
              • . recurrent option

                92
        • Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:

          93
          • Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:

            93
          • . number of participants

            93
            • . number of participants

              93
              • . number of participants

                93
            • . duration

              93
              • . duration

                93
            • . add ports as needed (under the Options section)

              93
              • . add ports as needed (under the Options section)

                93
      • Free Ports section

        93
        • Free Ports section

          93
        • Figure 39 shows the how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking on the Free Ports button for a regular meeting. The information ...

          93
          • Figure 39 shows the how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking on the Free Ports button for a regular meeting. The information ...

            93
            • Figure 39

              93
            • Figure 40

              93
          • Figure 39 Scheduling window - Free Ports section for a regular meeting

            93
            • Figure 39 Scheduling window - Free Ports section for a regular meeting

              93
          • Figure 40 Scheduling window - Free Ports section for a dual card meeting

            93
            • Figure 40 Scheduling window - Free Ports section for a dual card meeting

              93
      • Options section

        94
        • Options section

          94
        • Figure 41 shows how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking on the Options button.

          94
          • Figure 41 shows how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking on the Options button.

            94
            • Figure 41

              94
          • Figure 41 Scheduling window - Options section

            94
            • Figure 41 Scheduling window - Options section

              94
        • Table 21 describes the fields in the Options section.

          94
          • Table 21 describes the fields in the Options section.

            94
            • Table 21

              94
          • <TABLE>

            94
            • Table 21 Scheduling window - Options section fields

              94
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              94
              • <TABLE ROW>

                94
                • Field

                  94
                • Description

                  94
            • <TABLE BODY>

              94
              • <TABLE ROW>

                94
                • Password section

                  94
              • <TABLE ROW>

                94
                • User Password

                  94
                • Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:

                  94
                  • . No password - no optional password.

                    94
                    • . No password - no optional password.

                      94
                      • . No password - no optional password.

                        94
                  • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                    94
                    • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                      94
                      • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                        94
                  • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                    94
                    • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                      94
                      • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                        94
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    94
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      94
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Chairperson Password

                  95
                • Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same options as the user password.

                  95
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    95
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Recurrence section (Does not appear for dual-card conferences, because they do not support the recurrence option).

                  95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Recurrence

                  95
                • Use this checkbox to activate or de-activate the recurrence feature. The adjacent criteria applies when this box is checked.

                  95
                  • Note: The recurrence option is only available when a specific DN pair in the Basic window is selected. If a DN pair is not selected, a pop-up message instructs you to select the DN pair first.

                    95
                    • Note: The recurrence option is only available when a specific DN pair in the Basic window is selected. If a DN pair is not selected, a pop-up message instructs you to select the DN pair first.

                      95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Recur Every

                  95
                • Enter the recurrence interval. Available values: Day, workday, week, two-weeks, and month.

                  95
                  • Note: If the first conference is not a workday, the workday option is not available.

                    95
                    • Note: If the first conference is not a workday, the workday option is not available.

                      95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • End After

                  95
                • Define the number of conference occurrences. Up to 52 occurrences can be defined, but they cannot be more than a year in advance.

                  95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Verify button

                  95
                • When this button is clicked, the system verifies port availability without actually setting them up. The system displays a resul...

                  95
                  • “Recurrent Meeting Verify Result window” on page 98

                    95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • General Options section

                  95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Indication for entry and exit

                  95
                • Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The following options are available from the pull-down menu:

                  95
                  • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                    95
                    • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                      95
                      • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                        95
                  • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                    95
                    • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                      95
                      • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                        95
                  • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                    95
                    • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                      95
                      • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                        95
                  • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                    95
                    • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                      95
                      • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                        95
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    95
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                95
                • Language

                  95
                • Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference. The pull-down menu offers the set of languages avai...

                  95
                  • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                    95
              • <TABLE ROW>

                96
                • Add ports if needed

                  96
                • When this box is checked, the system allows the meeting to expand beyond the number of reserved ports if more than the anticipat...

                  96
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    96
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      96
              • <TABLE ROW>

                96
                • Keep one port for chairperson

                  96
                • Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all but one of the ports are occupied, and the chairperson has not...

                  96
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    96
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      96
      • Scheduling Confirmation

        96
        • Scheduling Confirmation

          96
        • Figure 42 on page 97 shows the window that appears after successfully scheduling a new, or modifying an existing, meeting. The system displays the window after it stores the conference in the database.

          96
          • Figure 42 on page 97 shows the window that appears after successfully scheduling a new, or modifying an existing, meeting. The system displays the window after it stores the conference in the database.

            96
            • Figure 42 on page 97

              96
        • The BUI displays the conference details and selected options in the same layout as the Scheduling window.

          96
          • The BUI displays the conference details and selected options in the same layout as the Scheduling window.

            96
          • Figure 42 Scheduling Confirmation window

            97
            • Figure 42 Scheduling Confirmation window

              97
        • In the case of a recurrent meeting, a Conference Dates section appears at the bottom of this window. The Conference Dates section lists the dates in which the conference is scheduled, including the first date specified in the meeting details (see

          97
          • In the case of a recurrent meeting, a Conference Dates section appears at the bottom of this window. The Conference Dates section lists the dates in which the conference is scheduled, including the first date specified in the meeting details (see

            97
            • Figure 43

              97
          • Figure 43 Recurrent Dates Confirmation window

            97
            • Figure 43 Recurrent Dates Confirmation window

              97
        • In the previous example, the system denied one date, because the ports were not available.

          97
          • In the previous example, the system denied one date, because the ports were not available.

            97
      • Recurrent Meeting Verify Result window

        98
        • Recurrent Meeting Verify Result window

          98
        • Figure 44 shows the window that the system displays when the Verify button is clicked when setting up a recurrent conference.

          98
          • Figure 44 shows the window that the system displays when the Verify button is clicked when setting up a recurrent conference.

            98
            • Figure 44

              98
          • Figure 44 Recurrent Conference Verify Result window

            98
            • Figure 44 Recurrent Conference Verify Result window

              98
        • The window displays the success result for each date specified in the recurrence criteria. In the case of a failure, the system indicates the reason (for example, not enough ports or DN is already in use).

          98
          • The window displays the success result for each date specified in the recurrence criteria. In the case of a failure, the system indicates the reason (for example, not enough ports or DN is already in use).

            98
          • Note: Editing the details of a recurrent conference only changes the conference for the selected day. All other occurrences of the recurrent conference are not changed.

            98
            • Note: Editing the details of a recurrent conference only changes the conference for the selected day. All other occurrences of the recurrent conference are not changed.

              98
  • Chairperson operations

    98
    • Chairperson operations

      98
    • Meeting Control window

      98
      • Meeting Control window

        98
      • The Meeting Control window is available to the chairperson only. The chairperson can access it in the following ways:

        98
        • The Meeting Control window is available to the chairperson only. The chairperson can access it in the following ways:

          98
        • . From the LOGIN window, enter the chairperson access number and chairperson password of the active meeting.

          98
          • . From the LOGIN window, enter the chairperson access number and chairperson password of the active meeting.

            98
            • . From the LOGIN window, enter the chairperson access number and chairperson password of the active meeting.

              98
          • . From the Meetings List window, in the Control column click on the gavel icon next to an active meeting in the list.

            98
            • . From the Meetings List window, in the Control column click on the gavel icon next to an active meeting in the list.

              98
      • A window opens showing details of the specific meeting. Users cannot select another conference to control when this window is open.

        98
        • A window opens showing details of the specific meeting. Users cannot select another conference to control when this window is open.

          98
      • The BUI allows only one active window per meeting. The associated voice port is the one identified as chairperson by access number.

        98
        • The BUI allows only one active window per meeting. The associated voice port is the one identified as chairperson by access number.

          98
          • Figure 45 on page 99

            98
          • Figure 49 on page 104

            98
        • Figure 45 Meeting Control window - Active chairperson

          99
          • Figure 45 Meeting Control window - Active chairperson

            99
      • Table 22 describes the options available in the Meeting Control window.

        99
        • Table 22 describes the options available in the Meeting Control window.

          99
          • Table 22

            99
        • <TABLE>

          99
          • Table 22 Meeting Control window fields

            99
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              99
              • Field

                99
              • Description

                99
          • <TABLE BODY>

            99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              99
              • Conference section

                99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              99
              • Add 15 minutes button

                99
              • Click on this button to add 15 minutes to the conference duration. The chairperson can invoke this command any time during the meeting. If successful, the system updates the “Time Left” indication.

                99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              99
              • Lock/Unlock button

                99
              • Click on this button to toggle from being locked to unlocked (or vice versa).

                99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              99
              • Session Management button

                99
              • Click on this button to open the session management window (see Figure 46 on page 101). Use this window to set up voting and a question and answer session.

                99
                • Figure 46 on page 101

                  99
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Chairperson section

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Active chairperson

                100
              • If the chairperson joins the conference by dialing in, this field shows the CLID of the call, if available. If not available, the window displays “the number is unavailable”.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Mute/Unmute button

                100
              • Click on this button to toggle between muting and unmuting the chairperson’s voice port only. When muted, this button appears as “Unmute”.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Stop Music button

                100
              • Click on this button to toggle between stopping and resuming music when alone in the meeting. When stopped, this button appears as “Resume Music”.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Volume Control button

                100
              • Click on this button to open a volume control panel (see Figure 48 on page 103). Use this panel to increase or decrease the volume in hear and talk directions.

                100
                • Figure 48 on page 103

                  100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Participants section

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Count & announce button

                100
              • Click on this button to announce to the conference the total number of participants, followed by participants’ names as recorded in the name entry.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Mute all button

                100
              • Click on this button to mute all participants, except the chairperson. When muted, the button becomes “Unmute all”.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Disconnect all button

                100
              • Click on this button to disconnect all participants, except the chairperson. When clicked, the BUI opens a dialog box (OK/CANCEL) to confirm this operation.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Dial-out control

                100
              • 1 Provides a radio button list to select the following type of dial-out: Add participant; Add a group (that is, Group Call); Assistant call.

                100
                • 1 Provides a radio button list to select the following type of dial-out: Add participant; Add a group (that is, Group Call); Assistant call.

                  100
                  • 1 Provides a radio button list to select the following type of dial-out: Add participant; Add a group (that is, Group Call); Assistant call.

                    100
                    • 1 Provides a radio button list to select the following type of dial-out: Add participant; Add a group (that is, Group Call); Assistant call.

                      100
                • 2 The Dial button starts call origination. After call origination, the system connects the chairperson to a private call with th...

                  100
                  • 2 The Dial button starts call origination. After call origination, the system connects the chairperson to a private call with th...

                    100
                    • 2 The Dial button starts call origination. After call origination, the system connects the chairperson to a private call with th...

                      100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Participant’s List section (Shows a table of details and chairperson controls for each participant, excluding the chairperson.)

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Phone number

                100
              • CLID or called number.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              100
              • Details

                100
              • The chairperson can enter text in this field for personal reference (for example, the participant’s name). This information is added only to the Meeting Log event when the user leaves the conference call.

                100
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Call Type

                101
              • Shows dial-out, dial-in, or group call.

                101
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Consult/End consultation button

                101
              • Click on this button to invoke a private call with the participant. When in a private call, an icon appears indicating this status. During a consultation, an icon appears beside “End consultation”.

                101
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Mute/Unmute button

                101
              • Mute or unmute an individual participant. When muted, an icon appears beside Unmute.

                101
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Play name

                101
              • Click on the icon to play the participant’s name as recorded by the name entry feature. The system plays the name on the chairperson’s desktop, not their telephone.

                101
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Disconnect

                101
              • Click this icon to disconnect the participant. Before disconnecting, the system displays a dialog box. The window shows: “Disconnect this participant?” with OK and Cancel buttons to click on.

                101
            • <TABLE ROW>

              101
              • Volume

                101
              • Click on this button to open a volume control panel (see Figure 50 on page 105). Use this panel to increase or decrease the volume in hear and talk directions.

                101
                • Figure 50 on page 105

                  101
      • The system updates the window automatically every two minutes.

        101
        • The system updates the window automatically every two minutes.

          101
        • Session Management

          101
          • Session Management

            101
          • The chairperson can request a voting session or questions to be answered by the participants on the call. See

            101
            • The chairperson can request a voting session or questions to be answered by the participants on the call. See

              101
              • Figure 46

                101
            • Figure 46 Session Management Control Panel

              101
              • Figure 46 Session Management Control Panel

                101
          • The chairperson can start a voting session by selecting the Start Voting button. See

            101
            • The chairperson can start a voting session by selecting the Start Voting button. See

              101
              • Figure 47 on page 102

                101
            • Figure 47 Voting Session Control Panel

              102
              • Figure 47 Voting Session Control Panel

                102
          • Once voting is enabled, participants can vote using the DTMF commands. The chairperson enters the subject of the voting in the S...

            102
            • Once voting is enabled, participants can vote using the DTMF commands. The chairperson enters the subject of the voting in the S...

              102
          • After the voting is ended, the chairperson is sent an e-mail. The e-mail contains the following information:

            102
            • After the voting is ended, the chairperson is sent an e-mail. The e-mail contains the following information:

              102
            • . Meeting title

              102
              • . Meeting title

                102
                • . Meeting title

                  102
              • . Meeting date

                102
                • . Meeting date

                  102
              • . Meeting time

                102
                • . Meeting time

                  102
              • . Meeting duration

                102
                • . Meeting duration

                  102
              • . Ending time of the voting

                102
                • . Ending time of the voting

                  102
              • . Voting subject

                102
                • . Voting subject

                  102
              • . Voting results: number of Yes responses, number of No responses, and number who abstained

                102
                • . Voting results: number of Yes responses, number of No responses, and number who abstained

                  102
          • The chairperson selects the Start Questions button to activate the question session with the participants. Once enabled, the button becomes End Questions. Also, the area is expanded to include:

            102
            • The chairperson selects the Start Questions button to activate the question session with the participants. Once enabled, the button becomes End Questions. Also, the area is expanded to include:

              102
            • . Total of questions Requested

              102
              • . Total of questions Requested

                102
                • . Total of questions Requested

                  102
              • . Number of participants that have had their questions Answered

                102
                • . Number of participants that have had their questions Answered

                  102
              • . Number of participants Waiting to ask their questions

                102
                • . Number of participants Waiting to ask their questions

                  102
          • Requests for questions (*85 DTMF command) appear as blinking question marks beside the participant’s name in the Participant Lis...

            102
            • Requests for questions (*85 DTMF command) appear as blinking question marks beside the participant’s name in the Participant Lis...

              102
          • The chairperson can sort the participant list by question mark by pressing the “?” on the top left of the table. This sorts the list of participants by placing the participants waiting to ask questions first.

            103
            • The chairperson can sort the participant list by question mark by pressing the “?” on the top left of the table. This sorts the list of participants by placing the participants waiting to ask questions first.

              103
        • Chairperson Volume Control

          103
          • Chairperson Volume Control

            103
          • The chairperson can change the hearing and listening volume for the chairperson by selecting the Volume Control button. See

            103
            • The chairperson can change the hearing and listening volume for the chairperson by selecting the Volume Control button. See

              103
              • Figure 48

                103
            • Figure 48 Chairperson Volume Control Panel

              103
              • Figure 48 Chairperson Volume Control Panel

                103
          • The two scales in the middle of this window show the current increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of...

            103
            • The two scales in the middle of this window show the current increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of...

              103
          • Click on the Reset Volume of all participants button to restore the initial volume level of all participants. The initial volume level is determined by the Administrator’s default conference settings.

            103
            • Click on the Reset Volume of all participants button to restore the initial volume level of all participants. The initial volume level is determined by the Administrator’s default conference settings.

              103
      • When no chairperson is present in the conference, the system disables call-related buttons (see

        103
        • When no chairperson is present in the conference, the system disables call-related buttons (see

          103
          • Figure 49 on page 104

            103
        • Figure 49 Meeting Control window - Chairperson not present

          104
          • Figure 49 Meeting Control window - Chairperson not present

            104
      • The following features are unavailable in this mode:

        104
        • The following features are unavailable in this mode:

          104
        • . Self mute/unmute

          104
          • . Self mute/unmute

            104
            • . Self mute/unmute

              104
          • . Stop/play music

            104
            • . Stop/play music

              104
          • . Volume control

            104
            • . Volume control

              104
          • . Dial out

            104
            • . Dial out

              104
          • . Consult with participant

            104
            • . Consult with participant

              104
      • After the chairperson joins the conference the window changes to the one that

        104
        • After the chairperson joins the conference the window changes to the one that

          104
          • Figure 45 on page 99

            104
      • Dual-card meeting

        104
        • Dual-card meeting

          104
        • Commands that a chairperson operates from the BUI in a dual-card meeting apply to participants in both cards. The feature operates as follows in a dual-card conference:

          104
          • Commands that a chairperson operates from the BUI in a dual-card meeting apply to participants in both cards. The feature operates as follows in a dual-card conference:

            104
          • . Dial-out to a specified number - dial-out works only with the “full chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is selected, these commands work on the primary card only.

            104
            • . Dial-out to a specified number - dial-out works only with the “full chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is selected, these commands work on the primary card only.

              104
              • . Dial-out to a specified number - dial-out works only with the “full chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is selected, these commands work on the primary card only.

                104
            • . Consult with participant - consultation works only with the “full chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is selected, these commands work on the primary card only.

              104
              • . Consult with participant - consultation works only with the “full chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is selected, these commands work on the primary card only.

                104
            • . Play name - this feature works with participants on both cards. The system plays the name on the chairperson’s desktop, not the telephone.

              104
              • . Play name - this feature works with participants on both cards. The system plays the name on the chairperson’s desktop, not the telephone.

                104
      • Release chairperson control

        105
        • Release chairperson control

          105
        • The Meeting Control window contains a Release button to release chairperson control. This button releases both TUI and BUI contr...

          105
          • The Meeting Control window contains a Release button to release chairperson control. This button releases both TUI and BUI contr...

            105
      • Participant list volume control

        105
        • Participant list volume control

          105
        • The chairperson can change the hearing and speaking volume for each participant by selecting the Volume button for that participant. See

          105
          • The chairperson can change the hearing and speaking volume for each participant by selecting the Volume button for that participant. See

            105
            • Figure 50

              105
          • Figure 50 Participant Volume Control Panel

            105
            • Figure 50 Participant Volume Control Panel

              105
        • The two scales in the middle of this window show the current increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of...

          105
          • The two scales in the middle of this window show the current increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of...

            105
        • Click on the Reset Volume of participant button to restore the initial volume level of the participant. Click on the Apply to al...

          105
          • Click on the Reset Volume of participant button to restore the initial volume level of the participant. Click on the Apply to al...

            105
  • Administration BUI

    105
    • Administration BUI

      105
    • Introduction

      105
      • Introduction

        105
      • This section applies to administrators only. The main administration window is the ICB Dashboard, which appears directly after an administrator logs in. The dashboard provides access to the relevant window to perform the required task (see

        105
        • This section applies to administrators only. The main administration window is the ICB Dashboard, which appears directly after an administrator logs in. The dashboard provides access to the relevant window to perform the required task (see

          105
          • Figure 51 on page 106

            105
      • A special function is the Installation Wizard, which guides an administrator through a quick and easy process for configuring a new card. For more information about the Install Wizard, see

        105
        • A special function is the Installation Wizard, which guides an administrator through a quick and easy process for configuring a new card. For more information about the Install Wizard, see

          105
          • “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72

            105
      • Figure 51 Administration BUI navigation flowchart

        106
        • Figure 51 Administration BUI navigation flowchart

          106
          • Figure 51 Administration BUI navigation flowchart

            106
    • ICB Dashboard

      107
      • ICB Dashboard

        107
      • The ICB organizes the Dashboard as an internet portal. The Dashboard groups links by subject (see

        107
        • The ICB organizes the Dashboard as an internet portal. The Dashboard groups links by subject (see

          107
          • Figure 52

            107
        • Figure 52 Administration BUI ICB Dashboard window

          107
          • Figure 52 Administration BUI ICB Dashboard window

            107
      • The title frame on top, which is present for all administration windows, contains the following buttons:

        107
        • The title frame on top, which is present for all administration windows, contains the following buttons:

          107
        • . Dashboard - click here to return to the dashboard, while discarding the input in the current window.

          107
          • . Dashboard - click here to return to the dashboard, while discarding the input in the current window.

            107
            • . Dashboard - click here to return to the dashboard, while discarding the input in the current window.

              107
          • . CLI - opens an additional window for input and output of CLI commands (from more information, see

            107
            • . CLI - opens an additional window for input and output of CLI commands (from more information, see

              107
              • “CLI command summary” on page 178

                107
      • From the Dashboard, the “Change Password” link opens the Change Password window shown in

        107
        • From the Dashboard, the “Change Password” link opens the Change Password window shown in

          107
          • “Login password change” on page 83

            107
      • The ICB Dashboard has the following sections:

        108
        • The ICB Dashboard has the following sections:

          108
        • . ICB Installation Wizard

          108
          • . ICB Installation Wizard

            108
            • . ICB Installation Wizard

              108
              • . ICB Installation Wizard

                108
          • . Settings

            108
            • . Settings

              108
              • . Settings

                108
          • . Users

            108
            • . Users

              108
              • . Users

                108
          • . Permanent Conferences

            108
            • . Permanent Conferences

              108
              • . Permanent Conferences

                108
          • . Upgrades

            108
            • . Upgrades

              108
              • . Upgrades

                108
          • . Call-out Groups

            108
            • . Call-out Groups

              108
              • . Call-out Groups

                108
          • . Reports

            108
            • . Reports

              108
              • . Reports

                108
          • . Backup

            108
            • . Backup

              108
              • . Backup

                108
    • Settings

      108
      • Settings

        108
      • This subject groups several parameters and definitions. Links to sub-subjects appear on the Dashboard.

        108
        • This subject groups several parameters and definitions. Links to sub-subjects appear on the Dashboard.

          108
      • General Settings window

        108
        • General Settings window

          108
        • Figure 53 shows the General Settings window.

          108
          • Figure 53 shows the General Settings window.

            108
            • Figure 53

              108
          • Figure 53 ICB Dashboard - General Settings window

            108
            • Figure 53 ICB Dashboard - General Settings window

              108
        • Table 23 on page 109 describes the options available in the General Settings window.

          108
          • Table 23 on page 109 describes the options available in the General Settings window.

            108
            • Table 23 on page 109

              108
          • <TABLE>

            109
            • Table 23 General Settings window fields

              109
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Field

                  109
                • Description

                  109
            • <TABLE BODY>

              109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Administration E-mail

                  109
                • Enter the E-mail address to which the ICB sends administration material, including backup files.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Billing option

                  109
                • Select a billing option for this card from the pull-down menu. The options are as follows:

                  109
                  • . No billing - The ICB does not issue a billing report.

                    109
                    • . No billing - The ICB does not issue a billing report.

                      109
                      • . No billing - The ICB does not issue a billing report.

                        109
                  • . Billing reports - The ICB issues a billing report (see

                    109
                    • . Billing reports - The ICB issues a billing report (see

                      109
                      • . Billing reports - The ICB issues a billing report (see

                        109
                        • “Billing Report” on page 202

                          109
                  • . Billing reports & CDR - The ICB issues a billing report and a CDR record (see

                    109
                    • . Billing reports & CDR - The ICB issues a billing report and a CDR record (see

                      109
                      • . Billing reports & CDR - The ICB issues a billing report and a CDR record (see

                        109
                        • “CS 1000 Call Detail Recording” on page 207

                          109
                  • Note: The Billing reports & CDR record option is not available on the Meridian SL-100.

                    109
                    • Note: The Billing reports & CDR record option is not available on the Meridian SL-100.

                      109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Card ID (4 digits)

                  109
                • Enter the card ID that the system uses for billing purposes. Range: A four-digit decimal.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Ports overbooking

                  109
                • Enter the number of ports the Overbooking feature adds. The available values are shown in the form of 32 + N, where 32 is the ph...

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Reserve port for TUI

                  109
                • Click in the box to dedicate one of the card’s ports for TUI access, which is not available for meetings. When this box is not checked, the system does not reserve a port for the TUI; when all ports on the ICB are busy the TUI is inaccessible.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Name recording length

                  109
                • Enter the duration, in seconds, of the spoken name in the name-entry option. When the system prompts the callers for their name, recording after the beep takes place for the specified duration. Range: 2-10 seconds. Default: 2 seconds.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Conference auto-generated password length

                  109
                • Enter the number of digits for the conference or chairperson password, when a user selects the password to be automatically generated by the ICB.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                109
                • Meeting closed second warning message

                  109
                • Click the box to have hear the second warning message 2 minutes before ending the meeting.

                  109
              • <TABLE ROW>

                110
                • Week working days

                  110
                • Select the range of working days from the pull-down menu. The ICB uses this information when creating recurrent conferences with the option “Workday”. Range: Any day of the week. Default: Monday to Friday.

                  110
              • <TABLE ROW>

                110
                • Outdated Conferences & Reports: remove after

                  110
                • From the pull-down menu, select the number of days these files are kept before the system deletes them (also referred to as the ...

                  110
    • Default conference

      110
      • Default conference

        110
      • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can set as the default conference settings.

        110
        • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can set as the default conference settings.

          110
          • Figure 56

            110
        • Figure 54 ICB Dashboard - Default Conference Settings

          110
          • Figure 54 ICB Dashboard - Default Conference Settings

            110
      • Table 26 describes the options available in the Default Conference Settings window.

        110
        • Table 26 describes the options available in the Default Conference Settings window.

          110
          • Table 26

            110
        • <TABLE>

          110
          • Table 24 Default Conference Settings fields

            110
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            110
            • <TABLE ROW>

              110
              • Field

                110
              • Description

                110
          • <TABLE BODY>

            110
            • <TABLE ROW>

              110
              • User Password

                110
              • Set the default setting for User Password as No password or Automatically assigned password. The factory default setting is automatically assigned password.

                110
            • <TABLE ROW>

              110
              • Chairperson Password

                110
              • Set the default setting for Chairperson Password as No password or Automatically assigned password. The factory default setting is automatically assigned password.

                110
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Indication for entry and exit

                111
              • Set the default setting for Indication for entry and exit as: Play name on entry and name on exit, Play name on entry and tone o...

                111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Language

                111
              • Set the default setting for language. The factory default setting is North American English.

                111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Add ports if needed

                111
              • Check this box if the administrator wants the default setting to be add ports if needed. The factory default setting is not checked.

                111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Keep one port for Chairperson

                111
              • Check this box if the administrator wants the default setting to keep one port for the Chairperson. The factory default setting is checked.

                111
    • Volume Level

      111
      • Volume Level

        111
      • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize the volume level settings.

        111
        • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize the volume level settings.

          111
          • Figure 56

            111
        • Figure 55 ICB Dashboard - Volume Level Settings

          111
          • Figure 55 ICB Dashboard - Volume Level Settings

            111
      • Table 26 describes the options available in the Volume Level Settings window.

        111
        • Table 26 describes the options available in the Volume Level Settings window.

          111
          • Table 26

            111
        • <TABLE>

          111
          • Table 25 Volume Level Settings fields

            111
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Field

                111
              • Description

                111
          • <TABLE BODY>

            111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Voice Prompt: Playing

                111
              • Enter the default setting for the volume level of the voice prompt when playing.

                111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              111
              • Recording:

                111
              • Enter the default setting for the volume level of when recording.

                111
            • <TABLE ROW>

              112
              • Speak:

                112
              • Enter the default setting for the speaking volume level of the conferee in an audio conference.

                112
            • <TABLE ROW>

              112
              • Listen:

                112
              • Enter the default setting for the listening volume level of the conferee in an audio conference.

                112
    • E-mail template

      112
      • E-mail template

        112
      • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize the scheduling confirmation E-mail.

        112
        • Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize the scheduling confirmation E-mail.

          112
          • Figure 56

            112
        • Figure 56 ICB Dashboard - Confirmation E-mail Settings

          112
          • Figure 56 ICB Dashboard - Confirmation E-mail Settings

            112
      • The window shows the layout of the E-mail. The customizable text fields are editable. Additional parameters to define appear at the bottom of the window.

        113
        • The window shows the layout of the E-mail. The customizable text fields are editable. Additional parameters to define appear at the bottom of the window.

          113
      • Table 26 describes the options available in the Confirmation E-mail Settings window.

        113
        • Table 26 describes the options available in the Confirmation E-mail Settings window.

          113
          • Table 26

            113
        • <TABLE>

          113
          • Table 26 Confirmation E-mail Settings fields

            113
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Field

                113
              • Description

                113
          • <TABLE BODY>

            113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • From

                113
              • The sender’s address defined in the first step of the Install Wizard. This field is view only.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • CC:

                113
              • Enter the E-mail address, or list of addresses, which will receive a carbon copy (CC) of all confirmation E-mails that the ICB sends. Separate the addresses by a space.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • BCC:

                113
              • Enter the E-mail address, or list of addresses, which will receive a blank carbon copy (BCC) of all confirmation E-mails that the ICB sends. The system hides these addresses; they do not appear on the E-mails.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Opening text

                113
              • Enter the header that appears before the fixed part of the E-mail (that is, the meeting details). Example: company name or slogan.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Instructions for Participants

                113
              • Enter the information that appears after the meeting details. Example: dialing instructions and list of TUI commands.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Instructions for Chairperson

                113
              • Enter information for the chairperson in this field. Example: chairperson TUI commands and other tips for the chairperson.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Closing text

                113
              • Enter the information that appears as a footer at the bottom of the E-mail body.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Time format

                113
              • From the pull-down menu, select the time format that the E-mail uses (that is, 24-hour or AM/PM).

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Time Zone

                113
              • Enter the time zone of the ICB in free text. The ICB does not check the syntax. Example: GMT-5 (EST), Eastern Standard Time, or New York (GMT-5).

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • DID Prefix

                113
              • Enter the DID prefix that callers use to access the card from the public network. Enter this value as free text. Example: (613) 961.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • ESN Prefix

                113
              • Enter the prefix that callers use when accessing the card by Electronic Switched Network (ESN). Example: 846.

                113
            • <TABLE ROW>

              113
              • Toll Free Access

                113
              • Enter the toll free access number that callers use to access the card. Example: (800) 961.

                113
    • Customize greetings

      114
      • Customize greetings

        114
      • Figure 57 shows the window used to customize the following greetings:

        114
        • Figure 57 shows the window used to customize the following greetings:

          114
          • Figure 57

            114
        • . Brandline greeting

          114
          • . Brandline greeting

            114
            • . Brandline greeting

              114
          • . Per-conference user’s greeting

            114
            • . Per-conference user’s greeting

              114
        • Figure 57 ICB Dashboard - Greeting Settings window

          114
          • Figure 57 ICB Dashboard - Greeting Settings window

            114
      • The table in this window lists the available languages. For each language, the factory-made greetings can be replaced with a customized greeting in the form of a .WAV file.

        114
        • The table in this window lists the available languages. For each language, the factory-made greetings can be replaced with a customized greeting in the form of a .WAV file.

          114
      • Brandline greeting

        114
        • Brandline greeting

          114
        • Follow the steps in

          114
          • Follow the steps in

            114
            • Procedure 17 on page 115

              114
        • Procedure 17 Replace the brandline greeting

          115
          • Procedure 17 Replace the brandline greeting

            115
            • 1 Upload the .WAV file from your computer to the ICB using your computer’s operating system.

              115
              • 1 Upload the .WAV file from your computer to the ICB using your computer’s operating system.

                115
              • a Click on the Browse button.

                115
                • a Click on the Browse button.

                  115
                • A Choose dialog box opens on your computer.

                  115
              • b Scroll through the dialog box to select the location of the .WAV file and click on the Open button.

                115
                • b Scroll through the dialog box to select the location of the .WAV file and click on the Open button.

                  115
                • The system closes this dialog box and the selected file’s name appears in the read-only Local file: text box.

                  115
              • c Click on the Upload button.

                115
                • c Click on the Upload button.

                  115
                • The ICB loads the file into the card and adds the file name to the combo-box next to the selected language.

                  115
                • Note: The upload action is immediate. There is no need to submit and save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.

                  115
                  • Note: The upload action is immediate. There is no need to submit and save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.

                    115
            • 2 Click on the radio button next to the language in the table to select the language.

              115
              • 2 Click on the radio button next to the language in the table to select the language.

                115
            • 3 Select the desired .WAV file you uploaded in the File column for that language.

              115
              • 3 Select the desired .WAV file you uploaded in the File column for that language.

                115
            • 4 Click on the Submit button to save the change.

              115
              • 4 Click on the Submit button to save the change.

                115
        • There are two additional action buttons as follows:

          115
          • There are two additional action buttons as follows:

            115
          • . Play - Click on this button to play the selected greeting. The system plays the file of the selected language on your computer.

            115
            • . Play - Click on this button to play the selected greeting. The system plays the file of the selected language on your computer.

              115
              • . Play - Click on this button to play the selected greeting. The system plays the file of the selected language on your computer.

                115
            • . Delete - Click on this button to delete the selected greeting from the card. The system removes the file’s name from the combo...

              115
              • . Delete - Click on this button to delete the selected greeting from the card. The system removes the file’s name from the combo...

                115
              • After the system deletes the file, it removes the file from the combo-box that contained it. The selection returns to the “factory default” greeting.

                115
              • Note: The delete action is immediate. There is no need to submit and save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.

                115
                • Note: The delete action is immediate. There is no need to submit and save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.

                  115
      • Conference-specific greeting

        115
        • Conference-specific greeting

          115
        • Use these fields in the Greeting Settings window to enable or disable the Conference-specific Greeting feature. Click on the Ava...

          115
          • Use these fields in the Greeting Settings window to enable or disable the Conference-specific Greeting feature. Click on the Ava...

            115
    • Company images upload

      116
      • Company images upload

        116
      • Figure 58 shows the window that an administrator can use to customize the ICB home page image and the customer’s logo on the title frame. Images must be in GIF format.

        116
        • Figure 58 shows the window that an administrator can use to customize the ICB home page image and the customer’s logo on the title frame. Images must be in GIF format.

          116
          • Figure 58

            116
        • Figure 58 ICB Dashboard - Company Images window

          116
          • Figure 58 ICB Dashboard - Company Images window

            116
      • Title Frame Image

        116
        • Title Frame Image

          116
        • “No image” is the default. Follow the steps in

          116
          • “No image” is the default. Follow the steps in

            116
            • Procedure 18

              116
        • Procedure 18 Use a customized image

          116
          • Procedure 18 Use a customized image

            116
            • 1 Click on the Browse button. A choose local file dialog box provided by your computer’s operating system opens. This window allows an administrator to select a file in their computer.

              116
              • 1 Click on the Browse button. A choose local file dialog box provided by your computer’s operating system opens. This window allows an administrator to select a file in their computer.

                116
            • 2 Navigate to the folder that contains the file to upload, select the file and click on the Open button. The system closes the dialog box and the selected file’s name appears in the read-only Local file: text box.

              116
              • 2 Navigate to the folder that contains the file to upload, select the file and click on the Open button. The system closes the dialog box and the selected file’s name appears in the read-only Local file: text box.

                116
            • 3 Click on the Upload button. The system uploads the file into the ICB card and the file name appears in the box adjacent to the Image name: radio button.

              116
              • 3 Click on the Upload button. The system uploads the file into the ICB card and the file name appears in the box adjacent to the Image name: radio button.

                116
            • 4 To activate the image, click on the Submit button. The new image becomes the customer logo and the system discards the previous image.

              117
              • 4 To activate the image, click on the Submit button. The new image becomes the customer logo and the system discards the previous image.

                117
              • Note: If the Reset button is clicked, instead of the Submit button, the system discards the image.

                117
                • Note: If the Reset button is clicked, instead of the Submit button, the system discards the image.

                  117
        • The maximum image size is 124 pixels wide by 40 pixels high. The system does not allows a larger image, as this distorts the frame. If a customer image is not supplied, the customer’s logo on the home page remains an empty rectangle.

          117
          • The maximum image size is 124 pixels wide by 40 pixels high. The system does not allows a larger image, as this distorts the frame. If a customer image is not supplied, the customer’s logo on the home page remains an empty rectangle.

            117
          • Note: The ICB does not check the image size; the administrator is responsible for verifying the correct size.

            117
            • Note: The ICB does not check the image size; the administrator is responsible for verifying the correct size.

              117
      • Login Page Image

        117
        • Login Page Image

          117
        • Upload this image in the same way as in

          117
          • Upload this image in the same way as in

            117
            • Procedure 18

              117
        • The additional placement parameter allows the image to be placed on the login window as follows:

          117
          • The additional placement parameter allows the image to be placed on the login window as follows:

            117
          • . Top left- the system places the image on the top-left corner of the window and leaves the background empty (that is, the browser’s background color). This is the default.

            117
            • . Top left- the system places the image on the top-left corner of the window and leaves the background empty (that is, the browser’s background color). This is the default.

              117
              • . Top left- the system places the image on the top-left corner of the window and leaves the background empty (that is, the browser’s background color). This is the default.

                117
            • . Tiled - the system duplicates the image as many times as needed to cover the window’s space.

              117
              • . Tiled - the system duplicates the image as many times as needed to cover the window’s space.

                117
    • Upgrades

      117
      • Upgrades

        117
      • See

        117
        • See

          117
          • “Upgrade procedures” on page 215

            117
    • Users

      117
      • Users

        117
      • This section enables an administrator to go directly to the following windows:

        117
        • This section enables an administrator to go directly to the following windows:

          117
        • . Users List

          117
          • . Users List

            117
            • . Users List

              117
          • . New User

            117
            • . New User

              117
          • . Search

            117
            • . Search

              117
      • Users List

        117
        • Users List

          117
        • Figure 59 on page 118 shows the User List window which is the main window for users administration.

          117
          • Figure 59 on page 118 shows the User List window which is the main window for users administration.

            117
            • Figure 59 on page 118

              117
          • Figure 59 ICB Dashboard - User List window

            118
            • Figure 59 ICB Dashboard - User List window

              118
        • The buttons on top of the window are for additional administrator actions; the sections that follow describe these actions.

          118
          • The buttons on top of the window are for additional administrator actions; the sections that follow describe these actions.

            118
        • The window displays a list of users in the form of a table that the systems sorts alphabetically by name. The table shows 10 use...

          118
          • The window displays a list of users in the form of a table that the systems sorts alphabetically by name. The table shows 10 use...

            118
            • “Search for a user” on page 121

              118
        • Table 27 describes the columns in the Users List table.

          118
          • Table 27 describes the columns in the Users List table.

            118
            • Table 27

              118
          • <TABLE>

            118
            • Table 27 User List table columns

              118
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              118
              • <TABLE ROW>

                118
                • Column

                  118
                • Description

                  118
            • <TABLE BODY>

              118
              • <TABLE ROW>

                118
                • User name

                  118
                • Free text up to 20 characters. The BUI treats the whole name as one string; there is no distinction of first and last name. The name is a link. Click on the name to open the Edit User window for this user.

                  118
              • <TABLE ROW>

                118
                • User type

                  118
                • The user type: user; super-user, executive user, or administrator.

                  118
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • User Access

                  119
                • The access for the user: BUI, Outlook, or BUI and Outlook.

                  119
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • User ID

                  119
                • The login ID for the BUI, up to 10 characters.

                  119
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • Telephony ID

                  119
                • The TUI Login ID, up to 10 digits.

                  119
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • Billing

                  119
                • An account number for the user, which the system uses for billing purposes. This number appears in billing reports. The field can be empty, if the billing feature is not being used.

                  119
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • E-mail

                  119
                • The user’s E-mail address for receiving scheduling confirmation by E-mail. It can be empty, in which case the user does not receive scheduling confirmation E-mails.

                  119
              • <TABLE ROW>

                119
                • Checkboxes

                  119
                • Click on a checkbox to select the corresponding user. The buttons below the table perform actions on selected users.

                  119
      • Edit a user

        119
        • Edit a user

          119
        • When an administrator clicks on a name in the Users List window, the Edit User Details window opens (see

          119
          • When an administrator clicks on a name in the Users List window, the Edit User Details window opens (see

            119
            • Figure 60 on page 120

              119
            • Table 27

              119
          • Figure 60 ICB Dashboard - Users > Edit User Details window

            120
            • Figure 60 ICB Dashboard - Users > Edit User Details window

              120
      • Add new user

        120
        • Add new user

          120
        • Click on the New User button in the User List window to access the New User window. Use the New User window to add new users (see

          120
          • Click on the New User button in the User List window to access the New User window. Use the New User window to add new users (see

            120
            • Figure 61 on page 121

              120
          • Figure 61 ICB Dashboard - Users > New User window

            121
            • Figure 61 ICB Dashboard - Users > New User window

              121
          • Note: The password for a new user is initially 000000 (that is, six zeros). Nortel Networks recommends that the user change it during the first login session.

            121
            • Note: The password for a new user is initially 000000 (that is, six zeros). Nortel Networks recommends that the user change it during the first login session.

              121
      • Search for a user

        121
        • Search for a user

          121
        • When the Search for User button in the Users List window is clicked, the Search for a User window opens. Use the Search for a User window to view a subset of users depending on the criteria entered (see

          121
          • When the Search for User button in the Users List window is clicked, the Search for a User window opens. Use the Search for a User window to view a subset of users depending on the criteria entered (see

            121
            • Figure 62

              121
          • Figure 62 ICB Dashboard - Users > Search for a User window

            121
            • Figure 62 ICB Dashboard - Users > Search for a User window

              121
        • Click on one of the Search by: radio buttons to specify the field to search.The following options are available:

          122
          • Click on one of the Search by: radio buttons to specify the field to search.The following options are available:

            122
          • . Name (the system treats the whole name as one string and makes no distinction between first and last name)

            122
            • . Name (the system treats the whole name as one string and makes no distinction between first and last name)

              122
              • . Name (the system treats the whole name as one string and makes no distinction between first and last name)

                122
            • . User Type

              122
              • . User Type

                122
            • . User ID

              122
              • . User ID

                122
        • The system searches the string depending on the entry in the Find letters: field. All values that begin with this string match t...

          122
          • The system searches the string depending on the entry in the Find letters: field. All values that begin with this string match t...

            122
            • Table 27 on page 118

              122
      • Import users

        122
        • Import users

          122
        • Use the Import User button in the User List window to import the user list from the mate ICB card in a dual-card pair. This butt...

          122
          • Use the Import User button in the User List window to import the user list from the mate ICB card in a dual-card pair. This butt...

            122
        • Before importing, the Dual Meeting parameters must be defined (see

          122
          • Before importing, the Dual Meeting parameters must be defined (see

            122
            • “Step 4 - Dual Card Meetings” on page 77

              122
        • After clicking on the Import User button, the confirmation dialog box in

          122
          • After clicking on the Import User button, the confirmation dialog box in

            122
            • Figure 63

              122
          • Figure 63 ICB Dashboard - Import Users Confirmation box

            122
            • Figure 63 ICB Dashboard - Import Users Confirmation box

              122
        • Table 28 describes the information that this message displays.

          123
          • Table 28 describes the information that this message displays.

            123
            • Table 28

              123
          • <TABLE>

            123
            • Table 28 Import Users Confirmation box text

              123
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • Text line

                  123
                • Description

                  123
            • <TABLE BODY>

              123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • First

                  123
                • Indicates from which card the users will be imported. If the card is the primary card it shows the IP address of the secondary card and vice versa.

                  123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • Second

                  123
                • Shows how many users are already defined in this card.

                  123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • Third

                  123
                • Shows how many users can be imported. An ICB card can have up to 500 users. When the number of users reaches 500, the system terminates the import process.

                  123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • Fourth

                  123
                • Informs the administrator that existing users will not be changed (that is, the system does not import a user ID if an identical user ID already exists on the card).

                  123
              • <TABLE ROW>

                123
                • Fifth

                  123
                • Asks for confirmation, or cancellation, of the import.

                  123
        • Click on the OK button to start the import process. When the system completes the import, it updates the User List window to include imported users. At this point, the user can be deleted or modified as per normal operation.

          123
          • Click on the OK button to start the import process. When the system completes the import, it updates the User List window to include imported users. At this point, the user can be deleted or modified as per normal operation.

            123
    • Call-out Groups

      123
      • Call-out Groups

        123
      • This section enables an administrator to go directly the following windows:

        123
        • This section enables an administrator to go directly the following windows:

          123
        • . Call-Out Group List

          123
          • . Call-Out Group List

            123
            • . Call-Out Group List

              123
          • . Add New Call-out Group

            123
            • . Add New Call-out Group

              123
      • Call-Out Group List

        123
        • Call-Out Group List

          123
        • Figure 64 on page 124 shows the Call-Out Group List window which is the main window for group list administration.

          123
          • Figure 64 on page 124 shows the Call-Out Group List window which is the main window for group list administration.

            123
            • Figure 64 on page 124

              123
          • Figure 64 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Group List window

            124
            • Figure 64 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Group List window

              124
        • The window displays a list of groups in the form of a table, sorted by group number. The table is read-only.

          124
          • The window displays a list of groups in the form of a table, sorted by group number. The table is read-only.

            124
            • Table 29

              124
          • <TABLE>

            124
            • Table 29 Call-Out Group List table columns

              124
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              124
              • <TABLE ROW>

                124
                • Column

                  124
                • Description

                  124
            • <TABLE BODY>

              124
              • <TABLE ROW>

                124
                • Group #

                  124
                • The number that identifies the group. The chairperson uses this number when calling a group from the TUI. Range: 1 to 64

                  124
              • <TABLE ROW>

                124
                • Group Name

                  124
                • Free text, up to 20 characters, that describes this group. The name displayed is a link. Click on the name to open the Group Details window for this group.

                  124
              • <TABLE ROW>

                124
                • Members

                  124
                • Shows the number of members in the group.

                  124
              • <TABLE ROW>

                124
                • Checkboxes

                  124
                • Click in a checkbox to select the group. The Delete button at the bottom of the window can then be used to delete the group. Bef...

                  124
        • Click on the New Call-Out Group button to open a window for adding new groups (see page

          124
          • Click on the New Call-Out Group button to open a window for adding new groups (see page

            124
            • Figure 69 on page 130

              124
      • Group details

        124
        • Group details

          124
        • Click on the group’s name in the table in the Call-Out Group List window to open the Call-Out Groups Details window (see

          124
          • Click on the group’s name in the table in the Call-Out Group List window to open the Call-Out Groups Details window (see

            124
            • Figure 65 on page 125

              124
          • Figure 65 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details window

            125
            • Figure 65 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details window

              125
        • The window shows the members and properties of the selected group. The members appear in a table, with one member per row. Click on the “Next 10” or “Previous 10” link to view additional group members.

          125
          • The window shows the members and properties of the selected group. The members appear in a table, with one member per row. Click on the “Next 10” or “Previous 10” link to view additional group members.

            125
            • Table 30

              125
          • <TABLE>

            125
            • Table 30 Group Members table columns

              125
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              125
              • <TABLE ROW>

                125
                • Column

                  125
                • Description

                  125
            • <TABLE BODY>

              125
              • <TABLE ROW>

                125
                • Number

                  125
                • The telephone number of this member. The system dials this number when a chairperson calls this group. Maximum number length is ...

                  125
              • <TABLE ROW>

                125
                • Wait for Confirmation

                  125
                • Activate, or de-activate, the answer confirmation for this member as follows:

                  125
                  • . Activated (checkmark) - The default value for new members. When the system calls this number due to group call-out activation,...

                    125
                    • . Activated (checkmark) - The default value for new members. When the system calls this number due to group call-out activation,...

                      125
                      • . Activated (checkmark) - The default value for new members. When the system calls this number due to group call-out activation,...

                        125
                  • . Not activated (X) - The ICB does not wait for confirmation. Upon call origination, the system connects the call to the conference.

                    125
                    • . Not activated (X) - The ICB does not wait for confirmation. Upon call origination, the system connects the call to the conference.

                      125
                      • . Not activated (X) - The ICB does not wait for confirmation. Upon call origination, the system connects the call to the conference.

                        125
              • <TABLE ROW>

                126
                • Checkboxes

                  126
                • Click on a check box to select a member of the group. The Delete button at the bottom of the window can then be used to delete t...

                  126
        • Use the Add Members button at the top of the Group Members table to add a member to the group (see

          126
          • Use the Add Members button at the top of the Group Members table to add a member to the group (see

            126
            • Figure 66 on page 127

              126
        • The right side of the window displays the group’s properties for outcalling retries. These settings apply only to members with the option “Wait for Confirmation” activated.

          126
          • The right side of the window displays the group’s properties for outcalling retries. These settings apply only to members with the option “Wait for Confirmation” activated.

            126
            • Table 31

              126
            • Figure 68 on page 129

              126
          • <TABLE>

            126
            • Table 31 Group Settings Retry parameters

              126
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              126
              • <TABLE ROW>

                126
                • Field

                  126
                • Description

                  126
            • <TABLE BODY>

              126
              • <TABLE ROW>

                126
                • Wait time for answer

                  126
                • The number of seconds to wait for the called party to answer when calling numbers in this group.Time is measured from call origi...

                  126
              • <TABLE ROW>

                126
                • Number of call attempts

                  126
                • The number of times to try each number in case of failure. Value 1 means only 1 attempt, no retries. Range: 1-3. Default: 1.

                  126
              • <TABLE ROW>

                126
                • Time interval between attempts

                  126
                • The number of seconds the system waits, before retrying the same number. Range: 5-30 seconds. Default: 10.

                  126
        • Add Members - Click on the Add Members button in the Call-Out Groups Details window to open the Add Members window. Use the Add Members window to add one or more members to an existing group (see

          126
          • Add Members - Click on the Add Members button in the Call-Out Groups Details window to open the Add Members window. Use the Add Members window to add one or more members to an existing group (see

            126
            • Figure 66 on page 127

              126
          • Figure 66 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Add Members window

            127
            • Figure 66 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Add Members window

              127
        • Add members by entering the phone number directly in the table. The default “Wait for Confirmation” option setting is active (th...

          127
          • Add members by entering the phone number directly in the table. The default “Wait for Confirmation” option setting is active (th...

            127
        • Edit Member - Click on a specific number in the Call-Out Groups Details window to open the Edit Members window. Use the Edit Members window to modify a member’s number or confirmation option (see

          127
          • Edit Member - Click on a specific number in the Call-Out Groups Details window to open the Edit Members window. Use the Edit Members window to modify a member’s number or confirmation option (see

            127
            • Figure 67 on page 128

              127
          • Figure 67 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Edit Members window

            128
            • Figure 67 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Edit Members window

              128
        • Edit the number directly in the text box. Change the “Wait for Confirmation” option by clicking in the in Wait for Confirmation box.

          128
          • Edit the number directly in the text box. Change the “Wait for Confirmation” option by clicking in the in Wait for Confirmation box.

            128
        • Edit Group Properties - Click on the Modify button in the Call-Out Groups Details window (below the Group Settings table) to ope...

          128
          • Edit Group Properties - Click on the Modify button in the Call-Out Groups Details window (below the Group Settings table) to ope...

            128
            • Figure 68 on page 129

              128
          • Figure 68 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Modify Group Settings window

            129
            • Figure 68 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > Details > Modify Group Settings window

              129
        • The Group number is view only. The name and parameters can be modified as described in

          129
          • The Group number is view only. The name and parameters can be modified as described in

            129
            • Table 31 on page 126

              129
      • Add a New Group

        129
        • Add a New Group

          129
        • Click on the New Call-Out Group button in the Call-Out Group List window to open the <New Group> Details window. Use the <New Gr...

          129
          • Click on the New Call-Out Group button in the Call-Out Group List window to open the <New Group> Details window. Use the <New Gr...

            129
            • Figure 69 on page 130

              129
          • Figure 69 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > <New Group> Details window

            130
            • Figure 69 ICB Dashboard - Call-Out Groups > <New Group> Details window

              130
        • This window has the same layout as the Call-Out Group Details window (see

          130
          • This window has the same layout as the Call-Out Group Details window (see

            130
            • Figure 65 on page 125

              130
    • Permanent Conferences

      130
      • Permanent Conferences

        130
      • Under this subject an administrator can access the Permanent Conferences List window or go directly to the New Permanent Conference window.

        130
        • Under this subject an administrator can access the Permanent Conferences List window or go directly to the New Permanent Conference window.

          130
      • Permanent Conferences List

        130
        • Permanent Conferences List

          130
        • Figure 70 on page 131 shows the Permanent Conferences List window.

          130
          • Figure 70 on page 131 shows the Permanent Conferences List window.

            130
            • Figure 70 on page 131

              130
          • Figure 70 ICB Dashboard - Permanent Conferences List window

            131
            • Figure 70 ICB Dashboard - Permanent Conferences List window

              131
        • The Conference List table shows a list of permanent conferences in the card. This table is similar to the regular conference table (see

          131
          • The Conference List table shows a list of permanent conferences in the card. This table is similar to the regular conference table (see

            131
            • Figure 36 on page 87

              131
          • Note: Because a permanent conference is always active, the control icon exists for all conferences in the table.

            131
            • Note: Because a permanent conference is always active, the control icon exists for all conferences in the table.

              131
      • New/Edit Permanent Conference

        131
        • New/Edit Permanent Conference

          131
        • Use the Permanent Conferences List window to perform the following:

          131
          • Use the Permanent Conferences List window to perform the following:

            131
          • . Define a new permanent conference. Click on the New Permanent Conference button to open the New Permanent Conference window.

            131
            • . Define a new permanent conference. Click on the New Permanent Conference button to open the New Permanent Conference window.

              131
              • . Define a new permanent conference. Click on the New Permanent Conference button to open the New Permanent Conference window.

                131
            • . Edit an existing conference. Click on the edit icon in the conference row of the Conference List table to open the Edit Permanent Conference window.

              131
              • . Edit an existing conference. Click on the edit icon in the conference row of the Conference List table to open the Edit Permanent Conference window.

                131
          • Note: These two windows are identical, except during the edit operation the window’s title shows “Edit Permanent Conference”.

            131
            • Note: These two windows are identical, except during the edit operation the window’s title shows “Edit Permanent Conference”.

              131
        • Figure 71 on page 132 shows the New/Edit Permanent Conference window.

          131
          • Figure 71 on page 132 shows the New/Edit Permanent Conference window.

            131
            • Figure 71 on page 132

              131
          • Figure 71 ICB Dashboard - New/Edit Permanent Conference window

            132
            • Figure 71 ICB Dashboard - New/Edit Permanent Conference window

              132
        • This window is similar to the regular conference scheduling window (see

          132
          • This window is similar to the regular conference scheduling window (see

            132
            • “Scheduling window” on page 89

              132
        • The option “add port if needed” is always no for permanent conferences, so it does not appear in this window.

          132
          • The option “add port if needed” is always no for permanent conferences, so it does not appear in this window.

            132
        • Unlike the regular scheduling window that has pop-up sections, all fields and options appear on the basic window.

          133
          • Unlike the regular scheduling window that has pop-up sections, all fields and options appear on the basic window.

            133
          • <TABLE>

            133
            • Table 32 Permanent Conference New/Edit parameters

              133
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Field

                  133
                • Description

                  133
            • <TABLE BODY>

              133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • General section

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Subject

                  133
                • Enter text that describes the purpose of the conference. Range: Enter up to 20 characters, or leave this field empty. Default: Empty.

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Number of participants

                  133
                • Enter the number of ports to reserve for this conference, including the chairperson ports. The application makes sure that the t...

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Owner ID

                  133
                • Enter the user ID that will appear for this conference in billing reports and logs. Any user in the card can be assigned as the ...

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Chairperson

                  133
                • Enter the name of the chairperson for user’s reference. Range: Text up to 20 characters. Default: Empty.

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Access Numbers section

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • DN pair usage option

                  133
                • The administrator must select a DN pair from the list. The list shows pairs of numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]...

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • Password section

                  133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                133
                • User Password

                  133
                • Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:

                  133
                  • . None - no password.

                    133
                    • . None - no password.

                      133
                      • . None - no password.

                        133
                  • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                    133
                    • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                      133
                      • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                        133
                  • . Define a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                    133
                    • . Define a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                      133
                      • . Define a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                        133
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    133
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      133
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • Chairperson Password

                  134
                • Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same options as the user password.

                  134
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    134
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      134
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • General Options section

                  134
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • Emergency conference

                  134
                • Click in this box to define an emergency conference with an associated call group. The system automatically calls the specified ...

                  134
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • Indication for entry and exit

                  134
                • Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The following options are available from the pull-down menu:

                  134
                  • . Play name on entry and name on exit (the default).

                    134
                    • . Play name on entry and name on exit (the default).

                      134
                      • . Play name on entry and name on exit (the default).

                        134
                  • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                    134
                    • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                      134
                      • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                        134
                  • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                    134
                    • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                      134
                      • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                        134
                  • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                    134
                    • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                      134
                      • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                        134
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    134
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      134
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • Language

                  134
                • Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference. The pull-down menu offers the set of languages available in the system. The default is the ICB card’s default language.

                  134
              • <TABLE ROW>

                134
                • Keep one port for chairperson

                  134
                • Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all the ports are occupied but one, and the chairperson has not ye...

                  134
      • Backup

        134
        • Backup

          134
        • For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to backup files, see

          134
          • For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to backup files, see

            134
            • “Backup and restore procedures” on page 187

              134
      • Reports

        134
        • Reports

          134
        • For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to generate and view reports, see

          134
          • For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to generate and view reports, see

            134
            • “Reports” on page 195

              134
• Telephone user interface

  135
  • Telephone user interface

    135
  • Purpose

    135
    • Purpose

      135
    • This chapter describes how to use the telephone user interface (TUI) to:

      135
      • This chapter describes how to use the telephone user interface (TUI) to:

        135
      • . invoke commands during an active conference

        135
        • . invoke commands during an active conference

          135
          • . invoke commands during an active conference

            135
        • . schedule conferences and record greetings

          135
          • . schedule conferences and record greetings

            135
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      135
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        135
      • . “Overview” on page 135 - introduces the telephone user interface.

        135
        • . “Overview” on page 135 - introduces the telephone user interface.

          135
          • . “Overview” on page 135 - introduces the telephone user interface.

            135
            • . “Overview” on page 135

              135
        • . “TUI operation during an active conference” on page 136 - provides procedures for using TUI features from a dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) telephone while in an active conference.

          135
          • . “TUI operation during an active conference” on page 136 - provides procedures for using TUI features from a dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) telephone while in an active conference.

            135
            • . “TUI operation during an active conference” on page 136

              135
        • . “TUI services” on page 146 - describes TUI services available when there is no active conference, such as scheduling.

          135
          • . “TUI services” on page 146 - describes TUI services available when there is no active conference, such as scheduling.

            135
            • . “TUI services” on page 146

              135
  • Overview

    135
    • Overview

      135
    • Active conference

      135
      • Active conference

        135
      • The ICB provides a DTMF, menu-driven telephone user interface. The TUI enables the chairperson, and conferees, to invoke command...

        135
        • The ICB provides a DTMF, menu-driven telephone user interface. The TUI enables the chairperson, and conferees, to invoke command...

          135
    • Scheduling and recording features

      135
      • Scheduling and recording features

        135
      • To access the TUI for scheduling and recording, dial the TUI DN. The system prompts the user to enter their TUI ID and password.The system responds depending on the user ID as identified by the TUI ID as follows:

        135
        • To access the TUI for scheduling and recording, dial the TUI DN. The system prompts the user to enter their TUI ID and password.The system responds depending on the user ID as identified by the TUI ID as follows:

          135
        • . Regular user - the TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:

          135
          • . Regular user - the TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:

            135
            • . Regular user - the TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:

              135
            • - schedule a conference

              135
              • - schedule a conference

                135
                • - schedule a conference

                  135
              • - record a conference-specific greeting

                136
                • - record a conference-specific greeting

                  136
                • Note: If the second feature is disabled by the administrator (see

                  136
                  • Note: If the second feature is disabled by the administrator (see

                    136
                    • Figure 57 on page 114

                      136
          • . Administrator - An administrator does not schedule a conference. The TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:

            136
            • . Administrator - An administrator does not schedule a conference. The TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:

              136
            • - record a conference-specific greeting

              136
              • - record a conference-specific greeting

                136
                • - record a conference-specific greeting

                  136
              • - record a system brandline greeting

                136
                • - record a system brandline greeting

                  136
                • Note: If the first feature is disabled by the administrator (see

                  136
                  • Note: If the first feature is disabled by the administrator (see

                    136
                    • Figure 57 on page 114

                      136
      • Scheduling and recording greetings requires a system TUI DN and TUI ID for each user. For more information about defining a new DN, see

        136
        • Scheduling and recording greetings requires a system TUI DN and TUI ID for each user. For more information about defining a new DN, see

          136
          • “Installation and configuration” on page 45

            136
          • “Step 2 - Access Numbers” on page 76

            136
          • “Users List” on page 117

            136
      • If a second user dials the TUI DN when the TUI is in use, the ICB plays a voice message announcing that the port is in use.

        136
        • If a second user dials the TUI DN when the TUI is in use, the ICB plays a voice message announcing that the port is in use.

          136
  • TUI operation during an active conference

    136
    • TUI operation during an active conference

      136
    • This section describes how the TUI can be used while in an active conference.

      136
      • This section describes how the TUI can be used while in an active conference.

        136
    • Chairperson features

      136
      • Chairperson features

        136
      • Dial-out

        136
        • Dial-out

          136
        • The chairperson can dial out and call a new party outside of the conference. They can talk with the party or bring the party int...

          136
          • The chairperson can dial out and call a new party outside of the conference. They can talk with the party or bring the party int...

            136
        • Bring the party into the conference by dialing *2 or disconnect the call by dialing *3. If the chairperson dials the wrong number, dial *3 and re-dial. To redial the last number dialed, dial *#.

          136
          • Bring the party into the conference by dialing *2 or disconnect the call by dialing *3. If the chairperson dials the wrong number, dial *3 and re-dial. To redial the last number dialed, dial *#.

            136
        • The ICB card selects the port for dialing out. The port is available if the number of ports reserved for the conference is great...

          137
          • The ICB card selects the port for dialing out. The port is available if the number of ports reserved for the conference is great...

            137
          • Note: When the chairperson dials out to another ICB conference, two ports are seized, the dial-out port of the local ICB and the...

            137
            • Note: When the chairperson dials out to another ICB conference, two ports are seized, the dial-out port of the local ICB and the...

              137
      • Dial-out Authorization

        137
        • Dial-out Authorization

          137
        • The Dial-out Authorization feature enables the chairperson to connect external parties to the conference when the desired destination number is restricted.

          137
          • The Dial-out Authorization feature enables the chairperson to connect external parties to the conference when the desired destination number is restricted.

            137
        • This feature uses the Meridian Authorization feature. As such, the chairperson must be aware of outdialing restrictions and know...

          137
          • This feature uses the Meridian Authorization feature. As such, the chairperson must be aware of outdialing restrictions and know...

            137
        • The chairperson must enter the whole string of authorization numbers as the example in

          137
          • The chairperson must enter the whole string of authorization numbers as the example in

            137
            • Figure 72 on page 138

              137
          • Figure 72 Dial-out Authorization dialing example

            138
            • Figure 72 Dial-out Authorization dialing example

              138
          • Note: In BUI, define the same sequence as above, except do not enter the command code * 0.

            138
            • Note: In BUI, define the same sequence as above, except do not enter the command code * 0.

              138
        • If using this feature and Group Call, make sure that the authorization access code precedes the restricted DNs in the group call list.

          138
          • If using this feature and Group Call, make sure that the authorization access code precedes the restricted DNs in the group call list.

            138
      • All ports mute/unmute toggle

        138
        • All ports mute/unmute toggle

          138
        • A chairperson can place all conference participants, except the chairperson, on mute by dialing *10. While on mute, the particip...

          138
          • A chairperson can place all conference participants, except the chairperson, on mute by dialing *10. While on mute, the particip...

            138
      • Group call-out

        139
        • Group call-out

          139
        • Each ICB card supports up to 64 group call-out lists, each with up to 61 telephone numbers. Each telephone number can be up to 31 digits in length.

          139
          • Each ICB card supports up to 64 group call-out lists, each with up to 61 telephone numbers. Each telephone number can be up to 31 digits in length.

            139
        • The administrator defines group call-out lists through the BUI (see

          139
          • The administrator defines group call-out lists through the BUI (see

            139
            • “Call-out Groups” on page 123

              139
        • The administrator must define the following options for each group list:

          139
          • The administrator must define the following options for each group list:

            139
          • . number of dial-out retries allowed (range: 1-3, default: 1)

            139
            • . number of dial-out retries allowed (range: 1-3, default: 1)

              139
              • . number of dial-out retries allowed (range: 1-3, default: 1)

                139
            • . time between each dial-out retry (range: 15-90 seconds, default: 30)

              139
              • . time between each dial-out retry (range: 15-90 seconds, default: 30)

                139
        • The chairperson on an active conference can call all members of a group call-out list by dialing the following: *2 <group list n...

          139
          • The chairperson on an active conference can call all members of a group call-out list by dialing the following: *2 <group list n...

            139
        • When the system uses two ICB cards in a group call-out, the primary card divides the group call-out list into two groups. The pr...

          139
          • When the system uses two ICB cards in a group call-out, the primary card divides the group call-out list into two groups. The pr...

            139
        • The ICB card dials out by allocating a free port and originating the call on it. The system does not connect the port to the mee...

          139
          • The ICB card dials out by allocating a free port and originating the call on it. The system does not connect the port to the mee...

            139
          • Note: The administrator can configure the call to complete without requiring the called party to enter a star *. This option enables the connection to paging systems and auto-attendants.

            139
            • Note: The administrator can configure the call to complete without requiring the called party to enter a star *. This option enables the connection to paging systems and auto-attendants.

              139
        • The system limits group call-outs to the number of available ports on a conference. When a chairperson uses a list containing 61 numbers, and the meeting has 20 free ports, the system dials only the first 20 telephone numbers.

          139
          • The system limits group call-outs to the number of available ports on a conference. When a chairperson uses a list containing 61 numbers, and the meeting has 20 free ports, the system dials only the first 20 telephone numbers.

            139
        • Group Call-out Smart Retry - When the chairperson makes a group call-out to the same group for the second time, the system repeats the call-out only to numbers that are not connected in the conference. The second call-out includes calls to the following

          140
          • Group Call-out Smart Retry - When the chairperson makes a group call-out to the same group for the second time, the system repeats the call-out only to numbers that are not connected in the conference. The second call-out includes calls to the following

            140
          • . numbers not successfully connected in the previous group call-out

            140
            • . numbers not successfully connected in the previous group call-out

              140
              • . numbers not successfully connected in the previous group call-out

                140
            • . numbers that were connected, but then disconnected

              140
              • . numbers that were connected, but then disconnected

                140
        • The Group Call-out Smart Retry feature minimizes port usage during group calls.

          140
          • The Group Call-out Smart Retry feature minimizes port usage during group calls.

            140
      • Lock or unlock the conference

        140
        • Lock or unlock the conference

          140
        • The chairperson can lock the conference to prevent any new conferees from joining by dialing *4. The chairperson can unlock the ...

          140
          • The chairperson can lock the conference to prevent any new conferees from joining by dialing *4. The chairperson can unlock the ...

            140
        • Because there is one command for lock and unlock, the system announces to the chairperson one of two possible voice messages: “M...

          140
          • Because there is one command for lock and unlock, the system announces to the chairperson one of two possible voice messages: “M...

            140
      • Count conferees

        140
        • Count conferees

          140
        • The chairperson can count the number of conferees that have joined a conference by dialing *69 (for announcing to the chairperso...

          140
          • The chairperson can count the number of conferees that have joined a conference by dialing *69 (for announcing to the chairperso...

            140
        • When the chairperson dials *69/*60, the conferees hear a quiet click.

          140
          • When the chairperson dials *69/*60, the conferees hear a quiet click.

            140
        • Table 35 on page 143 lists the TUI subcommands available to the chairperson when counting conferees.

          140
          • Table 35 on page 143 lists the TUI subcommands available to the chairperson when counting conferees.

            140
            • Table 35 on page 143

              140
      • Drop all conferees

        141
        • Drop all conferees

          141
        • The chairperson can drop all conferees from the conference, except the chairperson, by dialing *90. The ICB does not issue an an...

          141
          • The chairperson can drop all conferees from the conference, except the chairperson, by dialing *90. The ICB does not issue an an...

            141
      • Drop last dialed conferee

        141
        • Drop last dialed conferee

          141
        • The chairperson can drop the last conferee to join the conference through dial-out by dialing *91. The chairperson can drop the ...

          141
          • The chairperson can drop the last conferee to join the conference through dial-out by dialing *91. The chairperson can drop the ...

            141
      • Conference duration expansion

        141
        • Conference duration expansion

          141
        • The chairperson can expand the duration of a conference by 15 minutes by dialing *98. If the expansion is successful, the chairp...

          141
          • The chairperson can expand the duration of a conference by 15 minutes by dialing *98. If the expansion is successful, the chairp...

            141
        • The maximum conference duration, including all chairperson expansions, is 12 hours. The ICB card does not permit conference duration expansion to a conference scheduled to end within three minutes of the expansion request.

          141
          • The maximum conference duration, including all chairperson expansions, is 12 hours. The ICB card does not permit conference duration expansion to a conference scheduled to end within three minutes of the expansion request.

            141
      • Chairperson command summary

        141
        • Chairperson command summary

          141
        • Table 33 lists conference commands that the chairperson can execute on the telephone set while a conference is in progress.

          141
          • Table 33 lists conference commands that the chairperson can execute on the telephone set while a conference is in progress.

            141
            • Table 33

              141
          • <TABLE>

            141
            • Table 33 Chairperson commands

              141
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                141
                • Chairperson Command

                  141
                • Description

                  141
            • <TABLE BODY>

              141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                141
                • *0<DN>#

                  141
                • Dial out to a DN (called party directory number, which is not a conference participant).

                  141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                141
                • *0#

                  141
                • Dial out to the assistant DN.

                  141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                141
                • *2<GN>#

                  141
                • Group call-out, where GN is the group number to call.

                  141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                141
                • *4

                  141
                • Lock or unlock the conference.

                  141
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *7

                  142
                • Volume control.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *10

                  142
                • All ports mute/unmute toggle.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *19

                  142
                • Self mute/unmute toggle.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *52

                  142
                • Release chairperson control.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *60

                  142
                • Count conferees and announces names to all participants.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *69

                  142
                • Count conferees and announces names to chairperson only. Activates a scrolling menu for the chairperson (see Table 35 on page 143).

                  142
                  • Table 35 on page 143

                    142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *81

                  142
                • Voting: Yes, I agree.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *82

                  142
                • Voting: No, I disagree.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *83

                  142
                • Voting: I abstain.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *90

                  142
                • Drop all ports, except the chairperson’s port.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *91

                  142
                • Drop the last dialed-out port.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *92

                  142
                • Drop the last dialed-in port.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *98

                  142
                • Extend the conference by 15 minutes.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *99

                  142
                • Stop or start the initial conference music by the chairperson, which is possible only when the chairperson is the first person joining the conference. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *

                  142
                • Abort current command.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *#

                  142
                • Redial last dialed DN.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • **

                  142
                • Start or stop the help menu.

                  142
        • Table 34 shows the commands available during a dial-out call (that is, after dialing *0<DN>#).

          142
          • Table 34 shows the commands available during a dial-out call (that is, after dialing *0<DN>#).

            142
            • Table 34

              142
          • <TABLE>

            142
            • Table 34 Chairperson commands during dial-out call

              142
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • Chairperson dials ...

                  142
                • In order to ...

                  142
            • <TABLE BODY>

              142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *2

                  142
                • Return to the conference with dialed party.

                  142
              • <TABLE ROW>

                142
                • *3

                  142
                • Return to the conference without dialed party.

                  142
        • While the system is announcing the list of conference participants after the chairperson enters *69, the chairperson can execute the commands in

          143
          • While the system is announcing the list of conference participants after the chairperson enters *69, the chairperson can execute the commands in

            143
            • Table 35

              143
          • <TABLE>

            143
            • Table 35 Chairperson commands during count command

              143
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Chairperson dials ...

                  143
                • In order to ...

                  143
            • <TABLE BODY>

              143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • #

                  143
                • Stop and start the playlist.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Consult privately with the conferee.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Mute/unmute the conferee.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Play the current conferee name greeting.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • *3

                  143
                • Return to the conference.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Select the previous conferee and play name.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Select the next conferee and play name.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • Disconnect the current conferee.

                  143
              • <TABLE ROW>

                143
                • **

                  143
                • Start and stop the help menu.

                  143
    • Features available to all participants

      143
      • Features available to all participants

        143
      • Self mute/unmute toggle

        143
        • Self mute/unmute toggle

          143
        • All conference participants, including the chairperson, can put themselves on mute by dialing *19. While on mute, the participan...

          143
          • All conference participants, including the chairperson, can put themselves on mute by dialing *19. While on mute, the participan...

            143
      • Stop or start music

        143
        • Stop or start music

          143
        • This feature stops or starts the initial conference music, which is possible only when the conferee is the first person joining the conference. Dial *99. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.

          143
          • This feature stops or starts the initial conference music, which is possible only when the conferee is the first person joining the conference. Dial *99. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.

            143
      • Adjust the audio volume of a conference

        144
        • Adjust the audio volume of a conference

          144
        • Follow the steps in

          144
          • Follow the steps in

            144
            • Procedure 19

              144
        • Procedure 19 Adjust the conference audio volume

          144
          • Procedure 19 Adjust the conference audio volume

            144
            • 1 Dial *7 to adjust the volume.

              144
              • 1 Dial *7 to adjust the volume.

                144
                • Figure 73

                  144
            • Figure 73 Volume control feature operation

              144
              • Figure 73 Volume control feature operation

                144
                • Figure 73 Volume control feature operation

                  144
              • When making a selection, the system applies the command, plays a confirmation tone, and returns the user to the conference.

                144
            • 2 Each invocation of the command advances one step in the required direction. To advance more than one step, the whole sequence must be repeated. For example, to reach the maximum volume in the listen direction, dial: *76 *76 *76

              144
              • 2 Each invocation of the command advances one step in the required direction. To advance more than one step, the whole sequence must be repeated. For example, to reach the maximum volume in the listen direction, dial: *76 *76 *76

                144
            • 3 The menu can be interrupted, so the two-digit sequence can be entered without waiting for the menu.

              144
              • 3 The menu can be interrupted, so the two-digit sequence can be entered without waiting for the menu.

                144
      • Help

        144
        • Help

          144
        • The chairperson can access a help menu by dialing **. The help menu is a voice recording of all chairperson command options. The chairperson can stop the help menu before it finishes by dialing ** again.

          144
          • The chairperson can access a help menu by dialing **. The help menu is a voice recording of all chairperson command options. The chairperson can stop the help menu before it finishes by dialing ** again.

            144
        • The help command is sensitive to where the chairperson is in the command structure. For example, if the conference is in the nor...

          145
          • The help command is sensitive to where the chairperson is in the command structure. For example, if the conference is in the nor...

            145
        • Conferees can dial ** to hear a list of command options available to conferees. Only the participant who dials ** hears the relevant list of commands.

          145
          • Conferees can dial ** to hear a list of command options available to conferees. Only the participant who dials ** hears the relevant list of commands.

            145
    • Conferee features

      145
      • Conferee features

        145
      • Acquire and release chairperson control

        145
        • Acquire and release chairperson control

          145
        • Follow the steps in

          145
          • Follow the steps in

            145
            • Procedure 20

              145
        • Procedure 20 Acquire/release chairperson control

          145
          • Procedure 20 Acquire/release chairperson control

            145
            • 1 To acquire chairperson control, dial *51. The system reacts as follows:

              145
              • 1 To acquire chairperson control, dial *51. The system reacts as follows:

                145
                • 1 To acquire chairperson control, dial *51. The system reacts as follows:

                  145
                • . If another chairperson is present at the conference, the command fails. The system notifies the user and returns them to the meeting.

                  145
                  • . If another chairperson is present at the conference, the command fails. The system notifies the user and returns them to the meeting.

                    145
                    • . If another chairperson is present at the conference, the command fails. The system notifies the user and returns them to the meeting.

                      145
                  • . If there is no active chairperson, the system prompts the user to enter the chairperson password for the meeting. If the passw...

                    145
                    • . If there is no active chairperson, the system prompts the user to enter the chairperson password for the meeting. If the passw...

                      145
            • 2 To release chairperson control, dial *52. Only the chairperson uses this command. When activated, the chairperson becomes a regular conference participant allowing someone else to acquire chairperson control.

              145
              • 2 To release chairperson control, dial *52. Only the chairperson uses this command. When activated, the chairperson becomes a regular conference participant allowing someone else to acquire chairperson control.

                145
      • Conferee command summary

        145
        • Conferee command summary

          145
        • Table 36 lists conference commands that a conferee can execute on the telephone set while the conference is in progress.

          145
          • Table 36 lists conference commands that a conferee can execute on the telephone set while the conference is in progress.

            145
            • Table 36

              145
          • <TABLE>

            145
            • Table 36 Conferee commands

              145
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              145
              • <TABLE ROW>

                145
                • Conferee command

                  145
                • Description

                  145
            • <TABLE BODY>

              145
              • <TABLE ROW>

                145
                • *7

                  145
                • Volume control.

                  145
              • <TABLE ROW>

                145
                • *19

                  145
                • Self mute/unmute toggle.

                  145
              • <TABLE ROW>

                145
                • *51

                  145
                • Acquire chairperson control.

                  145
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *81

                  146
                • Voting: Yes, I agree.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *82

                  146
                • Voting: No, I disagree.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *83

                  146
                • Voting: I abstain.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *85

                  146
                • Question: I request a question.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *86

                  146
                • Question: I cancel my request for a question.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *99

                  146
                • Stop or start the initial conference music, which is possible only when the conferee is the first person joining the conference. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • *

                  146
                • Aborts current command.

                  146
              • <TABLE ROW>

                146
                • **

                  146
                • Start or stop the help menu.

                  146
  • TUI services

    146
    • TUI services

      146
    • This sections describes TUI services that are used when there is no active conference.

      146
      • This sections describes TUI services that are used when there is no active conference.

        146
    • Schedule a conference

      146
      • Schedule a conference

        146
      • When using the TUI scheduler, first enter the TUI user ID and password. If a port is reserved for the TUI, only 31 ports are ava...

        146
        • When using the TUI scheduler, first enter the TUI user ID and password. If a port is reserved for the TUI, only 31 ports are ava...

          146
      • The conference defined from the TUI has default attributes. Define the conference parameters, through the telephone keypad, at the prompts of a guided voice menu. The ICB plays messages when an error is made.

        146
        • The conference defined from the TUI has default attributes. Define the conference parameters, through the telephone keypad, at the prompts of a guided voice menu. The ICB plays messages when an error is made.

          146
        • Note: There are up to seven minutes to schedule a conference with the TUI. After seven minutes, the ICB sends a voice message indicating that the allotted time is over. The ICB then disconnects the call.

          146
          • Note: There are up to seven minutes to schedule a conference with the TUI. After seven minutes, the ICB sends a voice message indicating that the allotted time is over. The ICB then disconnects the call.

            146
      • The ICB sets up the following default attributes:

        146
        • The ICB sets up the following default attributes:

          146
        • . entry and exit by name

          146
          • . entry and exit by name

            146
            • . entry and exit by name

              146
          • . no custom greeting

            146
            • . no custom greeting

              146
          • . no conference expansion

            146
            • . no conference expansion

              146
          • . no name for the name of the conference

            147
            • . no name for the name of the conference

              147
          • . no name for the name of the chairperson

            147
            • . no name for the name of the chairperson

              147
      • To schedule a conference through the TUI, follow the steps in

        147
        • To schedule a conference through the TUI, follow the steps in

          147
          • Procedure 21 on page 147

            147
      • Procedure 21 Use the TUI to schedule a conference

        147
        • Procedure 21 Use the TUI to schedule a conference

          147
          • 1 Dial the TUI DN.

            147
            • 1 Dial the TUI DN.

              147
          • 2 At the prompt, enter your TUI user ID.

            147
            • 2 At the prompt, enter your TUI user ID.

              147
          • 3 At the prompt, enter your password (6 digits).

            147
            • 3 At the prompt, enter your password (6 digits).

              147
          • 4 At the prompt, enter the date and time of the conference (optional). The default is the current day and time.

            147
            • 4 At the prompt, enter the date and time of the conference (optional). The default is the current day and time.

              147
          • 5 At the prompt, enter the duration of the conference.

            147
            • 5 At the prompt, enter the duration of the conference.

              147
          • 6 At the prompt, enter the number of ports required for the conference.

            147
            • 6 At the prompt, enter the number of ports required for the conference.

              147
          • 7 At the prompt, enter the Conferee DN (optional). If a DN is not entered, the ICB card generates one. The ICB card determines the Chairperson DN automatically.

            147
            • 7 At the prompt, enter the Conferee DN (optional). If a DN is not entered, the ICB card generates one. The ICB card determines the Chairperson DN automatically.

              147
          • 8 At the prompt, enter the password length (optional).

            147
            • 8 At the prompt, enter the password length (optional).

              147
          • 9 At the prompt, enter the language (optional). After entering all conference parameters, the ICB requests you to confirm the reservation.

            147
            • 9 At the prompt, enter the language (optional). After entering all conference parameters, the ICB requests you to confirm the reservation.

              147
          • Note: If configured, the web server sends a confirmation E-mail.

            147
            • Note: If configured, the web server sends a confirmation E-mail.

              147
              • Note: If configured, the web server sends a confirmation E-mail.

                147
    • Record a brandline greeting

      147
      • Record a brandline greeting

        147
      • The TUI can be used to record the customized brandline greeting when an administrator TUI password is used for the login.

        147
        • The TUI can be used to record the customized brandline greeting when an administrator TUI password is used for the login.

          147
          • Procedure 22

            147
        • Note: Although the greeting can be recorded in any language, the TUI instructions are in English only.

          147
          • Note: Although the greeting can be recorded in any language, the TUI instructions are in English only.

            147
      • Procedure 22 Use a brandline greeting

        148
        • Procedure 22 Use a brandline greeting

          148
          • 1 Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI administrator ID and password. The system responds with a menu and steps through how to operate the feature.

            148
            • 1 Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI administrator ID and password. The system responds with a menu and steps through how to operate the feature.

              148
          • 2 The chairperson must activate the brandline greeting from the BUI.

            148
            • 2 The chairperson must activate the brandline greeting from the BUI.

              148
      • The maximum length of the greeting is 10 seconds. The system plays greetings to conference participants in the following order:

        148
        • The maximum length of the greeting is 10 seconds. The system plays greetings to conference participants in the following order:

          148
        • 1 Initial greeting

          148
          • 1 Initial greeting

            148
            • 1 Initial greeting

              148
            • a ICB factory greeting - “Welcome to the conference call.”

              148
              • a ICB factory greeting - “Welcome to the conference call.”

                148
                • a ICB factory greeting - “Welcome to the conference call.”

                  148
              • b Brandline greeting - “Welcome to Company XYZ’s conference call.” This greeting replaces the factory greeting.

                148
                • b Brandline greeting - “Welcome to Company XYZ’s conference call.” This greeting replaces the factory greeting.

                  148
          • 2 Conference-specific greeting - “This is department 201’s weekly meeting.”

            148
            • 2 Conference-specific greeting - “This is department 201’s weekly meeting.”

              148
      • In this example, when participants call they hear: “Welcome to Company XYZ’s conference call. This is department 201’s weekly meeting.”

        148
        • In this example, when participants call they hear: “Welcome to Company XYZ’s conference call. This is department 201’s weekly meeting.”

          148
        • Note: Dual-card meetings use the brandline of the primary card, so that all participants hear the same greeting.

          148
          • Note: Dual-card meetings use the brandline of the primary card, so that all participants hear the same greeting.

            148
    • Record a conference-specific greeting

      148
      • Record a conference-specific greeting

        148
      • Conference-specific greeting operation is similar to brandline greetings, except that they can be recorded by users or administr...

        148
        • Conference-specific greeting operation is similar to brandline greetings, except that they can be recorded by users or administr...

          148
          • Procedure 23

            148
      • Procedure 23 Configure a conference-specific greeting

        148
        • Procedure 23 Configure a conference-specific greeting

          148
          • 1 Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI user or administrator ID and password. The system provides a menu with various options.

            148
            • 1 Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI user or administrator ID and password. The system provides a menu with various options.

              148
          • 2 Operational steps are as follows:

            148
            • 2 Operational steps are as follows:

              148
            • a When scheduling a meeting, the system provides a reference number which uniquely identifies the meeting. The system displays this reference number in the BUI and in the confirmation E-mail.

              148
              • a When scheduling a meeting, the system provides a reference number which uniquely identifies the meeting. The system displays this reference number in the BUI and in the confirmation E-mail.

                148
            • b After scheduling the meeting, dial the TUI Services DN, enter login data, and select “Record customer greeting” from the voice menu. The system prompts you to enter the reference number to identify the meeting.

              149
              • b After scheduling the meeting, dial the TUI Services DN, enter login data, and select “Record customer greeting” from the voice menu. The system prompts you to enter the reference number to identify the meeting.

                149
            • c Enter the number received in step a. The system repeats the number and prompts the user to confirm it or re-enter it.

              149
              • c Enter the number received in step a. The system repeats the number and prompts the user to confirm it or re-enter it.

                149
            • d Confirm or re-enter the number. The system provides a menu for recording the greeting similar to that used for the brandline greeting.

              149
              • d Confirm or re-enter the number. The system provides a menu for recording the greeting similar to that used for the brandline greeting.

                149
      • After recording the greeting, it can be later verified, re-recorded, or deleted. Meeting details displayed in the BUI indicate whether or not a greeting exists.

        149
        • After recording the greeting, it can be later verified, re-recorded, or deleted. Meeting details displayed in the BUI indicate whether or not a greeting exists.

          149
      • This feature also applies to always-on conferences. However, for always-on conferences, only the administrator can record the conference-specific greeting.

        149
        • This feature also applies to always-on conferences. However, for always-on conferences, only the administrator can record the conference-specific greeting.

          149
      • A greeting recorded for a conference that is part of a recurrent chain applies to occurrences following that conference.

        149
        • A greeting recorded for a conference that is part of a recurrent chain applies to occurrences following that conference.

          149
      • In dual-card meetings, the user or administrator records the custom greeting to the primary card. The system automatically copies it to the secondary card, so that all callers hear the same greeting.

        149
        • In dual-card meetings, the user or administrator records the custom greeting to the primary card. The system automatically copies it to the secondary card, so that all callers hear the same greeting.

          149
• Microsoft Outlook GUI

  151
  • Microsoft Outlook GUI

    151
  • Purpose

    151
    • Purpose

      151
    • This chapter describes how to use the Microsoft Outlook/Exchange GUI for audio conference scheduling.

      151
      • This chapter describes how to use the Microsoft Outlook/Exchange GUI for audio conference scheduling.

        151
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      151
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        151
      • . “Overview” on page 151 - introduces the Microsoft Outlook GUI and its system requirements.

        151
        • . “Overview” on page 151 - introduces the Microsoft Outlook GUI and its system requirements.

          151
          • . “Overview” on page 151 - introduces the Microsoft Outlook GUI and its system requirements.

            151
            • . “Overview” on page 151

              151
        • . “Scheduling a new conference” on page 160 - describes the interface that users and super-users can use to schedule conferences.

          151
          • . “Scheduling a new conference” on page 160 - describes the interface that users and super-users can use to schedule conferences.

            151
            • . “Scheduling a new conference” on page 160

              151
        • . “Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar” on page 167 - describes the process that users can use to delegate a user.

          151
          • . “Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar” on page 167 - describes the process that users can use to delegate a user.

            151
            • . “Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar” on page 167

              151
  • Overview

    151
    • Overview

      151
    • Users using Microsoft Outlook can schedule and manage ICB conference information using Microsoft Outlook as an alternative to the Browser User Interface. To access the ICB server, use the following Microsoft calendar GUIs:

      151
      • Users using Microsoft Outlook can schedule and manage ICB conference information using Microsoft Outlook as an alternative to the Browser User Interface. To access the ICB server, use the following Microsoft calendar GUIs:

        151
      • . Microsoft Outlook, version 2000, XP, or 2003.

        151
        • . Microsoft Outlook, version 2000, XP, or 2003.

          151
          • . Microsoft Outlook, version 2000, XP, or 2003.

            151
        • . Microsoft Exchange, version 5.5, 2000, or 2003.

          151
          • . Microsoft Exchange, version 5.5, 2000, or 2003.

            151
    • Since meetings automatically appear in the user’s Outlook calendar, the user does not have to book the meeting in two places: Br...

      151
      • Since meetings automatically appear in the user’s Outlook calendar, the user does not have to book the meeting in two places: Br...

        151
    • ICB conferences can be scheduled up to one year in advance.

      151
      • ICB conferences can be scheduled up to one year in advance.

        151
    • Recurrent meetings can be created in Microsoft Outlook. Meetings can be scheduled up to one year in advance up to 52 occurrences...

      152
      • Recurrent meetings can be created in Microsoft Outlook. Meetings can be scheduled up to one year in advance up to 52 occurrences...

        152
    • Meetings created in TUI or BUI will not appear in Microsoft Outlook.

      152
      • Meetings created in TUI or BUI will not appear in Microsoft Outlook.

        152
    • The super-user functionality is not supported by Microsoft Outlook GUI. Users with the type of super-user will act as normal users when operating from the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

      152
      • The super-user functionality is not supported by Microsoft Outlook GUI. Users with the type of super-user will act as normal users when operating from the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

        152
    • When modifying a conference, the play greeting functionality is not supported by the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

      152
      • When modifying a conference, the play greeting functionality is not supported by the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

        152
    • Only left-to-right languages are supported by the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

      152
      • Only left-to-right languages are supported by the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

        152
    • Daylight savings time is not supported. If either the user’s clock, or the ICB’s clock (but not both), is changed after a meeting is scheduled, the meeting’s start time will be off schedule.

      152
      • Daylight savings time is not supported. If either the user’s clock, or the ICB’s clock (but not both), is changed after a meeting is scheduled, the meeting’s start time will be off schedule.

        152
    • The conference control screen of an active meeting is displayed only in English.

      152
      • The conference control screen of an active meeting is displayed only in English.

        152
    • In Microsoft Outlook 2000, ICB is not informed that a meeting was deleted before a delete event message is sent. Therefore, a me...

      152
      • In Microsoft Outlook 2000, ICB is not informed that a meeting was deleted before a delete event message is sent. Therefore, a me...

        152
    • Administrators cannot schedule permanent or emergency meetings using the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

      152
      • Administrators cannot schedule permanent or emergency meetings using the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

        152
    • Publishing the form in Microsoft Outlook

      152
      • Publishing the form in Microsoft Outlook

        152
      • Before the ICB form can be published in Microsoft Outlook, the ICB Administrator must acquire the ICB form.

        152
        • Before the ICB form can be published in Microsoft Outlook, the ICB Administrator must acquire the ICB form.

          152
      • Follow the steps in

        152
        • Follow the steps in

          152
          • Procedure 24

            152
      • Follow the steps in

        152
        • Follow the steps in

          152
          • Procedure 34, “Upgrading the ICB form in the Organizational Forms Library,” on page -173

            152
      • Procedure 24 ICB Administrator to get the ICB form

        153
        • Procedure 24 ICB Administrator to get the ICB form

          153
          • 1 Enter the time zone for the ICB card.

            153
            • 1 Enter the time zone for the ICB card.

              153
          • 2 Define the users that will use the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

            153
            • 2 Define the users that will use the Microsoft Outlook GUI.

              153
          • 3 Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following username and password:

            153
            • 3 Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following username and password:

              153
            • Username: micb

              153
            • Password: admin

              153
          • 4 Copy the icbf.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the OUTLOOK directory.

            153
            • 4 Copy the icbf.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the OUTLOOK directory.

              153
      • ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before ICB users can access and use the ICB files. Nortel Networks recommends that the Microsoft Outlook Administrator publish the ICB files in the Organizational Forms Library. Follow the steps in

        153
        • ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before ICB users can access and use the ICB files. Nortel Networks recommends that the Microsoft Outlook Administrator publish the ICB files in the Organizational Forms Library. Follow the steps in

          153
          • Procedure 25

            153
      • If the ICB files are not published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator, ICB users themselves must publish the ICB files in their Personal Forms Library. Follow the steps in

        153
        • If the ICB files are not published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator, ICB users themselves must publish the ICB files in their Personal Forms Library. Follow the steps in

          153
          • Procedure 26

            153
      • When publishing upgraded files, be sure to remove the older versions from the library. Follow the steps in

        153
        • When publishing upgraded files, be sure to remove the older versions from the library. Follow the steps in

          153
          • Procedure 29, “Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 1),” on page -157

            153
          • Procedure 30, “Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 2),” on page -158

            153
        • Note 1: The instructions in the following two procedures are specific to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For other systems, contact your Microsoft Outlook administrator for specific instructions on publishing form files.

          153
          • Note 1: The instructions in the following two procedures are specific to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For other systems, contact your Microsoft Outlook administrator for specific instructions on publishing form files.

            153
        • Note 2: If the second procedure is used, each individual Microsoft Outlook user must follow

          153
          • Note 2: If the second procedure is used, each individual Microsoft Outlook user must follow

            153
            • Procedure 26

              153
      • The ICB form is based on the following ICB files:

        153
        • The ICB form is based on the following ICB files:

          153
        • . form file required for all ICB applications - icbf.oft

          153
          • . form file required for all ICB applications - icbf.oft

            153
            • . form file required for all ICB applications - icbf.oft

              153
          • . language files, one or more required for each ICB application:

            153
            • . language files, one or more required for each ICB application:

              153
            • - Japanese and Chinese languages - icbsjc.oft

              153
              • - Japanese and Chinese languages - icbsjc.oft

                153
                • - Japanese and Chinese languages - icbsjc.oft

                  153
              • - Korean language - icbsk.oft

                153
                • - Korean language - icbsk.oft

                  153
              • - All other supported languages - icbs.oft

                153
                • - All other supported languages - icbs.oft

                  153
      • Procedure 25 Microsoft Outlook Administrator to publish the ICB files to the Organizational Forms Library

        154
        • Procedure 25 Microsoft Outlook Administrator to publish the ICB files to the Organizational Forms Library

          154
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            154
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              154
          • 2 Obtain the ICB form files from the ICB Administrator.

            154
            • 2 Obtain the ICB form files from the ICB Administrator.

              154
            • Note: For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are publishing, you must complete the following steps.

              154
              • Note: For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are publishing, you must complete the following steps.

                154
            • a Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.

              154
              • a Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.

                154
              • Note: Click No if asked to Enable Macros.

                154
                • Note: Click No if asked to Enable Macros.

                  154
            • b Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.

              154
              • b Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.

                154
              • Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder window.

                154
                • Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder window.

                  154
            • Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

              154
              • Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

                154
                • Figure 74

                  154
              • Figure 74 Publish Form As window

                154
                • Figure 74 Publish Form As window

                  154
            • c Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

              154
              • c Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

                154
            • d Enter a Display name and Form name as follows:

              154
              • d Enter a Display name and Form name as follows:

                154
              • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs

                154
                • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs

                  154
                  • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs

                    154
                • . If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc

                  154
                  • . If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc

                    154
                • . If you are publishing icbsk.oft, enter icbsk

                  154
                  • . If you are publishing icbsk.oft, enter icbsk

                    154
            • e Click Publish.

              154
              • e Click Publish.

                154
              • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                154
                • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                  154
            • f Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

              154
              • f Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

                154
          • 3 Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.

            154
            • 3 Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.

              154
            • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.

              154
              • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.

                154
            • b Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.

              155
              • b Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.

                155
              • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                155
                • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                  155
            • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

              155
              • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

                155
                • Figure 74 on page 154

                  155
            • d Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

              155
              • d Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

                155
            • e Enter a Display name and Form name, such as icbf.

              155
              • e Enter a Display name and Form name, such as icbf.

                155
            • f Click Publish.

              155
              • f Click Publish.

                155
              • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                155
                • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                  155
            • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

              155
              • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

                155
      • Procedure 26 Publishing the ICB form in Microsoft Outlook by each Microsoft Outlook user

        155
        • Procedure 26 Publishing the ICB form in Microsoft Outlook by each Microsoft Outlook user

          155
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            155
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              155
            • Note 1: Do not perform this procedure if the ICB files have already been published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator.

              155
              • Note 1: Do not perform this procedure if the ICB files have already been published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator.

                155
            • Note 2: These instructions are specific to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For other systems, contact your Microsoft Outlook administrator for specific instructions on publishing a form.

              155
              • Note 2: These instructions are specific to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For other systems, contact your Microsoft Outlook administrator for specific instructions on publishing a form.

                155
          • 2 Obtain the ICB files (form icbf.oft and one or more language files icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) from the ICB Administrator.

            155
            • 2 Obtain the ICB files (form icbf.oft and one or more language files icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) from the ICB Administrator.

              155
          • 3 Save the files in accessible location.

            155
            • 3 Save the files in accessible location.

              155
          • 4 For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are publishing:

            155
            • 4 For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are publishing:

              155
            • a Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.

              155
              • a Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.

                155
              • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                155
                • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                  155
            • b Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.

              155
              • b Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.

                155
              • Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder window.

                155
                • Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder window.

                  155
            • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

              155
              • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

                155
                • Figure 74 on page 154

                  155
            • d Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

              155
              • d Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

                155
            • e Enter a Display name and a Form name as follows:

              155
              • e Enter a Display name and a Form name as follows:

                155
              • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs.

                155
                • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs.

                  155
                  • . If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs.

                    155
                • . If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc.

                  155
                  • . If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc.

                    155
                • . If you are publishing icbssk.oft, enter icbsk.

                  155
                  • . If you are publishing icbssk.oft, enter icbsk.

                    155
            • f Click Publish.

              155
              • f Click Publish.

                155
              • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                155
                • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                  155
            • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

              155
              • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

                155
          • 5 Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.

            155
            • 5 Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.

              155
            • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.

              155
              • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.

                155
            • b Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.

              155
              • b Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.

                155
              • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                155
                • Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.

                  155
            • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

              156
              • c Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As window opens. See

                156
                • Figure 74 on page 154

                  156
            • d Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

              156
              • d Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

                156
            • e Enter a Display name and a Form name, such as icbf.

              156
              • e Enter a Display name and a Form name, such as icbf.

                156
            • f Click Publish.

              156
              • f Click Publish.

                156
              • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                156
                • Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.

                  156
            • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

              156
              • g Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.

                156
      • The ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before the ICB user can configure the ICB form as the default Calendar form...

        156
        • The ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before the ICB user can configure the ICB form as the default Calendar form...

          156
          • Procedure 27 on page 156

            156
      • Several languages may use the same form name. If an administrator needs to have several languages, create a file called “outlang...

        156
        • Several languages may use the same form name. If an administrator needs to have several languages, create a file called “outlang...

          156
          • Table 37

            156
        • <TABLE>

          156
          • Table 37 Language form to use

            156
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            156
            • <TABLE ROW>

              156
              • Language

                156
              • Form to use

                156
          • <TABLE BODY>

            156
            • <TABLE ROW>

              156
              • American English

                156
              • icbf.oft

                156
            • <TABLE ROW>

              156
              • French

                156
              • icbf.oft

                156
            • <TABLE ROW>

              156
              • U.K. English

                156
              • icbf.oft

                156
            • <TABLE ROW>

              156
              • Chinese Traditional

                156
              • cnicb.oft

                156
      • Procedure 27 Select the ICB form as the default form in Microsoft Outlook

        156
        • Procedure 27 Select the ICB form as the default form in Microsoft Outlook

          156
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            156
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              156
            • Note: Before beginning this procedure, obtain the name of the published ICB form file. For example, icbf.oft.

              156
              • Note: Before beginning this procedure, obtain the name of the published ICB form file. For example, icbf.oft.

                156
          • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

            156
            • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

              156
          • 3 Select Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

            156
            • 3 Select Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

              156
          • 4 Select the General tab.

            156
            • 4 Select the General tab.

              156
          • 5 Select Forms in When Posting to this folder, use. The Choose Form window opens.

            157
            • 5 Select Forms in When Posting to this folder, use. The Choose Form window opens.

              157
          • 6 Select the library in which the files were published.

            157
            • 6 Select the library in which the files were published.

              157
            • . If you published the forms yourself, select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

              157
              • . If you published the forms yourself, select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

                157
                • . If you published the forms yourself, select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.

                  157
              • . If the ICB administrator published the files, select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

                157
                • . If the ICB administrator published the files, select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.

                  157
          • 7 Select the form name, icbf, and click Open.

            157
            • 7 Select the form name, icbf, and click Open.

              157
          • 8 Click OK.

            157
            • 8 Click OK.

              157
          • 9 Verify that you are using the correct version of the ICB form.

            157
            • 9 Verify that you are using the correct version of the ICB form.

              157
            • a Double-click a timeslot in the Calendar.

              157
              • a Double-click a timeslot in the Calendar.

                157
            • b Choose Help > About this Form from the toolbar. The form version is displayed.

              157
              • b Choose Help > About this Form from the toolbar. The form version is displayed.

                157
      • Follow the steps in

        157
        • Follow the steps in

          157
          • Procedure 28

            157
      • Procedure 28 Resetting the default Calendar form for Microsoft Outlook

        157
        • Procedure 28 Resetting the default Calendar form for Microsoft Outlook

          157
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            157
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              157
          • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

            157
            • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

              157
          • 3 Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

            157
            • 3 Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

              157
          • 4 Select the General tab.

            157
            • 4 Select the General tab.

              157
          • 5 Select Appointment in When posting to this folder, use.

            157
            • 5 Select Appointment in When posting to this folder, use.

              157
          • 6 Click OK.

            157
            • 6 Click OK.

              157
    • Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library

      157
      • Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library

        157
      • When searching for published ICB files, Microsoft Outlook searches first in the Personal Forms Library, then in the Organization...

        157
        • When searching for published ICB files, Microsoft Outlook searches first in the Personal Forms Library, then in the Organization...

          157
          • Procedure 29

            157
          • Procedure 30

            157
      • Procedure 29 Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 1)

        157
        • Procedure 29 Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 1)

          157
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            157
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              157
          • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

            157
            • 2 Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.

              157
          • 3 Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

            158
            • 3 Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.

              158
          • 4 Select the Forms tab.

            158
            • 4 Select the Forms tab.

              158
          • 5 Click Manage. The Forms Manager window opens.

            158
            • 5 Click Manage. The Forms Manager window opens.

              158
          • 6 Click Set in the left half of the window. The Forms Manager window has two Set buttons. The one on the right is inactive.

            158
            • 6 Click Set in the left half of the window. The Forms Manager window has two Set buttons. The one on the right is inactive.

              158
          • 7 Select Personal Forms in the Forms Library.

            158
            • 7 Select Personal Forms in the Forms Library.

              158
          • 8 Click OK.

            158
            • 8 Click OK.

              158
          • 9 Select the ICB form(s) to be deleted from the list in the panel on the left side of the window.

            158
            • 9 Select the ICB form(s) to be deleted from the list in the panel on the left side of the window.

              158
          • 10 Click Delete.

            158
            • 10 Click Delete.

              158
          • 11 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

            158
            • 11 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

              158
          • 12 Click Clear Cash.

            158
            • 12 Click Clear Cash.

              158
          • 13 Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.

            158
            • 13 Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.

              158
          • 14 Click OK to close the Calendar Properties window.

            158
            • 14 Click OK to close the Calendar Properties window.

              158
      • After you remove an ICB form, the Microsoft Outlook Appointment form becomes the default Calendar form. See

        158
        • After you remove an ICB form, the Microsoft Outlook Appointment form becomes the default Calendar form. See

          158
          • “Select the ICB form as the default form in Microsoft Outlook” on page 156

            158
      • Procedure 30 Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 2)

        158
        • Procedure 30 Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 2)

          158
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            158
            • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

              158
          • 2 Choose Tools. > Options from the file menu. The Options window opens.

            158
            • 2 Choose Tools. > Options from the file menu. The Options window opens.

              158
          • 3 Select the Other tab.

            158
            • 3 Select the Other tab.

              158
          • 4 Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.

            158
            • 4 Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.

              158
          • 5 Click Custom Forms. The Custom Forms tab opens in the Option window.

            158
            • 5 Click Custom Forms. The Custom Forms tab opens in the Option window.

              158
          • 6 Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.

            158
            • 6 Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.

              158
          • 7 Select the ICB forms to be deleted.

            158
            • 7 Select the ICB forms to be deleted.

              158
          • 8 Click on Clear Cash.

            158
            • 8 Click on Clear Cash.

              158
          • 9 Click Delete.

            158
            • 9 Click Delete.

              158
    • Login to the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook

      159
      • Login to the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook

        159
      • You need to log into the ICB when you are setting up or editing the ICB parameters of a conference. You will use the same ICB us...

        159
        • You need to log into the ICB when you are setting up or editing the ICB parameters of a conference. You will use the same ICB us...

          159
          • Procedure 31

            159
      • Procedure 31 Log into the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook

        159
        • Procedure 31 Log into the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook

          159
          • 1 If you are not already at the ICB tab, go to the ICB tab Microsoft Outlook.

            159
            • 1 If you are not already at the ICB tab, go to the ICB tab Microsoft Outlook.

              159
            • a Select Calendar from the Folder List in Microsoft Outlook.

              159
              • a Select Calendar from the Folder List in Microsoft Outlook.

                159
            • b Click New.

              159
              • b Click New.

                159
            • c Select the ICB tab.

              159
              • c Select the ICB tab.

                159
            • d Select the ICB card from the ICB Address drop-down list.

              159
              • d Select the ICB card from the ICB Address drop-down list.

                159
            • e Select ICB Conference.

              159
              • e Select ICB Conference.

                159
          • 2 Enter your username and password in the Enter Network Password window. See

            159
            • 2 Enter your username and password in the Enter Network Password window. See

              159
              • Figure 75

                159
              • Figure 75 Username and Password (Microsoft Outlook)

                159
                • Figure 75 Username and Password (Microsoft Outlook)

                  159
            • a Enter your user ID in the User Name field.

              159
              • a Enter your user ID in the User Name field.

                159
            • b Enter your password in the Password field.

              159
              • b Enter your password in the Password field.

                159
            • c Select Save this password in your password list (optional).

              159
              • c Select Save this password in your password list (optional).

                159
            • d Click OK.

              159
              • d Click OK.

                159
  • Scheduling a new conference

    160
    • Scheduling a new conference

      160
    • Scheduling window

      160
      • Scheduling window

        160
      • Open a new appointment in Microsoft Outlook after logging into the ICB card.

        160
        • Open a new appointment in Microsoft Outlook after logging into the ICB card.

          160
      • Figure 76 shows the scheduling window when it first opens after the ICB tab has been selected.

        160
        • Figure 76 shows the scheduling window when it first opens after the ICB tab has been selected.

          160
          • Figure 76

            160
        • Figure 76 Microsoft Outlook ICB tab - Schedule a new conference

          160
          • Figure 76 Microsoft Outlook ICB tab - Schedule a new conference

            160
      • Table 38 describes the fields in the Microsoft Outlook ICB tab.

        160
        • Table 38 describes the fields in the Microsoft Outlook ICB tab.

          160
          • Table 38

            160
        • <TABLE>

          160
          • Table 38 ICB tab window fields

            160
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              160
              • Field

                160
              • Description

                160
          • <TABLE BODY>

            160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              160
              • ICB Address

                160
              • The IP address or DNS of the ICB card.

                160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              160
              • ICB conference

                160
              • When checked, schedules the conference to the ICB card.

                160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              160
              • Owner ID

                160
              • User name that is logged into the ICB card.

                160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              160
              • Chairperson

                160
              • Enter the name of the chairperson for this conference.

                160
            • <TABLE ROW>

              161
              • Start

                161
              • Enter the date and time that the conference starts. The minutes box shows 15-minute increments (that is, 0, 15, 30, and 45). Ran...

                161
                • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                  161
                  • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                    161
                    • . In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The system interprets this as an immediate conference.

                      161
                • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                  161
                  • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                    161
                    • . In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future 15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.

                      161
                • Note: If a change needs to be made to an existing conference, click on the Appointment tab to make the necessary changes. That information will be moved to the ICB tab.

                  161
                  • Note: If a change needs to be made to an existing conference, click on the Appointment tab to make the necessary changes. That information will be moved to the ICB tab.

                    161
            • <TABLE ROW>

              161
              • Duration

                161
              • Enter the duration of the conference. Range: Up to 12 hours in 15-minute increments (the selection box shows all possible values).

                161
            • <TABLE ROW>

              161
              • Number of Participants

                161
              • Select the number of participants for this conference from the drop-down box. The default value is four.

                161
            • <TABLE ROW>

              161
              • Access Numbers

                161
              • Select either to automatically assign a number or a specific number from the drop-down list.

                161
      • Free Ports view

        161
        • Free Ports view

          161
        • Figure 77 shows the expanded scheduling window after clicking on the Free Ports button. The information in this window refers to the date set above it in the Start area. The time scale covers 12 hours in 15-minute increments.

          161
          • Figure 77 shows the expanded scheduling window after clicking on the Free Ports button. The information in this window refers to the date set above it in the Start area. The time scale covers 12 hours in 15-minute increments.

            161
            • Figure 77

              161
          • Figure 77 ICB tab window - Free Ports view

            162
            • Figure 77 ICB tab window - Free Ports view

              162
      • Options section

        162
        • Options section

          162
        • Figure 78 on page 163 shows the expanded window after clicking on the Options button.

          162
          • Figure 78 on page 163 shows the expanded window after clicking on the Options button.

            162
            • Figure 78 on page 163

              162
          • Figure 78 ICB tab window - Options section

            163
            • Figure 78 ICB tab window - Options section

              163
        • Table 39 describes the fields in the Options section.

          164
          • Table 39 describes the fields in the Options section.

            164
            • Table 39

              164
          • <TABLE>

            164
            • Table 39 ICB tab window - Options section fields

              164
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • Field

                  164
                • Description

                  164
            • <TABLE BODY>

              164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • Password section

                  164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • User Password

                  164
                • Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:

                  164
                  • . No password - no optional password.

                    164
                    • . No password - no optional password.

                      164
                      • . No password - no optional password.

                        164
                  • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                    164
                    • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                      164
                      • . Automatically assigned - The system automatically generates the password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.

                        164
                  • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                    164
                    • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                      164
                      • . Choose a password - The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8 digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the same password.

                        164
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    164
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • Chairperson Password

                  164
                • Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same options as the user password.

                  164
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    164
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • General Options section

                  164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • Indication for entry and exit

                  164
                • Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The following options are available from the pull-down menu:

                  164
                  • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                    164
                    • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                      164
                      • . Play name on entry and name on exit.

                        164
                  • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                    164
                    • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                      164
                      • . Play name on entry and tone on exit.

                        164
                  • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                    164
                    • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                      164
                      • . Play tone on entry and tone on exit.

                        164
                  • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                    164
                    • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                      164
                      • . Silence (no indication for entry or exit).

                        164
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    164
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                164
                • Language

                  164
                • Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference. The pull-down menu offers the set of languages avai...

                  164
                  • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                    164
              • <TABLE ROW>

                165
                • Add ports if needed

                  165
                • When this box is checked, the system allows the meeting to expand beyond the number of reserved ports if more than the anticipat...

                  165
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    165
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      165
              • <TABLE ROW>

                165
                • Keep one port for chairperson

                  165
                • Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all but one of the ports are occupied, and the chairperson has not...

                  165
                  • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                    165
                    • Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.

                      165
      • Scheduling complete

        165
        • Scheduling complete

          165
        • After scheduling a new meeting or modifying an existing meeting, the Confirmation window appears to verify the entries. The system displays the window after it stores the conference in the database. See

          165
          • After scheduling a new meeting or modifying an existing meeting, the Confirmation window appears to verify the entries. The system displays the window after it stores the conference in the database. See

            165
            • Figure 79

              165
        • Figure 79 Confirmation window

          165
          • Figure 79 Confirmation window

            165
      • Editing an existing conference

        165
        • Editing an existing conference

          165
        • Open the conference appointment in Microsoft Outlook for editing. The only field that cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference is the dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a single-card conference dual and vice versa).

          165
          • Open the conference appointment in Microsoft Outlook for editing. The only field that cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference is the dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a single-card conference dual and vice versa).

            165
        • Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:

          166
          • Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:

            166
          • . number of participants

            166
            • . number of participants

              166
              • . number of participants

                166
            • . duration

              166
              • . duration

                166
            • . add ports as needed (under the Options section)

              166
              • . add ports as needed (under the Options section)

                166
        • Once a conference is scheduled with the Microsoft Outlook GUI, the ICB tab looks like

          166
          • Once a conference is scheduled with the Microsoft Outlook GUI, the ICB tab looks like

            166
            • Figure 80

              166
            • “Chairperson operations” on page 98

              166
            • Figure 81

              166
          • Figure 80 ICB tab window - edit conference

            166
            • Figure 80 ICB tab window - edit conference

              166
          • Figure 81 ICB tab window - display information

            166
            • Figure 81 ICB tab window - display information

              166
  • Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar

    167
    • Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar

      167
    • A user can give another person sharing permission to schedule appointments and meetings for them in their calendar. The delegate...

      167
      • A user can give another person sharing permission to schedule appointments and meetings for them in their calendar. The delegate...

        167
    • To use the delegate feature with the ICB form:

      167
      • To use the delegate feature with the ICB form:

        167
      • . The person who schedules the meeting and the person that gives permission must have accounts in the ICB card. The owner of the meeting is the one that gave permission.

        167
        • . The person who schedules the meeting and the person that gives permission must have accounts in the ICB card. The owner of the meeting is the one that gave permission.

          167
          • . The person who schedules the meeting and the person that gives permission must have accounts in the ICB card. The owner of the meeting is the one that gave permission.

            167
        • . When using Microsoft Outlook 2003, the script in shared folders must be enabled. (Tools > Options > Other > Advanced Options).

          167
          • . When using Microsoft Outlook 2003, the script in shared folders must be enabled. (Tools > Options > Other > Advanced Options).

            167
• Maintenance

  169
  • Maintenance

    169
  • Purpose

    169
    • Purpose

      169
    • This chapter describes how to maintain and troubleshoot the ICB card and associated equipment.

      169
      • This chapter describes how to maintain and troubleshoot the ICB card and associated equipment.

        169
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      169
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        169
      • . “Maintenance overview” on page 169 - introduces the maintenance strategy.

        169
        • . “Maintenance overview” on page 169 - introduces the maintenance strategy.

          169
          • . “Maintenance overview” on page 169 - introduces the maintenance strategy.

            169
            • . “Maintenance overview” on page 169

              169
        • . “Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form” on page 172 - shows the process for updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI form.

          169
          • . “Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form” on page 172 - shows the process for updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI form.

            169
            • . “Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form” on page 172

              169
        • . “Diagnostic tools” on page 174 - lists the available maintenance tools.

          169
          • . “Diagnostic tools” on page 174 - lists the available maintenance tools.

            169
            • . “Diagnostic tools” on page 174

              169
        • . “CLI command summary” on page 178 - shows the commands technicians can use from the CLI to perform maintenance activities.

          169
          • . “CLI command summary” on page 178 - shows the commands technicians can use from the CLI to perform maintenance activities.

            169
            • . “CLI command summary” on page 178

              169
        • . “ICB fault isolation and correction” on page 181 - describes faults and shows recommended recovery actions.

          169
          • . “ICB fault isolation and correction” on page 181 - describes faults and shows recommended recovery actions.

            169
            • . “ICB fault isolation and correction” on page 181

              169
        • . “Error message handling” on page 183 - describes the on-line error message system.

          169
          • . “Error message handling” on page 183 - describes the on-line error message system.

            169
            • . “Error message handling” on page 183

              169
        • . “Backup and restore procedures” on page 187 - provides procedures for backing up and restoring data.

          169
          • . “Backup and restore procedures” on page 187 - provides procedures for backing up and restoring data.

            169
            • . “Backup and restore procedures” on page 187

              169
  • Maintenance overview

    169
    • Maintenance overview

      169
    • Perform operations, administration, and maintenance (OA&M) of the ICB system by using the command line interface (CLI). Access the CLI through the following:

      169
      • Perform operations, administration, and maintenance (OA&M) of the ICB system by using the command line interface (CLI). Access the CLI through the following:

        169
      • . A TTY terminal connected to the ICB card or through a PC emulating a terminal. The PC connects to the ICB card through the Ethernet Adapter.

        169
        • . A TTY terminal connected to the ICB card or through a PC emulating a terminal. The PC connects to the ICB card through the Ethernet Adapter.

          169
          • . A TTY terminal connected to the ICB card or through a PC emulating a terminal. The PC connects to the ICB card through the Ethernet Adapter.

            169
        • . The administration BUI.

          169
          • . The administration BUI.

            169
    • An operator can use the CLI to generate reports and perform port maintenance. An administrator can use the CLI to manage system administration, maintenance, and security.

      170
      • An operator can use the CLI to generate reports and perform port maintenance. An administrator can use the CLI to manage system administration, maintenance, and security.

        170
    • To conduct conference OA&M for an ICB card, connect a terminal to the RS-232 port or the Ethernet connector associated with that...

      170
      • To conduct conference OA&M for an ICB card, connect a terminal to the RS-232 port or the Ethernet connector associated with that...

        170
    • The Ethernet adapter provides two options:

      170
      • The Ethernet adapter provides two options:

        170
      • . direct terminal connection or modem connection to DB-9 connector

        170
        • . direct terminal connection or modem connection to DB-9 connector

          170
          • . direct terminal connection or modem connection to DB-9 connector

            170
        • . Ethernet connection, where multiple terminals connected to the Ethernet can access an ICB card

          170
          • . Ethernet connection, where multiple terminals connected to the Ethernet can access an ICB card

            170
    • For the Ethernet connection option, an IP address assigned to the ICB card is required to enable access to the ICB through the LAN.

      170
      • For the Ethernet connection option, an IP address assigned to the ICB card is required to enable access to the ICB through the LAN.

        170
    • Figure 82 shows an Meridian system with two IPE modules. This example shows each IPE module with one ICB card. Each ICB card connects to ...

      170
      • Figure 82 shows an Meridian system with two IPE modules. This example shows each IPE module with one ICB card. Each ICB card connects to ...

        170
        • Figure 82

          170
      • Figure 82 ICB card in the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

        171
        • Figure 82 ICB card in the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

          171
    • Problem solving

      171
      • Problem solving

        171
      • A problem can have more than one cause. To isolate the cause, a knowledge of ICB operation is required. After identifying the ca...

        171
        • A problem can have more than one cause. To isolate the cause, a knowledge of ICB operation is required. After identifying the ca...

          171
      • Make sure that the Meridian system is operating correctly, before diagnosing ICB problems.

        171
        • Make sure that the Meridian system is operating correctly, before diagnosing ICB problems.

          171
        • <TABLE>

          171
          • <TABLE BODY>

            171
            • <TABLE ROW>

              171
              • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                171
                • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                  171
                  • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                    171
                • Refer to the following:

                  171
                • . 553-3011-500 - Small System Maintenance

                  171
                  • . 553-3011-500 - Small System Maintenance

                    171
                    • . 553-3011-500 - Small System Maintenance

                      171
                  • . 553-3021-500 - Large System Maintenance

                    171
                    • . 553-3021-500 - Large System Maintenance

                      171
                  • . 553-3031-500 - CS 1000S System Maintenance

                    171
                    • . 553-3031-500 - CS 1000S System Maintenance

                      171
                  • . 553-3041-500 - CS 1000E System Maintenance

                    171
                    • . 553-3041-500 - CS 1000E System Maintenance

                      171
                • . 555-4001-129 - Meridian SL-100 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Reference Manual

                  171
                  • . 555-4001-129 - Meridian SL-100 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Reference Manual

                    171
                    • . 555-4001-129 - Meridian SL-100 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Reference Manual

                      171
  • Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form

    172
    • Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form

      172
    • When the ICB form needs to be updated in Microsoft Outlook, the form needs to be updated first by the Administrator. The Adminis...

      172
      • When the ICB form needs to be updated in Microsoft Outlook, the form needs to be updated first by the Administrator. The Adminis...

        172
        • “Microsoft Outlook Administrator to publish the ICB files to the Organizational Forms Library” on page 154

          172
        • “Publishing the ICB form in Microsoft Outlook by each Microsoft Outlook user” on page 155

          172
    • Users need to clear cache when the ICB form does not exist in Microsoft Outlook. Follow

      172
      • Users need to clear cache when the ICB form does not exist in Microsoft Outlook. Follow

        172
        • Procedure 32

          172
    • Procedure 32 Clearing the Microsoft Outlook forms Cache

      172
      • Procedure 32 Clearing the Microsoft Outlook forms Cache

        172
        • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

          172
          • 1 Open Microsoft Outlook.

            172
        • 2 Choose Tools > Options. The Options window opens.

          172
          • 2 Choose Tools > Options. The Options window opens.

            172
        • 3 Select the Other tab.

          172
          • 3 Select the Other tab.

            172
        • 4 Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.

          172
          • 4 Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.

            172
        • 5 Click Custom Forms. The Options window opens.

          172
          • 5 Click Custom Forms. The Options window opens.

            172
        • 6 Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.

          172
          • 6 Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.

            172
        • 7 Click Clear Cache.

          172
          • 7 Click Clear Cache.

            172
          • If no Clear Cache button is available, you must delete the forms cache file manually, follow the steps in

            172
            • Procedure 33

              172
        • 8 Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.

          172
          • 8 Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.

            172
        • 9 Click OK to close the Options window.

          172
          • 9 Click OK to close the Options window.

            172
        • 10 Click OK to close the Advanced Options window.

          172
          • 10 Click OK to close the Advanced Options window.

            172
        • 11 Click OK to close the Options window.

          172
          • 11 Click OK to close the Options window.

            172
    • Procedure 33 Deleting the forms cache file manually

      172
      • Procedure 33 Deleting the forms cache file manually

        172
        • 1 Close Microsoft Outlook.

          172
          • 1 Close Microsoft Outlook.

            172
        • 2 Go to the folder where the forms cache file is located.

          172
          • 2 Go to the folder where the forms cache file is located.

            172
          • . If you are using User Profiles, go to

            172
            • . If you are using User Profiles, go to

              172
              • . If you are using User Profiles, go to

                172
              • C:\Windows\Profiles\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\Microsoft\Forms

                172
            • . If you are not using User Profiles, go to

              172
              • . If you are not using User Profiles, go to

                172
              • C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\Microsoft\Forms

                172
        • 3 Delete the file Frmcache.dat.

          173
          • 3 Delete the file Frmcache.dat.

            173
    • Each upgrade of the ICB firmware comes with upgraded ICB files, which must be retrieved and published. See

      173
      • Each upgrade of the ICB firmware comes with upgraded ICB files, which must be retrieved and published. See

        173
        • Procedure 45, “Upgrade the ICB firmware version,” on page -218

          173
        • Procedure 34

          173
    • Procedure 34 Upgrading the ICB form in the Organizational Forms Library

      173
      • Procedure 34 Upgrading the ICB form in the Organizational Forms Library

        173
        • 1 Retrieve the upgraded ICB files.

          173
          • 1 Retrieve the upgraded ICB files.

            173
          • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are stored.

            173
            • a Go to the folder where the ICB files are stored.

              173
          • b Delete all .OFT files except icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft.

            173
            • b Delete all .OFT files except icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft.

              173
          • c Rename an existing ICB form files, using names such as “icbf_old.oft”, “icbs_old.oft”, “icbsjc_old.oft”, and “icbsk_old.oft”.

            173
            • c Rename an existing ICB form files, using names such as “icbf_old.oft”, “icbs_old.oft”, “icbsjc_old.oft”, and “icbsk_old.oft”.

              173
            • Note: Nortel Networks recommends that customers keep only one previous version of the ICB files.

              173
              • Note: Nortel Networks recommends that customers keep only one previous version of the ICB files.

                173
          • d Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following username and password.

            173
            • d Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following username and password.

              173
            • Username: micb

              173
            • Password: admin

              173
          • e Copy the icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the OUTLOOK directory.

            173
            • e Copy the icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the OUTLOOK directory.

              173
        • 2 Remove older versions from the library. Follow the steps in

          173
          • 2 Remove older versions from the library. Follow the steps in

            173
            • Procedure 29 on page 157

              173
        • 3 Publish the new upgraded forms. Follow the steps in

          173
          • 3 Publish the new upgraded forms. Follow the steps in

            173
            • Procedure 26 on page 155

              173
        • 4 Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache. Follow the steps in

          173
          • 4 Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache. Follow the steps in

            173
            • Procedure 32 on page 172

              173
    • Users can now install the new form as their default form.

      173
      • Users can now install the new form as their default form.

        173
    • Follow the steps in

      173
      • Follow the steps in

        173
        • Procedure 35

          173
    • Procedure 35 Upgrading the ICB form in the Personal Forms Library

      173
      • Procedure 35 Upgrading the ICB form in the Personal Forms Library

        173
        • 1 Remove the current form. Follow the steps in

          173
          • 1 Remove the current form. Follow the steps in

            173
            • Procedure 30 on page 158

              173
        • 2 If the ICB administrator has not published the form, follow the steps in

          173
          • 2 If the ICB administrator has not published the form, follow the steps in

            173
            • Procedure 26 on page 155

              173
        • 3 Set the new upgraded form as the default Calendar form. Follow the steps in

          174
          • 3 Set the new upgraded form as the default Calendar form. Follow the steps in

            174
            • Procedure 27 on page 156

              174
        • 4 Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache using

          174
          • 4 Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache using

            174
            • Procedure 32 on page 172

              174
        • 5 Schedule a test meeting to ensure the upgrade was successful. Follow the steps in

          174
          • 5 Schedule a test meeting to ensure the upgrade was successful. Follow the steps in

            174
            • “Scheduling a new conference” on page 160

              174
  • Diagnostic tools

    174
    • Diagnostic tools

      174
    • Use the following diagnostic tools to troubleshoot problems in the system, including problems with the ICB. When diagnosing ICB problems, use the following tools:

      174
      • Use the following diagnostic tools to troubleshoot problems in the system, including problems with the ICB. When diagnosing ICB problems, use the following tools:

        174
      • . LED indicators

        174
        • . LED indicators

          174
          • . LED indicators

            174
        • . display codes

          174
          • . display codes

            174
        • . card self-tests

          174
          • . card self-tests

            174
        • . sanity monitoring

          174
          • . sanity monitoring

            174
        • . diagnostic commands (that is, overlay commands for the CS 1000 and MAP commands for the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100)

          174
          • . diagnostic commands (that is, overlay commands for the CS 1000 and MAP commands for the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100)

            174
        • . history files

          174
          • . history files

            174
        • . TCP/IP connectivity test

          174
          • . TCP/IP connectivity test

            174
    • ICB status LED indicator

      174
      • ICB status LED indicator

        174
      • The ICB has a red LED indicator at the top of the faceplate that indicates the status of the card. If the LED is lit, the card can be faulty or manual busy (Man). The card goes through a series of tests. When inserted into the slot or reset, the card:

        174
        • The ICB has a red LED indicator at the top of the faceplate that indicates the status of the card. If the LED is lit, the card can be faulty or manual busy (Man). The card goes through a series of tests. When inserted into the slot or reset, the card:

          174
        • . blinks three times during self-test

          174
          • . blinks three times during self-test

            174
            • . blinks three times during self-test

              174
          • . runs software files from the PCMCIA to the ICB card

            174
            • . runs software files from the PCMCIA to the ICB card

              174
          • . blinks three more times

            174
            • . blinks three more times

              174
          • . stays on until a return to service (RTS) occurs

            174
            • . stays on until a return to service (RTS) occurs

              174
      • This procedure takes approximately 45 seconds. If the card turns on and remains on without blinking, the card is not functioning correctly. The LED turns off when the card returns to service.

        174
        • This procedure takes approximately 45 seconds. If the card turns on and remains on without blinking, the card is not functioning correctly. The LED turns off when the card returns to service.

          174
    • Power Up Self-test

      174
      • Power Up Self-test

        174
      • The ICB card has testability features that aid in fault isolation. When inserted into an operating system module, when it is pow...

        174
        • The ICB card has testability features that aid in fault isolation. When inserted into an operating system module, when it is pow...

          174
      • The self-test checks general ICB functions and determines if they are operating correctly. The checks are useful when first inst...

        175
        • The self-test checks general ICB functions and determines if they are operating correctly. The checks are useful when first inst...

          175
      • The Power Up Self-test is executed through the maintenance port. If any fault has been detected, an error message is stored in the system log file and is printed on the maintenance port.

        175
        • The Power Up Self-test is executed through the maintenance port. If any fault has been detected, an error message is stored in the system log file and is printed on the maintenance port.

          175
      • Table 40 describes the items the system checks during the ICB self-test.

        175
        • Table 40 describes the items the system checks during the ICB self-test.

          175
          • Table 40

            175
        • <TABLE>

          175
          • Table 40 ICB self-test sequence

            175
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • Item tested

                175
              • Description

                175
          • <TABLE BODY>

            175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • Processor/Co-processor

                175
              • Reads and stores processor ID. Runs processor self-test.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • SDRAM

                175
              • Checks the amount of SDRAM installed. Performs read/write test.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • System I/O Controller

                175
              • Performs read/write test on selected registers.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • PCMCIA Controller

                175
              • Performs read/write test on selected registers.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • DS-30X Interface

                175
              • Tests shared memory and performs loopback test over SD-30 LCA.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • On-board DSP card

                175
              • Checks the presence of DSP cards and initiates diagnostic tests on DSP cards, if present.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • PCMCIA hard drive

                175
              • Checks the presence of the hard drive and checks the configuration information.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • PCMCIA Flash card

                175
              • Checks the presence of Flash memory and checks configuration information.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • Loopback MPU

                175
              • Sends data to the transmit area of the MPU buffers and resends it back for the receive area to the same buffer.

                175
            • <TABLE ROW>

              175
              • Loopback DSP

                175
              • Sends data to the transmit area of the MPU buffers and resends it back for the receive area to the same buffer.

                175
    • Signaling Tests

      175
      • Signaling Tests

        175
      • Signaling tests check the x12 interfaces in both directions between the card and system. This test includes reception of the mes...

        175
        • Signaling tests check the x12 interfaces in both directions between the card and system. This test includes reception of the mes...

          175
    • Sanity monitoring

      176
      • Sanity monitoring

        176
      • Sanity monitoring is a background routine that checks the operation of system resources, such as CPU activity and memory allocat...

        176
        • Sanity monitoring is a background routine that checks the operation of system resources, such as CPU activity and memory allocat...

          176
    • Diagnostic commands

      176
      • Diagnostic commands

        176
      • Meridian 1/CS 1000 overlay commands

        176
        • Meridian 1/CS 1000 overlay commands

          176
        • Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines. Diagnostic tests can also be activated from a maintenance TTY.

          176
          • Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines. Diagnostic tests can also be activated from a maintenance TTY.

            176
        • The boot time of the ICB from reset, or power up, to when the card is ready and from an ENLC to when the ports are idle is approximately two minutes.

          176
          • The boot time of the ICB from reset, or power up, to when the card is ready and from an ENLC to when the ports are idle is approximately two minutes.

            176
        • All relevant system maintenance commands for an extended digital line card apply to the ICB and are handled transparently to the system. Use LD32 to enable and disable an ACD M2616 telephone.

          176
          • All relevant system maintenance commands for an extended digital line card apply to the ICB and are handled transparently to the system. Use LD32 to enable and disable an ACD M2616 telephone.

            176
        • Table 41 lists some of the commands used to control the ICB status and functions.

          176
          • Table 41 lists some of the commands used to control the ICB status and functions.

            176
            • Table 41

              176
          • <TABLE>

            176
            • Table 41 Commands to enable/disable ICB channels

              176
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • Command

                  176
                • Operation performed

                  176
            • <TABLE BODY>

              176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • LD 32

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • DISC/ENLC

                  176
                • Disable/Enable specified card.

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • DISU/ENLU

                  176
                • Disable/Enable specified channel.

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • LOOP

                  176
                • Performs a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on the specified loop.

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • STAT

                  176
                • Get status of specified card/channel.

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • LD 30

                  176
              • <TABLE ROW>

                176
                • UNTT

                  176
                • Performs self-test on the ICB.

                  176
      • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 diagnostic commands

        177
        • CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 diagnostic commands

          177
        • Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines. Diagnostic tests can be activated from the MAP terminal on th...

          177
          • Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines. Diagnostic tests can be activated from the MAP terminal on th...

            177
        • Table 42 lists commands used to control the ICB status and functions.

          177
          • Table 42 lists commands used to control the ICB status and functions.

            177
            • Table 42

              177
          • <TABLE>

            177
            • Table 42 CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 commands to enable/disable ICB channels

              177
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • Command

                  177
                • Operation performed

                  177
            • <TABLE BODY>

              177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • IPE MAP Level

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • Bsy Card x/ RTS card x

                  177
                • Disable/enable specified card.

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • Tst

                  177
                • Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on the specified loop.

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • QueryPM Inven Card x

                  177
                • Get status of specified card.

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • LTP MAP Level

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • Bsy

                  177
                • Make the LEN or DN busy.

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • Bsy INB

                  177
                • Take the port out of service. The system does not generate alarms.

                  177
              • <TABLE ROW>

                177
                • RTS

                  177
                • Bring the ICB port in-service.

                  177
          • Note: During a One Night Process (ONP), a no restart switch activity (SWACT) to the other central processing unit (CPU) drops ac...

            177
            • Note: During a One Night Process (ONP), a no restart switch activity (SWACT) to the other central processing unit (CPU) drops ac...

              177
    • TCP/IP connectivity test

      177
      • TCP/IP connectivity test

        177
      • Maintenance technicians can use “ping” to test if the LAN connection is installed and configured properly. Perform a ping test in one of the following ways (they are equivalent so there is no need to try both):

        177
        • Maintenance technicians can use “ping” to test if the LAN connection is installed and configured properly. Perform a ping test in one of the following ways (they are equivalent so there is no need to try both):

          177
        • . from a computer on the local LAN to the ICB card’s IP address

          177
          • . from a computer on the local LAN to the ICB card’s IP address

            177
            • . from a computer on the local LAN to the ICB card’s IP address

              177
          • . from the CLI (under the SMaint/ directory) to the IP address of a computer on the local LAN

            177
            • . from the CLI (under the SMaint/ directory) to the IP address of a computer on the local LAN

              177
  • CLI command summary

    178
    • CLI command summary

      178
    • Using CLI commands

      178
      • Using CLI commands

        178
      • The CLI contains menus and submenus. To select a menu option, enter the appropriate short command or full command at the prompt. When a menu is selected, use the commands in

        178
        • The CLI contains menus and submenus. To select a menu option, enter the appropriate short command or full command at the prompt. When a menu is selected, use the commands in

          178
          • Table 43

            178
        • <TABLE>

          178
          • Table 43 Navigating the menus and displaying help

            178
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • Command

                178
              • Result

                178
          • <TABLE BODY>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • *

                178
              • Returns to the previous menu.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • /

                178
              • Returns to the top menu level.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • ?

                178
              • Displays help for the commands in the current menu.

                178
      • When entering a menu option that has parameters defined, the “Modify, Save, or Cancel:” command line displays so that the parameters can be modified, if required.

        178
        • When entering a menu option that has parameters defined, the “Modify, Save, or Cancel:” command line displays so that the parameters can be modified, if required.

          178
      • To modify system parameters and objects, use one or more of the commands in

        178
        • To modify system parameters and objects, use one or more of the commands in

          178
          • Table 44

            178
          • Table 45

            178
        • <TABLE>

          178
          • Table 44 Modifying parameters

            178
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • Command

                178
              • Result

                178
          • <TABLE BODY>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • M

                178
              • Modifies one or more parameters.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • S

                178
              • Saves modified parameters.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • C

                178
              • Cancels the modification and allows the parameter to keep its previous value.

                178
        • <TABLE>

          178
          • Table 45 Modifying objects

            178
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • Command

                178
              • Result

                178
          • <TABLE BODY>

            178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • <cr>

                178
              • Accepts the current value when the Enter key is pressed.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • value <cr>

                178
              • Changes the attribute with a new value when the value is entered and the Enter key is pressed.

                178
            • <TABLE ROW>

              178
              • .

                178
              • Cancels the modification and allows the object to keep its previous value.

                178
      • To modify a value or attribute of an object, the program responds with a sequence of prompts: one prompt for each attribute of t...

        179
        • To modify a value or attribute of an object, the program responds with a sequence of prompts: one prompt for each attribute of t...

          179
      • attribute_a (current_value_a): new_value_a <cr> attribute_b (current_value_b): <cr> attribute_c (current_value_c): .

        179
        • attribute_a (current_value_a): new_value_a <cr> attribute_b (current_value_b): <cr> attribute_c (current_value_c): .

          179
      • The system can display the current value and a list of available values to select. In the following example, the value of attribute_d changes to bbbb:

        179
        • The system can display the current value and a list of available values to select. In the following example, the value of attribute_d changes to bbbb:

          179
      • attribute_d (current_d, (1-aaaa, 2-bbbb, 3-cccc)): 2

        179
        • attribute_d (current_d, (1-aaaa, 2-bbbb, 3-cccc)): 2

          179
      • When executing the command(s), the program provides the option to modify, save, or cancel the changes. When Save is entered, the system accepts the changes. After the session ends, use the commands in

        179
        • When executing the command(s), the program provides the option to modify, save, or cancel the changes. When Save is entered, the system accepts the changes. After the session ends, use the commands in

          179
          • Table 43 on page 178

            179
    • ICB CLI commands

      179
      • ICB CLI commands

        179
      • Table 46 shows ICB-specific CLI commands.

        179
        • Table 46 shows ICB-specific CLI commands.

          179
          • Table 46

            179
        • <TABLE>

          179
          • Table 46 ICB CLI command summary

            179
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            179
            • <TABLE ROW>

              179
              • Menu and command

                179
              • Items and commands

                179
          • <TABLE BODY>

            179
            • <TABLE ROW>

              179
              • System administration: SA

                179
              • System Attributes Editor: SY Use the System Attributes Editor for initial card configuration (see Procedure 13 on page 71) and to define the following:

                179
                • Procedure 13 on page 71

                  179
                • . card name - up to 10 characters; appears in top of the initial window if specified.

                  179
                  • . card name - up to 10 characters; appears in top of the initial window if specified.

                    179
                    • . card name - up to 10 characters; appears in top of the initial window if specified.

                      179
                • . refresh period - time between updates to CLI window when not in use, from 0 to 60 minutes (default is 5 minutes). 0 disables system status display.

                  179
                  • . refresh period - time between updates to CLI window when not in use, from 0 to 60 minutes (default is 5 minutes). 0 disables system status display.

                    179
                    • . refresh period - time between updates to CLI window when not in use, from 0 to 60 minutes (default is 5 minutes). 0 disables system status display.

                      179
                • . short occupancy - detects short connection time of an ICB port. Connection times less than the threshold can indicate a bad co...

                  179
                  • . short occupancy - detects short connection time of an ICB port. Connection times less than the threshold can indicate a bad co...

                    179
                    • . short occupancy - detects short connection time of an ICB port. Connection times less than the threshold can indicate a bad co...

                      179
                  • . subnet mask - the subnet mask of the ICB

                    179
                    • . subnet mask - the subnet mask of the ICB

                      179
                  • . gateway IP address - the gateway IP address of the ICB

                    179
                    • . gateway IP address - the gateway IP address of the ICB

                      179
                  • . IP address - the IP address of the ICB

                    179
                    • . IP address - the IP address of the ICB

                      179
                  • . disconnect lone participant - time before system disconnects a single participant in a conference (default is 30 minutes).

                    179
                    • . disconnect lone participant - time before system disconnects a single participant in a conference (default is 30 minutes).

                      179
            • <TABLE ROW>

              180
              • System Maintenance: SM

                180
              • System Test: ST To perform system component tests enter:

                180
                • . i - perform in-service tests that do not disrupt service

                  180
                  • . i - perform in-service tests that do not disrupt service

                    180
                    • . i - perform in-service tests that do not disrupt service

                      180
                • . o - perform out-of-service tests

                  180
                  • . o - perform out-of-service tests

                    180
                    • . o - perform out-of-service tests

                      180
                • Maintenance Report Browser: MR Browse maintenance reports by date. For more information, see

                  180
                  • “CLI Maintenance (Error) Report” on page 210

                    180
                • Ping Test: Enter a computer’s IP address to test IP connectivity with this computer.

                  180
                • Short Connection Report: SC Browse short connection reports by date (see

                  180
                  • Short Connection Report: SC Browse short connection reports by date (see

                    180
                    • “CLI Short Connection Report” on page 197

                      180
                • Database Archive: AR Backup the customer database (see

                  180
                  • “Backup” on page 134

                    180
                • Database Restore: RE Restore the customer database (see

                  180
                  • “Restore” on page 192

                    180
                • Card Restart: CR Restarts ICB card and begins software reload.

                  180
                • Message Analysis Tool: SHO Prints information about an error message that is entered (see

                  180
                  • Message Analysis Tool: SHO Prints information about an error message that is entered (see

                    180
                    • “Error message procedures” on page 184

                      180
                • Message Filtering: ERR Enables the filtering of error messages (see

                  180
                  • Message Filtering: ERR Enables the filtering of error messages (see

                    180
                    • “Configure error message filtering” on page 186

                      180
                • Data Conversion: CONVERT Copies the data from the upper PCMCIA, converts to ICB Release 4 format, and stores it in the lower PCMCIA.

                  180
            • <TABLE ROW>

              180
              • Protected administration: PA

                180
              • Password Editor: PS Edit passwords (see “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223).

                180
                • “Appendix A: Password security” on page 223

                  180
                • Functionality Upgrade: FU Performs a functionality upgrade. The system prompts for the number of ports and for the keycode that ...

                  180
                • Software Upgrade: SW Performs a software upgrade. The system first prompts for the source: upper socket or FTP. If FTP is entered, the system then prompts for IP address, path to file, login, and password.

                  180
                • Administrator BUI Reset: AB Reset passwords to the default (that is, 000000) of all administrators that use the BUI.

                  180
            • <TABLE ROW>

              181
              • Port maintenance: PM

                181
              • Port Status Display: PS Displays status of all ICB ports as follows: Idle, Dialing_out, Ringing, Talking, or Disabled.

                181
                • Port Disconnect: PD Disconnect a specific port from the conference.

                  181
            • <TABLE ROW>

              181
              • Report Generation: RG

                181
              • Meetings Log Browser: ML Browse the meeting log (see “CLI Meetings Log Report” on page 199).

                181
                • “CLI Meetings Log Report” on page 199

                  181
                • Log ordering: ORDer_mlog Prompts for the same parameters (year, month, day) and displays the log contents sorted by access DN. The advantage is that all records of each specific conference appear together.

                  181
                  • Log ordering: ORDer_mlog Prompts for the same parameters (year, month, day) and displays the log contents sorted by access DN. The advantage is that all records of each specific conference appear together.

                    181
  • ICB fault isolation and correction

    181
    • ICB fault isolation and correction

      181
    • Alarm clearing procedures for the ICB are the identical to those for other IPE cards.

      181
      • Alarm clearing procedures for the ICB are the identical to those for other IPE cards.

        181
        • <TABLE>

          181
          • <TABLE BODY>

            181
            • <TABLE ROW>

              181
              • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                181
                • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                  181
                  • FOR MORE INFORMATION

                    181
                • Refer to the following documents for additional information about how to clear alarms:

                  181
                • . Meridian 1 - Fault Clearing

                  181
                  • . Meridian 1 - Fault Clearing

                    181
                    • . Meridian 1 - Fault Clearing

                      181
                • . Meridian SL-100 - Alarm Clearing Procedures

                  181
                  • . Meridian SL-100 - Alarm Clearing Procedures

                    181
                    • . Meridian SL-100 - Alarm Clearing Procedures

                      181
    • Table 47 describes ICB service problems and the test procedures used to solve these problems.

      181
      • Table 47 describes ICB service problems and the test procedures used to solve these problems.

        181
        • Table 47

          181
      • Note: If the problem cannot be solved after using all available diagnostic tools and test procedures, list the symptoms observed and contact your Nortel Networks representative.

        181
        • Note: If the problem cannot be solved after using all available diagnostic tools and test procedures, list the symptoms observed and contact your Nortel Networks representative.

          181
      • <TABLE>

        181
        • Table 47 ICB equipment problems

          181
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          181
          • <TABLE ROW>

            181
            • Symptoms

              181
            • Diagnosis

              181
            • Solution

              181
        • <TABLE BODY>

          181
          • <TABLE ROW>

            181
            • Red card LED on the ICB is permanently on.

              181
            • Card is disabled or faulty.

              181
            • Check the card status and perform a self-test on the card by pulling it out and plugging it back in, or from the CLI using the cr command under the SMaint menu.

              181
          • <TABLE ROW>

            182
            • Display on the controller card shows fault codes.

              182
            • Card faulty, failed self-test, or problem communicating with peripheral equipment.

              182
            • Refer to the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 Input/Output Administration Guide or Meridian SL-100 Log Report Reference Manual for a description of the fault codes. Based on the description, take the appropriate action to resolve the problem.

              182
          • <TABLE ROW>

            182
            • Error messages the TTY terminal or the MAP displays.

              182
            • Hardware or software problems with the ICB.

              182
            • Note the error messages. Refer to the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 Input/Output Administration Guide or Meridian SL-100 Log Report Reference Manual for their description. Based on the description, take the appropriate action to resolve the problem.

              182
    • Card replacement

      182
      • Card replacement

        182
      • The ICB uses PCMCIA technology which enables the ICB to be removed from the IPE shelf indefinitely without losing the configuration data. Before replacing the PCMCIA card, back up the data on the card so that it does not have to be re-entered (see

        182
        • The ICB uses PCMCIA technology which enables the ICB to be removed from the IPE shelf indefinitely without losing the configuration data. Before replacing the PCMCIA card, back up the data on the card so that it does not have to be re-entered (see

          182
          • “Backup and restore procedures” on page 187

            182
          • Procedure 36

            182
      • Procedure 36 Replace a card

        182
        • Procedure 36 Replace a card

          182
          • 1 Prepare for this procedure (see

            182
            • 1 Prepare for this procedure (see

              182
              • Procedure 1 on page 46

                182
          • 2 Disable the ICB card.

            182
            • 2 Disable the ICB card.

              182
          • 3 Remove the card from its card slot in the IPE module.

            182
            • 3 Remove the card from its card slot in the IPE module.

              182
          • 4 Remove all PCMCIA cards from the old ICB card.

            182
            • 4 Remove all PCMCIA cards from the old ICB card.

              182
          • 5 Transfer all PCMCIA cards to the new ICB card. Keep the packaging material from the new card. This procedure moves all software, configuration, and records to the replacement ICB card.

            182
            • 5 Transfer all PCMCIA cards to the new ICB card. Keep the packaging material from the new card. This procedure moves all software, configuration, and records to the replacement ICB card.

              182
          • 6 Transfer the Security Device from the old ICB to the replacement. The new card reuses the keycode. The keycode remains on the PCMCIA card, which was removed from the old ICB.

            182
            • 6 Transfer the Security Device from the old ICB to the replacement. The new card reuses the keycode. The keycode remains on the PCMCIA card, which was removed from the old ICB.

              182
          • 7 Enable the new card.

            182
            • 7 Enable the new card.

              182
          • 8 Package the old ICB card using the packaging material from the new card. Ship the card to the repair center.

            182
            • 8 Package the old ICB card using the packaging material from the new card. Ship the card to the repair center.

              182
  • Error message handling

    183
    • Error message handling

      183
    • The ICB provides enhanced message handling that includes the following:

      183
      • The ICB provides enhanced message handling that includes the following:

        183
      • . Fixed message format and unique message codes.

        183
        • . Fixed message format and unique message codes.

          183
          • . Fixed message format and unique message codes.

            183
        • . Categorization of messages by severity.

          183
          • . Categorization of messages by severity.

            183
        • . Message analysis tool that provides on-line documentation.

          183
          • . Message analysis tool that provides on-line documentation.

            183
        • . Message filtering based on such items as severity and firmware component.

          183
          • . Message filtering based on such items as severity and firmware component.

            183
        • . Advanced troubleshooting.

          183
          • . Advanced troubleshooting.

            183
    • Note: Since the on-line documentation is always available and accurate according to the cards firmware version, this guide does not document specific error messages.

      183
      • Note: Since the on-line documentation is always available and accurate according to the cards firmware version, this guide does not document specific error messages.

        183
        • Note: Since the on-line documentation is always available and accurate according to the cards firmware version, this guide does not document specific error messages.

          183
    • Error messages format

      183
      • Error messages format

        183
      • The general format of error messages is as follows:

        183
        • The general format of error messages is as follows:

          183
      • <serial number> <severity> <error code> <timestamp> <error text>

        183
        • <serial number> <severity> <error code> <timestamp> <error text>

          183
      • Table 48 describes the error message fields.

        183
        • Table 48 describes the error message fields.

          183
          • Table 48

            183
        • <TABLE>

          183
          • Table 48 Error message field formats

            183
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            183
            • <TABLE ROW>

              183
              • Field

                183
              • Description

                183
          • <TABLE BODY>

            183
            • <TABLE ROW>

              183
              • <serial number>

                183
              • Four digits that provide a sequence for the messages. It starts at 0001 at power-up and increments by one for each message issued. It wraps around when it reaches 9999.

                183
            • <TABLE ROW>

              183
              • <severity>

                183
              • Severity levels are as follows:

                183
                • CRITICAL - indicates immediate corrective action is required (for example, the application cannot continue and/or the card must be restarted).

                  183
                  • CRITICAL - indicates immediate corrective action is required (for example, the application cannot continue and/or the card must be restarted).

                    183
                • MAJOR - indicates urgent corrective action is required (for example, the BUI doesn’t work, but call processing continues to operate).

                  183
                  • MAJOR - indicates urgent corrective action is required (for example, the BUI doesn’t work, but call processing continues to operate).

                    183
                • MINOR - indicates the existence of a fault condition; corrective action should be taken to prevent a more serious fault. For example, a problem affecting a single channel is minor, so long as the system is still fully operational.

                  183
                  • MINOR - indicates the existence of a fault condition; corrective action should be taken to prevent a more serious fault. For example, a problem affecting a single channel is minor, so long as the system is still fully operational.

                    183
                • WARNING - indicates a low level failure that almost does not impact a customer. No corrective action is required, because auto-recovery is performed. Frequent appearance can indicate a more serious problem.

                  183
                  • WARNING - indicates a low level failure that almost does not impact a customer. No corrective action is required, because auto-recovery is performed. Frequent appearance can indicate a more serious problem.

                    183
                • INFO - shows normal operational event notifications (for example, state changes in hardware or software; time and date changes).

                  183
                  • INFO - shows normal operational event notifications (for example, state changes in hardware or software; time and date changes).

                    183
                • DEBUG - for use by designers only.

                  183
                  • DEBUG - for use by designers only.

                    183
            • <TABLE ROW>

              184
              • <error code>

                184
              • Unique identifier of the event being reported. It is made up of the following two parts:

                184
                • . a string of up to six letters indicating the firmware component that originates the message

                  184
                  • . a string of up to six letters indicating the firmware component that originates the message

                    184
                    • . a string of up to six letters indicating the firmware component that originates the message

                      184
                • . three decimal digits comprising the error number within this component

                  184
                  • . three decimal digits comprising the error number within this component

                    184
                    • . three decimal digits comprising the error number within this component

                      184
            • <TABLE ROW>

              184
              • <timestamp>

                184
              • Date and time of the message in the format MM-DD hh:mm:ss:ff, where: MM = month number. DD = day of the month. hh = hour (in 24-hour format). mm = minutes. ss = seconds. fff = fraction of second, in milliseconds.

                184
            • <TABLE ROW>

              184
              • <error text>

                184
              • Short description of the problem or event, and related parameters (for example, port number).

                184
    • Error message procedures

      184
      • Error message procedures

        184
      • Follow the steps in

        184
        • Follow the steps in

          184
          • Procedure 37

            184
      • Procedure 37 Access the on-line error message analysis tool

        184
        • Procedure 37 Access the on-line error message analysis tool

          184
          • 1 Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following:

            184
            • 1 Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following:

              184
            • SHO The CLI prompts you for to enter the error code.

              184
          • 2 Enter the error code for which you want information: For example, enter: MNGMMI109

            184
            • 2 Enter the error code for which you want information: For example, enter: MNGMMI109

              184
            • Note: The letters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as they appear in the error message.

              184
              • Note: The letters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as they appear in the error message.

                184
              • The CLI prints the following related information about the message: <Syntax> - definition of the message syntax. Meaning - shows...

                184
      • The entire file of error descriptions is available as a readable text. It can be retrieved from the ICB to a PC for off-line reference. Follow the steps in

        185
        • The entire file of error descriptions is available as a readable text. It can be retrieved from the ICB to a PC for off-line reference. Follow the steps in

          185
          • Procedure 38

            185
      • Procedure 38 Retrieve the entire error message file to a PC

        185
        • Procedure 38 Retrieve the entire error message file to a PC

          185
          • 1 The entire file of error descriptions is a readable text file. From your PC’s desktop access FTP.

            185
            • 1 The entire file of error descriptions is a readable text file. From your PC’s desktop access FTP.

              185
          • 2 To download the entire file, enter the following path: a:gnr\errors.txt

            185
            • 2 To download the entire file, enter the following path: a:gnr\errors.txt

              185
      • The output of messages can be suppressed according to pre-defined criteria. This functionality enables a technician to focus on ...

        185
        • The output of messages can be suppressed according to pre-defined criteria. This functionality enables a technician to focus on ...

          185
      • The filtering criteria are as follows:

        185
        • The filtering criteria are as follows:

          185
        • . Severity of messages - only messages with the selected severity levels appear. Any combination is possible.

          185
          • . Severity of messages - only messages with the selected severity levels appear. Any combination is possible.

            185
            • . Severity of messages - only messages with the selected severity levels appear. Any combination is possible.

              185
          • . Firmware component - only messages with the selected firmware component appear. Any combination is possible.

            185
            • . Firmware component - only messages with the selected firmware component appear. Any combination is possible.

              185
          • . Detailing level:

            185
            • . Detailing level:

              185
            • - Low - the message appears without the <error text> part. The full description can be retrieved using the message analysis tool based on the error code.

              185
              • - Low - the message appears without the <error text> part. The full description can be retrieved using the message analysis tool based on the error code.

                185
                • - Low - the message appears without the <error text> part. The full description can be retrieved using the message analysis tool based on the error code.

                  185
              • - High - the full message appears.

                185
                • - High - the full message appears.

                  185
      • All filtering criteria can be defined separately for appearance on the CLI and for storage in error log files (that is, a selected group of messages can be defined to appear in the CLI, but not in the error log, or visa versa).

        185
        • All filtering criteria can be defined separately for appearance on the CLI and for storage in error log files (that is, a selected group of messages can be defined to appear in the CLI, but not in the error log, or visa versa).

          185
      • Follow the steps in

        185
        • Follow the steps in

          185
          • Procedure 39 on page 186

            185
      • Procedure 39 Configure error message filtering

        186
        • Procedure 39 Configure error message filtering

          186
          • 1 Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following: ERR The CLI displays command inputs in the following three sections:

            186
            • 1 Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following: ERR The CLI displays command inputs in the following three sections:

              186
            • . FORMAT

              186
              • . FORMAT

                186
                • . FORMAT

                  186
            • . CLI_SEVERITY_FILTER

              186
              • . CLI_SEVERITY_FILTER

                186
                • . CLI_SEVERITY_FILTER

                  186
            • . DISK_SEVERITY_FILTER

              186
              • . DISK_SEVERITY_FILTER

                186
                • . DISK_SEVERITY_FILTER

                  186
          • 2 You can edit the values as per normal CLI usage.

            186
            • 2 You can edit the values as per normal CLI usage.

              186
          • Note: If you use the second level login command, two more filter sections are available: CLI_FW_COMPONET_FILTER and DISK_FW_COMP...

            186
            • Note: If you use the second level login command, two more filter sections are available: CLI_FW_COMPONET_FILTER and DISK_FW_COMP...

              186
    • Advanced troubleshooting

      187
      • Advanced troubleshooting

        187
      • The ICB provides the following tools for technicians to troubleshoot and debug problems based on error messages:

        187
        • The ICB provides the following tools for technicians to troubleshoot and debug problems based on error messages:

          187
        • . Automatic trace back - the system prints an automatic trace back list of predefined error codes. This feature helps software designers solve errors.

          187
          • . Automatic trace back - the system prints an automatic trace back list of predefined error codes. This feature helps software designers solve errors.

            187
            • . Automatic trace back - the system prints an automatic trace back list of predefined error codes. This feature helps software designers solve errors.

              187
          • . Automatic E-mail notification - the system can send an E-mail notification containing a predefined list of error codes to the administrator, or other address.

            187
            • . Automatic E-mail notification - the system can send an E-mail notification containing a predefined list of error codes to the administrator, or other address.

              187
          • . Automatic card restart - ICB restarts can be performed for a predefined list of error codes. This feature enhances automatic recovery.

            187
            • . Automatic card restart - ICB restarts can be performed for a predefined list of error codes. This feature enhances automatic recovery.

              187
        • Note: All the actions defined above can be limited to a predefined number of occurrences, with a separate limit for each action.

          187
          • Note: All the actions defined above can be limited to a predefined number of occurrences, with a separate limit for each action.

            187
  • Backup and restore procedures

    187
    • Backup and restore procedures

      187
    • Files can be backed up and restored from either the CLI or the Administration BUI.

      187
      • Files can be backed up and restored from either the CLI or the Administration BUI.

        187
    • Backup

      187
      • Backup

        187
      • An administrator schedules the backup from the administration BUI.

        187
        • An administrator schedules the backup from the administration BUI.

          187
          • Table 49

            187
        • <TABLE>

          187
          • Table 49 Backup considerations

            187
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            187
            • <TABLE ROW>

              187
              • Item

                187
              • Description

                187
          • <TABLE BODY>

            187
            • <TABLE ROW>

              187
              • Content

                187
              • Specify which of the following items to backup (the default is never; that is, no backup; however, if another option is selected in the “Schedule” section the default contents is data only):

                187
                • . Data - configuration, brandline greeting, and scheduling data (future conferences).

                  187
                  • . Data - configuration, brandline greeting, and scheduling data (future conferences).

                    187
                    • . Data - configuration, brandline greeting, and scheduling data (future conferences).

                      187
                • . Reports - includes error logs.

                  187
                  • . Reports - includes error logs.

                    187
                    • . Reports - includes error logs.

                      187
                • . Customized greetings - greetings for future meetings. Note, because this item can reach a large file size, a technician may prefer to exclude it.

                  187
                  • . Customized greetings - greetings for future meetings. Note, because this item can reach a large file size, a technician may prefer to exclude it.

                    187
                    • . Customized greetings - greetings for future meetings. Note, because this item can reach a large file size, a technician may prefer to exclude it.

                      187
            • <TABLE ROW>

              187
              • Time

                187
              • The database can be backed up immediately, or scheduled as a daily, weekly or monthly backup. For scheduled backups, determine the:

                187
                • . hour of the backup (hours only, no minutes)

                  187
                  • . hour of the backup (hours only, no minutes)

                    187
                    • . hour of the backup (hours only, no minutes)

                      187
                • . day of the week, if weekly

                  187
                  • . day of the week, if weekly

                    187
                    • . day of the week, if weekly

                      187
                • . day of the month, if monthly (1-28 only)

                  187
                  • . day of the month, if monthly (1-28 only)

                    187
                    • . day of the month, if monthly (1-28 only)

                      187
            • <TABLE ROW>

              188
              • Destination

                188
              • Backup files to one of the following destinations:

                188
                • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card.

                  188
                  • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card.

                    188
                    • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card.

                      188
                • . A remote FTP server. The system compresses (zips) the backup files, before transferring them. Specify the server’s IP address,...

                  188
                  • . A remote FTP server. The system compresses (zips) the backup files, before transferring them. Specify the server’s IP address,...

                    188
                    • . A remote FTP server. The system compresses (zips) the backup files, before transferring them. Specify the server’s IP address,...

                      188
                • Note: The remote folder must be an existing folder in the remote server; if this path is not found, the system puts the backup file in the folder reached directly by FTP.

                  188
                  • Note: The remote folder must be an existing folder in the remote server; if this path is not found, the system puts the backup file in the folder reached directly by FTP.

                    188
                • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses (zips) the backup files before sending them. The E-mail address is the same one the system uses for other administration E-mails (for example, reports and aged conferences).

                  188
                  • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses (zips) the backup files before sending them. The E-mail address is the same one the system uses for other administration E-mails (for example, reports and aged conferences).

                    188
                    • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses (zips) the backup files before sending them. The E-mail address is the same one the system uses for other administration E-mails (for example, reports and aged conferences).

                      188
      • During the backup process the card remains operational. However, the system denies database changes and does not accept the following operations:

        188
        • During the backup process the card remains operational. However, the system denies database changes and does not accept the following operations:

          188
        • . setting up a new conference or modifying an existing conference (allows view only)

          188
          • . setting up a new conference or modifying an existing conference (allows view only)

            188
            • . setting up a new conference or modifying an existing conference (allows view only)

              188
          • . recording a custom greeting

            188
            • . recording a custom greeting

              188
          • . making configuration changes including users, always on meeting, and groups

            188
            • . making configuration changes including users, always on meeting, and groups

              188
      • Scheduled backup

        188
        • Scheduled backup

          188
        • Figure 83 shows the Scheduled Backup window accessed from the ICB Dashboard. For more information about the ICB Dashboard, see

          188
          • Figure 83 shows the Scheduled Backup window accessed from the ICB Dashboard. For more information about the ICB Dashboard, see

            188
            • Figure 83

              188
            • “ICB Dashboard” on page 107

              188
          • Figure 83 ICB Dashboard - Scheduled Backup window

            189
            • Figure 83 ICB Dashboard - Scheduled Backup window

              189
        • The administrator defines the time, destination and contents of the backup.

          189
          • The administrator defines the time, destination and contents of the backup.

            189
            • Table 50

              189
          • <TABLE>

            189
            • Table 50 Scheduled Backup parameters

              189
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              189
              • <TABLE ROW>

                189
                • Section

                  189
                • Description

                  189
            • <TABLE BODY>

              189
              • <TABLE ROW>

                189
                • Schedule

                  189
                • Click on an radio button to define the backup schedule as follows:

                  189
                  • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                    189
                    • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                      189
                      • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                        189
                  • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                    189
                    • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                      189
                      • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                        189
                  • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                    189
                    • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                      189
                      • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                        189
                  • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                    189
                    • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                      189
                      • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                        189
                  • The hour section is to the round hour (that is, hh:00), AM or PM.

                    189
              • <TABLE ROW>

                190
                • Destination

                  190
                • Click on an radio button to define the backup destination as follows:

                  190
                  • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                    190
                    • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                      190
                      • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                        190
                  • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                    190
                    • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                      190
                      • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                        190
                        • Figure 57 on page 114

                          190
                  • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                    190
                    • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                      190
                      • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                        190
              • <TABLE ROW>

                190
                • Contents

                  190
                • Click on one or more box as shown in the window to select the contents of the backup. Data is the default.

                  190
      • Manual Backup

        190
        • Manual Backup

          190
        • An administrator uses the window in

          190
          • An administrator uses the window in

            190
            • Figure 84

              190
          • Figure 84 ICB Dashboard - Manual Backup window

            190
            • Figure 84 ICB Dashboard - Manual Backup window

              190
        • The Destination and Contents sections are the same as for an automatic backup. Open a CLI window by clicking on the CLI button o...

          191
          • The Destination and Contents sections are the same as for an automatic backup. Open a CLI window by clicking on the CLI button o...

            191
          • Note: If the Do Backup button is clicked with no CLI window open, a pop-up message requests the administrator to open a CLI window.

            191
            • Note: If the Do Backup button is clicked with no CLI window open, a pop-up message requests the administrator to open a CLI window.

              191
      • Billing scheduled backup

        191
        • Billing scheduled backup

          191
        • An Administrator uses the window in

          191
          • An Administrator uses the window in

            191
            • Figure 85

              191
            • Table 51 on page 192

              191
          • Figure 85 Billing scheduled backup window

            191
            • Figure 85 Billing scheduled backup window

              191
        • <TABLE>

          192
          • <TABLE>

            192
            • Table 51 Billing Scheduled Backup parameters

              192
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              192
              • <TABLE ROW>

                192
                • Section

                  192
                • Description

                  192
            • <TABLE BODY>

              192
              • <TABLE ROW>

                192
                • Schedule

                  192
                • Click on an radio button to define the backup schedule as follows:

                  192
                  • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                    192
                    • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                      192
                      • . Daily - every day at the hour specified.

                        192
                  • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                    192
                    • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                      192
                      • . Weekly - once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.

                        192
                  • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                    192
                    • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                      192
                      • . Monthly - once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified hour.

                        192
                  • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                    192
                    • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                      192
                      • . Never - the system does not perform an automatic backup (the default).

                        192
                  • The hour section is to the round hour (that is, hh:00), AM or PM.

                    192
              • <TABLE ROW>

                192
                • Destination

                  192
                • Click on an radio button to define the backup destination as follows:

                  192
                  • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                    192
                    • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                      192
                      • . The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card (the default).

                        192
                  • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                    192
                    • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                      192
                      • . An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files, before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s E-mail address in the General Setting window (see

                        192
                        • Figure 57 on page 114

                          192
                  • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                    192
                    • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                      192
                      • . A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The...

                        192
      • View Backup History Log

        192
        • View Backup History Log

          192
        • The administrator can view a history log of past scheduled backups to make sure that the backups have taken place as scheduled. ...

          192
          • The administrator can view a history log of past scheduled backups to make sure that the backups have taken place as scheduled. ...

            192
      • View Last Backup Details

        192
        • View Last Backup Details

          192
        • The Last Backup Details view-only window prints out the details of the last backup attempt (either scheduled or manual). This is the same text that appears on the CLI during a backup.

          192
          • The Last Backup Details view-only window prints out the details of the last backup attempt (either scheduled or manual). This is the same text that appears on the CLI during a backup.

            192
    • Restore

      192
      • Restore

        192
      • Use

        192
        • Use

          192
          • Procedure 40 on page 193

            192
      • Procedure 40 Restore the database from the secondary PCMCIA

        193
        • Procedure 40 Restore the database from the secondary PCMCIA

          193
          • 1 Insert the PCMCIA device holding the backed-up database in the ICB card’s upper slot.

            193
            • 1 Insert the PCMCIA device holding the backed-up database in the ICB card’s upper slot.

              193
          • 2 Use the CLI REstordb command in the SMaint directory. The system prompts you for the source of the restore.

            193
            • 2 Use the CLI REstordb command in the SMaint directory. The system prompts you for the source of the restore.

              193
          • 3 Select upper socket and press the Enter key. The system restores the database.

            193
            • 3 Select upper socket and press the Enter key. The system restores the database.

              193
      • Use

        193
        • Use

          193
          • Procedure 41

            193
      • Procedure 41 Restore the database from a backed up ZIP file

        193
        • Procedure 41 Restore the database from a backed up ZIP file

          193
          • 1 Determine which backed-up ZIP files to restore.

            193
            • 1 Determine which backed-up ZIP files to restore.

              193
          • 2 Name this file on the file server ICBDATA.ZIP.

            193
            • 2 Name this file on the file server ICBDATA.ZIP.

              193
          • 3 Run the REstordb command with the parameter indicating this is a restore following an FTP download. The system prompts for the source.

            193
            • 3 Run the REstordb command with the parameter indicating this is a restore following an FTP download. The system prompts for the source.

              193
          • 4 Select FTP. The system prompts for the following parameters: IP address, path to file, login, and password.

            193
            • 4 Select FTP. The system prompts for the following parameters: IP address, path to file, login, and password.

              193
          • 5 Enter the information as appropriate and press the Enter key. The system restores the data.

            193
            • 5 Enter the information as appropriate and press the Enter key. The system restores the data.

              193
      • During the restore process the card disables itself and does not answer calls. It also does not accept changes from the BUI.

        193
        • During the restore process the card disables itself and does not answer calls. It also does not accept changes from the BUI.

          193
    • Backup and restore process log

      193
      • Backup and restore process log

        193
      • The backup process sends messages to the CLI window. The messages can be viewed while the process is running by accessing the CLI.

        193
        • The backup process sends messages to the CLI window. The messages can be viewed while the process is running by accessing the CLI.

          193
      • The system generates two files that contain information about the backup progress. The backup.log in the USER directory contains one line for each of the last backups, and restorations, up to a maximum of 20. Each line contains the following:

        194
        • The system generates two files that contain information about the backup progress. The backup.log in the USER directory contains one line for each of the last backups, and restorations, up to a maximum of 20. Each line contains the following:

          194
        • . a time stamp

          194
          • . a time stamp

            194
            • . a time stamp

              194
          • . whether it was a manual or scheduled backup to

            194
            • . whether it was a manual or scheduled backup to

              194
            • - disk or

              194
              • - disk or

                194
                • - disk or

                  194
              • - E-mail

                194
                • - E-mail

                  194
          • . whether it was a restoration and from which source

            194
            • . whether it was a restoration and from which source

              194
          • . whether it was successful or failed

            194
            • . whether it was successful or failed

              194
      • The LASTBKP.LOG file in the GNR directory provides a more detailed report. This file contains much of the information that the C...

        194
        • The LASTBKP.LOG file in the GNR directory provides a more detailed report. This file contains much of the information that the C...

          194
• Reports

  195
  • Reports

    195
  • Purpose

    195
    • Purpose

      195
    • This chapter describes the reports that the ICB can generate.

      195
      • This chapter describes the reports that the ICB can generate.

        195
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      195
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        195
      • . “Overview” on page 195 - introduces the types of reports the ICB can generate and describes where to view them.

        195
        • . “Overview” on page 195 - introduces the types of reports the ICB can generate and describes where to view them.

          195
          • . “Overview” on page 195 - introduces the types of reports the ICB can generate and describes where to view them.

            195
            • . “Overview” on page 195

              195
        • . “Short Connection Report” on page 197 - describes the Short Connection Report.

          195
          • . “Short Connection Report” on page 197 - describes the Short Connection Report.

            195
            • . “Short Connection Report” on page 197

              195
        • . “Meetings Log Report” on page 198 - describes the Meeting Logs Report.

          195
          • . “Meetings Log Report” on page 198 - describes the Meeting Logs Report.

            195
            • . “Meetings Log Report” on page 198

              195
        • . “Overbooking Report” on page 200 - describes the Overbooking Report.

          195
          • . “Overbooking Report” on page 200 - describes the Overbooking Report.

            195
            • . “Overbooking Report” on page 200

              195
        • . “Billing Report” on page 202 - shows how the ICB handles billing and describes the Billing Report.

          195
          • . “Billing Report” on page 202 - shows how the ICB handles billing and describes the Billing Report.

            195
            • . “Billing Report” on page 202

              195
        • . “Maintenance (Error) Report” on page 209 - describes the Maintenance (Error) Report.

          195
          • . “Maintenance (Error) Report” on page 209 - describes the Maintenance (Error) Report.

            195
            • . “Maintenance (Error) Report” on page 209

              195
  • Overview

    195
    • Overview

      195
    • ICB can be viewed reports from the following:

      195
      • ICB can be viewed reports from the following:

        195
      • . BUI - arranges report data as a table, in readable format, with column titles. The report can be copied to the local desktop as a raw format file. The report can be printed by using the browser’s print function.

        195
        • . BUI - arranges report data as a table, in readable format, with column titles. The report can be copied to the local desktop as a raw format file. The report can be printed by using the browser’s print function.

          195
          • . BUI - arranges report data as a table, in readable format, with column titles. The report can be copied to the local desktop as a raw format file. The report can be printed by using the browser’s print function.

            195
        • . CLI - provides direct access to Short Connection, Meetings Log, and Maintenance reports.

          195
          • . CLI - provides direct access to Short Connection, Meetings Log, and Maintenance reports.

            195
    • The ICB keeps the files for 128 days or less, depending on the definition of the general tab window from Microsoft Outlook.

      195
      • The ICB keeps the files for 128 days or less, depending on the definition of the general tab window from Microsoft Outlook.

        195
      • Note: Records related to dual-card meetings appear in the primary card only.

        195
        • Note: Records related to dual-card meetings appear in the primary card only.

          195
    • Table 52 describes the reports that the ICB generates.

      196
      • Table 52 describes the reports that the ICB generates.

        196
        • Table 52

          196
      • <TABLE>

        196
        • Table 52 Report summary

          196
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Report

              196
            • Purpose

              196
            • Raw Format

              196
            • Display

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • CLI

              196
            • BUI

              196
        • <TABLE BODY>

          196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Short Connection

              196
            • Detect faulty behavior (users are not serviced).

              196
            • not a file

              196
            • SMaint/ SCon

              196
            • Yes

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Meetings Log

              196
            • Conference activity log.

              196
            • structured text (see note)

              196
            • RGen/ MLog

              196
            • Yes

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Overbooking

              196
            • Track actual usage of ports.

              196
            • .CSV

              196
            • N/A

              196
            • Yes

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Billing

              196
            • Provide billing records.

              196
            • .CSV

              196
            • N/A

              196
            • Yes

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Maintenance (Error)

              196
            • Logs errors.

              196
            • text

              196
            • SMaint/ MReport

              196
            • Yes

              196
          • <TABLE ROW>

            196
            • Note: Text records have a fixed length of 1024 characters, padded with trailing spaces. The first record is binary.

              196
              • Note: Text records have a fixed length of 1024 characters, padded with trailing spaces. The first record is binary.

                196
                • Note: Text records have a fixed length of 1024 characters, padded with trailing spaces. The first record is binary.

                  196
    • BUI Report Viewer

      196
      • BUI Report Viewer

        196
      • An administrator can view reports from the BUI. Click on View a Report on the ICB Dashboard to access the Report Viewer window (see

        196
        • An administrator can view reports from the BUI. Click on View a Report on the ICB Dashboard to access the Report Viewer window (see

          196
          • Figure 86

            196
          • Procedure 42

            196
        • Figure 86 Report Viewer window

          196
          • Figure 86 Report Viewer window

            196
      • Procedure 42 Displaying reports

        196
        • Procedure 42 Displaying reports

          196
          • 1 Access the ICB Dashboard.

            196
            • 1 Access the ICB Dashboard.

              196
          • 2 Select Report Viewer.

            196
            • 2 Select Report Viewer.

              196
          • 3 Select the report type from the pull-down menu. Choices are Meeting Log, Error, Overbooking, Billing, and Short Connection.

            196
            • 3 Select the report type from the pull-down menu. Choices are Meeting Log, Error, Overbooking, Billing, and Short Connection.

              196
          • 4 There are two ways to select the date.

            197
            • 4 There are two ways to select the date.

              197
            • a Click on Previous Day or Next Day links. The requested report will be displayed.

              197
              • a Click on Previous Day or Next Day links. The requested report will be displayed.

                197
            • b Click the appropriate date from the drop down boxes. Then click the Display Report button. The requested report will be displayed.

              197
              • b Click the appropriate date from the drop down boxes. Then click the Display Report button. The requested report will be displayed.

                197
          • 5 The reports can be downloaded to the Administrator’s PC by clicking the Download button. The file downloads to the location defined in the local file selection dialog box of the Windows operating system.

            197
            • 5 The reports can be downloaded to the Administrator’s PC by clicking the Download button. The file downloads to the location defined in the local file selection dialog box of the Windows operating system.

              197
      • The following sections in this chapter show examples of the reports.

        197
        • The following sections in this chapter show examples of the reports.

          197
  • Short Connection Report

    197
    • Short Connection Report

      197
    • BUI Short Connection Report

      197
      • BUI Short Connection Report

        197
      • Figure 87 shows how the Short Connection Report looks when accessed from the BUI.

        197
        • Figure 87 shows how the Short Connection Report looks when accessed from the BUI.

          197
          • Figure 87

            197
        • Figure 87 Short Connection Report BUI example

          197
          • Figure 87 Short Connection Report BUI example

            197
      • The Short Connection Report always shows the current status; the date cannot be selected. The report displays the same text as what CLI displays after the SMaint/SCon/Print command. The window does not shows ports with all zero counters.

        197
        • The Short Connection Report always shows the current status; the date cannot be selected. The report displays the same text as what CLI displays after the SMaint/SCon/Print command. The window does not shows ports with all zero counters.

          197
      • The Reset Counters button sets all counters back to zero (similar to the CLI SMaint/SCon/Reset command).

        197
        • The Reset Counters button sets all counters back to zero (similar to the CLI SMaint/SCon/Reset command).

          197
    • CLI Short Connection Report

      197
      • CLI Short Connection Report

        197
      • Use the Short Connection Report menu to present or reset the short connection peg-count.

        197
        • Use the Short Connection Report menu to present or reset the short connection peg-count.

          197
      • To access the Short Connection Report menu, login as an administrator. Enter the System Maintenance command (sm, SM, or SMaint) and enter the Short Connection Report command (sc, SC, or SCon).

        197
        • To access the Short Connection Report menu, login as an administrator. Enter the System Maintenance command (sm, SM, or SMaint) and enter the Short Connection Report command (sc, SC, or SCon).

          197
      • Short port occupancy can indicate a fault condition on a port or can indicate that a user is dialing the incorrect DN. Set the short occupancy range in the System Attributes Editor menu, which can range from 0 to 30 seconds.

        198
        • Short port occupancy can indicate a fault condition on a port or can indicate that a user is dialing the incorrect DN. Set the short occupancy range in the System Attributes Editor menu, which can range from 0 to 30 seconds.

          198
      • From the Short Connection Report menu, the option is available to print (p) or reset (r) the counter to zero. When printing the short connection peg-count, the system presents all ports with a count in the following format:

        198
        • From the Short Connection Report menu, the option is available to print (p) or reset (r) the counter to zero. When printing the short connection peg-count, the system presents all ports with a count in the following format:

          198
      • port # today’s_count total_count

        198
        • port # today’s_count total_count

          198
      • The counts have the following meanings:

        198
        • The counts have the following meanings:

          198
        • . today’s count - count of short connections that occur this day.

          198
          • . today’s count - count of short connections that occur this day.

            198
            • . today’s count - count of short connections that occur this day.

              198
          • . total count - cumulative count of all short connections since the ICB was last reset, or the system reset the short connection counters.

            198
            • . total count - cumulative count of all short connections since the ICB was last reset, or the system reset the short connection counters.

              198
      • If all counters are zero, the system prints the header followed by the message “all counters are zero”.

        198
        • If all counters are zero, the system prints the header followed by the message “all counters are zero”.

          198
      • Short Connection Report CLI example

        198
        • Short Connection Report CLI example

          198
        • STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: sc

          198
          • STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: sc

            198
  • Meetings Log Report

    198
    • Meetings Log Report

      198
    • BUI Meetings Log Report

      198
      • BUI Meetings Log Report

        198
      • The BUI sorts the Meetings Log Report by DN. The BUI displays the report with events grouped by meeting. Therefore, the window shows a “Select DN” pull-down menu to enable the selection of the particular DN’s records to appear in the report.

        198
        • The BUI sorts the Meetings Log Report by DN. The BUI displays the report with events grouped by meeting. Therefore, the window shows a “Select DN” pull-down menu to enable the selection of the particular DN’s records to appear in the report.

          198
          • Figure 88 on page 199

            198
      • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

        199
        • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

          199
        • Figure 88 Meetings Log Report BUI example

          199
          • Figure 88 Meetings Log Report BUI example

            199
    • CLI Meetings Log Report

      199
      • CLI Meetings Log Report

        199
      • The CLI Meeting Log Browser menu displays a log of conference events for a specified date. After the system displays data, it re...

        199
        • The CLI Meeting Log Browser menu displays a log of conference events for a specified date. After the system displays data, it re...

          199
      • Each event report starts with the time stamp and the main DN in the following format:

        199
        • Each event report starts with the time stamp and the main DN in the following format:

          199
      • hours:minutes:seconds (DN) <description of event>

        199
        • hours:minutes:seconds (DN) <description of event>

          199
      • The date selected to display the conference log must be in the past.

        199
        • The date selected to display the conference log must be in the past.

          199
      • The system deletes old log files after exceeding the predefined report aging time. The system indicates if there are no log file...

        199
        • The system deletes old log files after exceeding the predefined report aging time. The system indicates if there are no log file...

          199
      • Meetings Log Report CLI example

        199
        • Meetings Log Report CLI example

          199
        • Log: ml

          199
          • Log: ml

            199
  • Overbooking Report

    200
    • Overbooking Report

      200
    • BUI Overbooking Report

      200
      • BUI Overbooking Report

        200
      • Figure 89 shows how the Overbooking Report appears when accessed from the BUI.

        200
        • Figure 89 shows how the Overbooking Report appears when accessed from the BUI.

          200
          • Figure 89

            200
        • Figure 89 Overbooking Report BUI example

          200
          • Figure 89 Overbooking Report BUI example

            200
      • The table in the report shows the contents of the Overbooking Report which the BUI translates from a .CSV file. The columns in the table are as follows:

        201
        • The table in the report shows the contents of the Overbooking Report which the BUI translates from a .CSV file. The columns in the table are as follows:

          201
        • . Hour - The hour of the day, from 0 to 23 where:

          201
          • . Hour - The hour of the day, from 0 to 23 where:

            201
            • . Hour - The hour of the day, from 0 to 23 where:

              201
            • - 00 = 0:00 o’clock to 1:00 o’clock

              201
              • - 00 = 0:00 o’clock to 1:00 o’clock

                201
                • - 00 = 0:00 o’clock to 1:00 o’clock

                  201
              • - 01 = 1:00 o’clock to 2:00 o’clock etc.

                201
                • - 01 = 1:00 o’clock to 2:00 o’clock etc.

                  201
          • . Max Ports - The maximum ports busy, by actual calls, during this hour.

            201
            • . Max Ports - The maximum ports busy, by actual calls, during this hour.

              201
          • . Duration: min:sec - The total duration in which all ports are busy during this hour. When the value is greater than 0, the val...

            201
            • . Duration: min:sec - The total duration in which all ports are busy during this hour. When the value is greater than 0, the val...

              201
      • There is one line in the table for each hour of the day, so this window does not require a Next Page button.

        201
        • There is one line in the table for each hour of the day, so this window does not require a Next Page button.

          201
    • Overbooking Report (.CSV)

      201
      • Overbooking Report (.CSV)

        201
      • The system generates the Overbooking Report on a daily basis. Each line of the over-booking report contains the following information:

        201
        • The system generates the Overbooking Report on a daily basis. Each line of the over-booking report contains the following information:

          201
        • . 1st field: hour (00-23)

          201
          • . 1st field: hour (00-23)

            201
            • . 1st field: hour (00-23)

              201
          • . 2nd field: maximum number of ports (00-32)

            201
            • . 2nd field: maximum number of ports (00-32)

              201
          • . 3rd field: duration in minutes (00-60)

            201
            • . 3rd field: duration in minutes (00-60)

              201
          • . 4th field: duration in seconds (00-59)

            201
            • . 4th field: duration in seconds (00-59)

              201
      • The total number of lines is 26. The first line is for the date, the second line is for the field names, and 24 lines are for every hour as follows:

        201
        • The total number of lines is 26. The first line is for the date, the second line is for the field names, and 24 lines are for every hour as follows:

          201
      • DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,, hour,max ports,duration minutes,duration seconds 00,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration second...

        201
        • DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,, hour,max ports,duration minutes,duration seconds 00,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration second...

          201
  • Billing Report

    202
    • Billing Report

      202
    • Introduction

      202
      • Introduction

        202
      • Users can be charged for conference reservations and dial-out calls during a conference. The system stores billing reports in da...

        202
        • Users can be charged for conference reservations and dial-out calls during a conference. The system stores billing reports in da...

          202
      • Billing charges are based on the following:

        202
        • Billing charges are based on the following:

          202
        • . The duration of the meeting, including any extension of the conference from either the BUI or by the chairperson using the *98 command from the keypad.

          202
          • . The duration of the meeting, including any extension of the conference from either the BUI or by the chairperson using the *98 command from the keypad.

            202
            • . The duration of the meeting, including any extension of the conference from either the BUI or by the chairperson using the *98 command from the keypad.

              202
          • . The number of ports booked for the meeting. The figure includes any increase in the number of ports during the conference from the BUI or a port increase provided automatically by the ICB.

            202
            • . The number of ports booked for the meeting. The figure includes any increase in the number of ports during the conference from the BUI or a port increase provided automatically by the ICB.

              202
        • Note: The system charges users for the number of ports booked for the conference. This charge does not depend on how many conferees participated in the meeting or the duration of each input call.

          202
          • Note: The system charges users for the number of ports booked for the conference. This charge does not depend on how many conferees participated in the meeting or the duration of each input call.

            202
      • BUI configuration

        202
        • BUI configuration

          202
        • The Billing Account ID for every user must be defined through the ICB Dashboard (see

          202
          • The Billing Account ID for every user must be defined through the ICB Dashboard (see

            202
            • “Users List” on page 117

              202
        • The following options are available for generating billing reports (see

          202
          • The following options are available for generating billing reports (see

            202
            • “General Settings window” on page 108

              202
          • . No billing - the system does not generate billing reports.

            202
            • . No billing - the system does not generate billing reports.

              202
              • . No billing - the system does not generate billing reports.

                202
            • . Billing Reports - the system generates billing reports.

              202
              • . Billing Reports - the system generates billing reports.

                202
            • . Billing Reports & CDR - the system generates billing reports and Call Detail Records. This option is only available on the CS 1000.

              202
              • . Billing Reports & CDR - the system generates billing reports and Call Detail Records. This option is only available on the CS 1000.

                202
    • BUI Billing Report

      203
      • BUI Billing Report

        203
      • Figure 90 shows how the Billing Report appears when accessed from the BUI. The table in the window shows the contents of the Billing Report which the BUI translates from the .CSV file.

        203
        • Figure 90 shows how the Billing Report appears when accessed from the BUI. The table in the window shows the contents of the Billing Report which the BUI translates from the .CSV file.

          203
          • Figure 90

            203
        • Figure 90 Billing Report BUI example

          203
          • Figure 90 Billing Report BUI example

            203
      • The “Event” field values appear as code numbers in the .CSV file. In the BUI, the system displays them as event names.

        203
        • The “Event” field values appear as code numbers in the .CSV file. In the BUI, the system displays them as event names.

          203
      • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

        203
        • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

          203
    • Billing Report (.CSV)

      203
      • Billing Report (.CSV)

        203
      • The system saves ICB Billing Reports automatically in files on a daily basis. These files use the a:\OAM\BILLING directory on the PCMCIA for the period defined by the report aging feature. The default period is 32 days.

        203
        • The system saves ICB Billing Reports automatically in files on a daily basis. These files use the a:\OAM\BILLING directory on the PCMCIA for the period defined by the report aging feature. The default period is 32 days.

          203
      • The file’s names consist of capital letter “B” and the date of the report (year, month and day) in the following format: Byyymmdd and have the extension CSV, where:

        203
        • The file’s names consist of capital letter “B” and the date of the report (year, month and day) in the following format: Byyymmdd and have the extension CSV, where:

          203
        • . yyy - indicates the year (for example, “099” for 1999, “100” for 2000, “101” for 2001).

          203
          • . yyy - indicates the year (for example, “099” for 1999, “100” for 2000, “101” for 2001).

            203
            • . yyy - indicates the year (for example, “099” for 1999, “100” for 2000, “101” for 2001).

              203
          • . mm - indicates the month

            203
            • . mm - indicates the month

              203
          • . dd - indicates the day

            203
            • . dd - indicates the day

              203
      • For example, B0990720.CSV has the Billing Report for July 20, 1999 and B1010203.CSV contains the Billing Report for February 03, 2001.

        204
        • For example, B0990720.CSV has the Billing Report for July 20, 1999 and B1010203.CSV contains the Billing Report for February 03, 2001.

          204
        • Note: To retrieve billing files, transfer the files by FTP over the TCP/IP LAN using a fixed password.

          204
          • Note: To retrieve billing files, transfer the files by FTP over the TCP/IP LAN using a fixed password.

            204
      • Each Billing Report consists of 14 fields separated by commas.

        204
        • Each Billing Report consists of 14 fields separated by commas.

          204
          • Table 53

            204
        • <TABLE>

          204
          • Table 53 Billing Report contents

            204
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • Field

                204
              • Contents

                204
          • <TABLE BODY>

            204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 1st

                204
              • Time stamp in hours (00-23).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 2nd

                204
              • Time stamp in minutes (00-59).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 3rd

                204
              • Time stamp in seconds (00-59).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 4th

                204
              • Event as follows:

                204
                • 1 Meeting booked

                  204
                  • 1 Meeting booked

                    204
                    • 1 Meeting booked

                      204
                • 2 Meeting modified

                  204
                  • 2 Meeting modified

                    204
                    • 2 Meeting modified

                      204
                • 3 Meeting start

                  204
                  • 3 Meeting start

                    204
                    • 3 Meeting start

                      204
                  • 4 Active meeting modified

                    204
                    • 4 Active meeting modified

                      204
                  • 5 Meeting cancelled before being started

                    204
                    • 5 Meeting cancelled before being started

                      204
                  • 6 Active meeting cancelled (after being started)

                    204
                    • 6 Active meeting cancelled (after being started)

                      204
                  • 7 Meeting schedule time has ended

                    204
                    • 7 Meeting schedule time has ended

                      204
                  • 8 Card restart

                    204
                    • 8 Card restart

                      204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 5th

                204
              • Card ID (up to a four-digit number).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 6th

                204
              • Meeting ID (up to a 10-digit number).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 7th

                204
              • Billing account (up to a nine-digit number).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 8th

                204
              • User ID.

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 9th

                204
              • Meeting date.

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 10th

                204
              • Meeting start time in hours (00-23).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 11th

                204
              • Meeting start time in minutes (00-59).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 12th

                204
              • Meeting start time in seconds (00-59).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 13th

                204
              • Duration in hours (01-12).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              204
              • 14th

                204
              • Duration in minutes (00-59).

                204
            • <TABLE ROW>

              205
              • 15th

                205
              • Ports scheduled (02-40).

                205
            • <TABLE ROW>

              205
              • 16th

                205
              • Ports used (02-40).

                205
        • Note: For a permanent bridge the meeting date, start time, and duration fields are irrelevant and always appear as zero. The first line is for the date, the second line is for the field names, and all other lines are for the events.

          205
          • Note: For a permanent bridge the meeting date, start time, and duration fields are irrelevant and always appear as zero. The first line is for the date, the second line is for the field names, and all other lines are for the events.

            205
      • The daily billing report format is as follows:

        205
        • The daily billing report format is as follows:

          205
      • DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,,,,,,,,,,,, <1st field name>, <2nd field name>,.....,<14th field name> <1st field>,<2nd field>,....,...

        205
        • DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,,,,,,,,,,,, <1st field name>, <2nd field name>,.....,<14th field name> <1st field>,<2nd field>,....,...

          205
      • BIlling Report .CSV example

        205
        • BIlling Report .CSV example

          205
        • In this example, the meeting ID is 32, user billing account is 999, and card ID is 7.

          205
          • In this example, the meeting ID is 32, user billing account is 999, and card ID is 7.

            205
        • First line - at 8am meeting has been booked to start on Aug 8 1998 at 10:30am, duration of 02:15, 6 ports. Second line - at 9am ...

          205
          • First line - at 8am meeting has been booked to start on Aug 8 1998 at 10:30am, duration of 02:15, 6 ports. Second line - at 9am ...

            205
        • A billing file includes the following records:

          206
          • A billing file includes the following records:

            206
          • . Date stamp, for example: DATE: Aug 7 1998

            206
            • . Date stamp, for example: DATE: Aug 7 1998

              206
              • . Date stamp, for example: DATE: Aug 7 1998

                206
            • . Header: time stamp hours, time stamp minutes, time stamp seconds, event, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, date, start time hours, start time minutes, start time seconds, duration hours, duration minutes, and ports

              206
              • . Header: time stamp hours, time stamp minutes, time stamp seconds, event, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, date, start time hours, start time minutes, start time seconds, duration hours, duration minutes, and ports

                206
            • . Billing event record

              206
              • . Billing event record

                206
        • Table 54 shows example billing records for all events. The card ID is 1234 and the user’s billing account is 999.

          206
          • Table 54 shows example billing records for all events. The card ID is 1234 and the user’s billing account is 999.

            206
            • Table 54

              206
          • <TABLE>

            206
            • Table 54 Event examples

              206
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • Example

                  206
                • Description

                  206
            • <TABLE BODY>

              206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • Meeting Booked - In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start time, duration, and ports information was available.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • 08,00,00,01,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8 2004,10,30,00,02,15,06

                  206
                • This record indicates that the meeting has been booked at 8 am, the user’s name is Barry, to start on August 8, 2004 at 10:30 am, duration 2 hours 15 minutes, with 6 ports.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • Meeting Modified - In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start time, duration, and ports information was available.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • 09,00,00,02,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8 2004,10,30,00,02,15,08

                  206
                • This record indicates that a BUI user (Barry) changed the meeting to include eight ports at 9 am, before the meeting began.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • Meeting Started - In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start time, duration, and ports information was available.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • 10,28,00,03,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8 2004,10,30,00,02,15,08

                  206
                • This record indicates that the meeting started at 10:28 am.

                  206
                  • Note: The meeting’s start time is 10:28 am and not 10:30 am as scheduled. Meetings always start two minutes before the scheduled start time to guarantee timely entry of users.

                    206
                    • Note: The meeting’s start time is 10:28 am and not 10:30 am as scheduled. Meetings always start two minutes before the scheduled start time to guarantee timely entry of users.

                      206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • Active Meeting Modified - In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, duration, and ports information was available.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                206
                • 11,00,00,04,1234,7,999,Barry,03,00,08

                  206
                • This record indicates that at 11 am a user (Barry) expanded the duration of the active meeting to three hours. The original duration was 2 hours 15 minutes.

                  206
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • Meeting Ended - In these examples, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account information, and user ID was available. Examples report this event for three different cases:

                  207
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • The meeting was cancelled before it began.

                  207
                • This record indicates that a user (Barry) cancelled the meeting reservation at 10:05 am from the BUI, before the scheduled start...

                  207
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • The active meeting was cancelled after it began.

                  207
                • This record indicates that the meeting ended at 12:48 pm from the BUI, before the scheduled meeting time elapsed. There were 6 p...

                  207
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • The meeting’s scheduled time elapsed.

                  207
                • This record indicates that the meeting ended at 01:28 pm, because the scheduled time elapsed. There were 10 ports booked for thi...

                  207
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • Card Restarted - In this example, the time stamp, and card ID information was available.

                  207
              • <TABLE ROW>

                207
                • 16,08,30,08,1234,

                  207
                • This record indicates that there was a card restart at 16:08:30. The event ID appears in bold letters. 1234 is the card’s ID, 7 is the meeting’s ID, and 999 is the customer’s billing ID.

                  207
    • CS 1000 Call Detail Recording

      207
      • CS 1000 Call Detail Recording

        207
      • The Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature enables the ICB to charge users for out-going calls based on CDR reports the CS 1000 sys...

        207
        • The Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature enables the ICB to charge users for out-going calls based on CDR reports the CS 1000 sys...

          207
        • Note: CDR is not available on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

          207
          • Note: CDR is not available on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.

            207
      • To enable the CDR feature, select “Billing and CDR Reports” from the Billing options pull-down menu in the ICB Dashboard - General Settings window (see

        207
        • To enable the CDR feature, select “Billing and CDR Reports” from the Billing options pull-down menu in the ICB Dashboard - General Settings window (see

          207
          • Figure 53 on page 108

            207
      • Charge Account feature

        208
        • Charge Account feature

          208
        • To define the CDR with Charge Account feature, refer to CS 1000 Call Detail Recording and CS 1000 Features and Services.

          208
          • To define the CDR with Charge Account feature, refer to CS 1000 Call Detail Recording and CS 1000 Features and Services.

            208
        • When a user dials out with the Billing and CDR Reports option selected, the ICB card takes the Charge Account key (consisting of...

          208
          • When a user dials out with the Billing and CDR Reports option selected, the ICB card takes the Charge Account key (consisting of...

            208
      • The Charge Account key

        208
        • The Charge Account key

          208
        • In the CS 1000, the Charge Account key for every port of the ICB card must be defined in LD 11 (see

          208
          • In the CS 1000, the Charge Account key for every port of the ICB card must be defined in LD 11 (see

            208
            • Table 55

              208
          • <TABLE>

            208
            • Table 55 LD 11 - Define the Charge Account key for an ICB port

              208
            • <TABLE HEADING>

              208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • Prompt

                  208
                • Response

                  208
            • <TABLE BODY>

              208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • REQ

                  208
                • chg

                  208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • TYPE

                  208
                • 4 0 2 0

                  208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • TYPE

                  208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • TN

                  208
                • 4 0 2 0

                  208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • ECHG

                  208
                • yes

                  208
              • <TABLE ROW>

                208
                • ITEM

                  208
                • key 9 chg

                  208
      • CDR record format

        208
        • CDR record format

          208
        • CDR records are printed on CS 1000 system TTY terminal defined as a CDR user. When defining the CDR with Charge Account feature, the Charge Account data is included in CDR records for each ICB outgoing call, as in the following examples:

          208
          • CDR records are printed on CS 1000 system TTY terminal defined as a CDR user. When defining the CDR with Charge Account feature, the Charge Account data is included in CDR records for each ICB outgoing call, as in the following examples:

            208
        • 1. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is started:

          208
          • 1. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is started:

            208
        • C 040 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.25 00000099912340000000007

          208
          • C 040 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.25 00000099912340000000007

            208
        • & 0000 0000

          208
          • & 0000 0000

            208
        • where:

          208
          • where:

            208
        • first 9 digits: 000000999 is the billing account, next 4 digits: 1234 is the card ID, next 10 digits: 0000000007 is the meeting ID.

          208
          • first 9 digits: 000000999 is the billing account, next 4 digits: 1234 is the card ID, next 10 digits: 0000000007 is the meeting ID.

            208
        • 2. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is ended:

          208
          • 2. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is ended:

            208
        • N 041 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.47 00:22:08 A 333

          208
          • N 041 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.47 00:22:08 A 333

            208
        • & 0000 0000

          208
          • & 0000 0000

            208
    • CDR example scenarios

      209
      • CDR example scenarios

        209
      • The conference call was booked using the BUI by a user whose billing account is 9134513, on July 19, 1999 at 06:15 p.m., for July 20, 1999 from 08:00 a.m. to 09:00 a.m. The number of ports booked is six.

        209
        • The conference call was booked using the BUI by a user whose billing account is 9134513, on July 19, 1999 at 06:15 p.m., for July 20, 1999 from 08:00 a.m. to 09:00 a.m. The number of ports booked is six.

          209
      • The conference call was started as scheduled on July 20, 1999 two minutes before 08:30 a.m. During the call at 08:36 a.m. (after...

        209
        • The conference call was started as scheduled on July 20, 1999 two minutes before 08:30 a.m. During the call at 08:36 a.m. (after...

          209
      • C 040 00 5211 T095019 20/07 08:36 00913451312340000000007 & 0000 0000 N 041 00 5211 T095019 20/07 09:23 00:47:08 A 333 & 0000 0000

        209
        • C 040 00 5211 T095019 20/07 08:36 00913451312340000000007 & 0000 0000 N 041 00 5211 T095019 20/07 09:23 00:47:08 A 333 & 0000 0000

          209
      • At 08:55 a.m. the chairperson calls out to a long distance number and after two minutes returns to the meeting without the dialed party. The following record appears in the CS 1000 CDR:

        209
        • At 08:55 a.m. the chairperson calls out to a long distance number and after two minutes returns to the meeting without the dialed party. The following record appears in the CS 1000 CDR:

          209
      • C 040 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:55 00913451312340000000007 & 0000 0000 N 041 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:57 00:02:12 A 333| & 0000 0000

        209
        • C 040 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:55 00913451312340000000007 & 0000 0000 N 041 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:57 00:02:12 A 333| & 0000 0000

          209
  • Maintenance (Error) Report

    209
    • Maintenance (Error) Report

      209
    • BUI Maintenance (Error) Report

      209
      • BUI Maintenance (Error) Report

        209
      • Figure 91 shows how the BUI Maintenance Report.

        209
        • Figure 91 shows how the BUI Maintenance Report.

          209
          • Figure 91

            209
        • Figure 91 Maintenance (Error) Report BUI example

          209
          • Figure 91 Maintenance (Error) Report BUI example

            209
      • The Maintenance (Error) Report appears in the table in this window. The window shows the same text lines as those generated by the CLI SMaint/MReport command.

        210
        • The Maintenance (Error) Report appears in the table in this window. The window shows the same text lines as those generated by the CLI SMaint/MReport command.

          210
      • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

        210
        • If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button to display more information.

          210
      • For more information about how the ICB handles error reporting, see

        210
        • For more information about how the ICB handles error reporting, see

          210
          • “Error message handling” on page 183

            210
    • CLI Maintenance (Error) Report

      210
      • CLI Maintenance (Error) Report

        210
      • The Maintenance Report Browser menu enables maintenance reports to be displayed according to date. These reports analyze system ...

        210
        • The Maintenance Report Browser menu enables maintenance reports to be displayed according to date. These reports analyze system ...

          210
      • All reports are time stamped and contain information about the cause of the problem. After the system displays the data, it returns to the “year-month-day” prompt using the last selected date as default.

        210
        • All reports are time stamped and contain information about the cause of the problem. After the system displays the data, it returns to the “year-month-day” prompt using the last selected date as default.

          210
      • The selected date must be in the past. The system discards old files that exceed the report aging number of days. If the date en...

        210
        • The selected date must be in the past. The system discards old files that exceed the report aging number of days. If the date en...

          210
      • The maintenance reports have the following format:

        210
        • The maintenance reports have the following format:

          210
      • <serial number>: <MON_REPORT_ID> <channel #> <time> <Applic_Manager_cycle> <Message Body>

        210
        • <serial number>: <MON_REPORT_ID> <channel #> <time> <Applic_Manager_cycle> <Message Body>

          210
      • Maintenance Report (Error) CLI example

        210
        • Maintenance Report (Error) CLI example

          210
        • The following example displays the maintenance report for March 15, 1996:

          210
          • The following example displays the maintenance report for March 15, 1996:

            210
        • STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: mr year(1996): 1996 month (11): 03 day (22): 15 1234:timer101 ch01 16:16:...

          210
          • STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: mr year(1996): 1996 month (11): 03 day (22): 15 1234:timer101 ch01 16:16:...

            210
• Upgrades

  211
  • Upgrades

    211
  • Purpose

    211
    • Purpose

      211
    • This chapter provides procedures for upgrading your system to ICB Release 4 from previous releases and for upgrading sub-issues of ICB Release 4. The chapter contains the following sections:

      211
      • This chapter provides procedures for upgrading your system to ICB Release 4 from previous releases and for upgrading sub-issues of ICB Release 4. The chapter contains the following sections:

        211
      • . “Overview” on page 211 - introduces the ICB upgrade strategy.

        211
        • . “Overview” on page 211 - introduces the ICB upgrade strategy.

          211
          • . “Overview” on page 211 - introduces the ICB upgrade strategy.

            211
            • . “Overview” on page 211

              211
        • . “Planning for an upgrade” on page 214 - provides information to help prepare for an upgrade.

          211
          • . “Planning for an upgrade” on page 214 - provides information to help prepare for an upgrade.

            211
            • . “Planning for an upgrade” on page 214

              211
        • . “Upgrade procedures” on page 215 - provides system upgrade procedures.

          211
          • . “Upgrade procedures” on page 215 - provides system upgrade procedures.

            211
            • . “Upgrade procedures” on page 215

              211
  • Overview

    211
    • Overview

      211
    • The ICB Release 4 can be upgraded from MICB Release 2 and MICB Release 3, but not from MICB Release 1. A new board and a new fla...

      211
      • The ICB Release 4 can be upgraded from MICB Release 2 and MICB Release 3, but not from MICB Release 1. A new board and a new fla...

        211
        • Table 56

          211
      • <TABLE>

        211
        • Table 56 ICB upgrade paths

          211
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • From ...

              211
            • To ...

              211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • Firmware

              211
            • Card

              211
            • Firmware

              211
            • Card

              211
            • Data conversion

              211
        • <TABLE BODY>

          211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • MICB Release 1

              211
            • NT5D51AA

              211
            • ICB Release 4

              211
            • NT5D51BC

              211
            • No

              211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • MICB Release 1

              211
            • NT5D51AB

              211
            • ICB Release 4

              211
            • NT5D51BC

              211
            • No

              211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • MICB Release 2

              211
            • NT5D51AB

              211
            • ICB Release 4

              211
            • NT5D51BC

              211
            • Yes

              211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            211
            • MICB Release 2

              211
            • NT5D51AB

              211
            • ICB Release 4

              211
            • NT5D51BC

              211
            • Yes

              211
          • <TABLE ROW>

            212
            • MICB Release 3

              212
            • NT5D51AC

              212
            • ICB Release 4

              212
            • NT5D51BC

              212
            • Yes

              212
          • <TABLE ROW>

            212
            • ICB Release 4

              212
            • NT5D51AC

              212
            • ICB Release 4

              212
            • NT5D51BC

              212
            • Yes

              212
      • Note: There is an upgrade from MICB Release 1 to ICB Release 4 but data conversion is not supported. This is the same as a new installation.

        212
        • Note: There is an upgrade from MICB Release 1 to ICB Release 4 but data conversion is not supported. This is the same as a new installation.

          212
    • Insert a PCMCIA card into the top PCMCIA slot accessible through the ICB faceplate for external memory expansion, new voice anno...

      212
      • Insert a PCMCIA card into the top PCMCIA slot accessible through the ICB faceplate for external memory expansion, new voice anno...

        212
    • The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards store ICB voice prompts and firmware code. The ICB ships with the P...

      212
      • The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards store ICB voice prompts and firmware code. The ICB ships with the P...

        212
        • Figure 92 on page 213

          212
    • Figure 92 Installing a PCMCIA card into the ICB faceplate slot

      213
      • Figure 92 Installing a PCMCIA card into the ICB faceplate slot

        213
        • Figure 92 Installing a PCMCIA card into the ICB faceplate slot

          213
    • Keycode security

      213
      • Keycode security

        213
      • A keycode protects against unauthorized ICB feature use. The keycode restricts upgrades of either the number of ports or applica...

        213
        • A keycode protects against unauthorized ICB feature use. The keycode restricts upgrades of either the number of ports or applica...

          213
      • Keycodes are required for the following upgrades:

        213
        • Keycodes are required for the following upgrades:

          213
        • . feature enhancements

          213
          • . feature enhancements

            213
            • . feature enhancements

              213
          • . new applications

            213
            • . new applications

              213
          • . port additions

            213
            • . port additions

              213
      • Keycodes are not required for the following:

        214
        • Keycodes are not required for the following:

          214
        • . backup and restore operations

          214
          • . backup and restore operations

            214
            • . backup and restore operations

              214
          • . application patching/bug fix

            214
            • . application patching/bug fix

              214
      • Nortel Networks provides the customer with a keycode to enable installation of any required upgrade. Enter the keycode using the...

        214
        • Nortel Networks provides the customer with a keycode to enable installation of any required upgrade. Enter the keycode using the...

          214
  • Planning for an upgrade

    214
    • Planning for an upgrade

      214
    • When preparing for an upgrade, consider the following items:

      214
      • When preparing for an upgrade, consider the following items:

        214
      • . Always back up the site data, before beginning an upgrade.

        214
        • . Always back up the site data, before beginning an upgrade.

          214
          • . Always back up the site data, before beginning an upgrade.

            214
        • . Upgrades from any release require new hardware.

          214
          • . Upgrades from any release require new hardware.

            214
        • . When adding the Microsoft Outlook GUI functionality, the ICB Administrator must coordinate with the Microsoft Outlook Administrator. Also, the user community needs to be informed.

          214
          • . When adding the Microsoft Outlook GUI functionality, the ICB Administrator must coordinate with the Microsoft Outlook Administrator. Also, the user community needs to be informed.

            214
    • Managing the user community during an upgrade

      214
      • Managing the user community during an upgrade

        214
      • An important part of planning an upgrade is managing the user community.

        214
        • An important part of planning an upgrade is managing the user community.

          214
          • Table 57

            214
        • <TABLE>

          214
          • Table 57 User community upgrade considerations

            214
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            214
            • <TABLE ROW>

              214
              • Item

                214
              • Description

                214
          • <TABLE BODY>

            214
            • <TABLE ROW>

              214
              • BUI access

                214
              • Users need to know how to reset their browser to access the ICB and when to do that. This is required because the address they previously used in the browser to access ICB had an extension of ICB.htm. Users need to remove the extension.

                214
            • <TABLE ROW>

              215
              • User training

                215
              • Provide users with the ICB Release 4 User Guide and information about the following:

                215
                • . Custom greeting.

                  215
                  • . Custom greeting.

                    215
                    • . Custom greeting.

                      215
                  • . How to access and use chairperson control.

                    215
                    • . How to access and use chairperson control.

                      215
                  • . How to delegate chairperson control (that is, acquire and release chairperson control).

                    215
                    • . How to delegate chairperson control (that is, acquire and release chairperson control).

                      215
                  • . Volume control. How to use the feature from the TUI or the BUI control screen.

                    215
                    • . Volume control. How to use the feature from the TUI or the BUI control screen.

                      215
                  • . If single DN access is to be implemented, the changes to existing conferences (that is, already booked) and future meetings need to be communicated to the users.

                    215
                    • . If single DN access is to be implemented, the changes to existing conferences (that is, already booked) and future meetings need to be communicated to the users.

                      215
                  • . Microsoft Outlook

                    215
                    • . Microsoft Outlook

                      215
            • <TABLE ROW>

              215
              • E-Mail format

                215
              • Changes to the E-Mail format should be reviewed and made visible to people who will be creating meetings.

                215
  • Upgrade procedures

    215
    • Upgrade procedures

      215
    • MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade

      215
      • MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade

        215
      • Use

        215
        • Use

          215
          • Procedure 43

            215
      • Procedure 43 MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade

        215
        • Procedure 43 MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade

          215
          • 1 Disable the operational MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card using LD 32.

            215
            • 1 Disable the operational MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card using LD 32.

              215
            • Note: CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 customers must Bsy the ICB card at the PM level, before starting the procedure and RTS the card once the upgrade is complete.

              215
              • Note: CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 customers must Bsy the ICB card at the PM level, before starting the procedure and RTS the card once the upgrade is complete.

                215
          • 2 Pull the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card out from the slot.

            215
            • 2 Pull the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card out from the slot.

              215
          • 3 Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the lower socket.

            215
            • 3 Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the lower socket.

              215
          • 4 Insert a new ICB Release 4 PCMCIA in the lower socket of the new ICB Release 4 card (vintage BC). This PCMCIA should be as shipped from the factory, with no customer data on it.

            215
            • 4 Insert a new ICB Release 4 PCMCIA in the lower socket of the new ICB Release 4 card (vintage BC). This PCMCIA should be as shipped from the factory, with no customer data on it.

              215
          • 5 Remove the security device from the old card and move it to the new ICB Release 4 card.

            215
            • 5 Remove the security device from the old card and move it to the new ICB Release 4 card.

              215
          • 6 Insert the new ICB Release 4 (vintage BC) into the slot.

            215
            • 6 Insert the new ICB Release 4 (vintage BC) into the slot.

              215
          • 7 Enter the new keycode.

            215
            • 7 Enter the new keycode.

              215
          • 8 When the card is activated as ICB Release 4, enter the CLI and login as an administrator. Enter: name: admin Password: <CR> Where CR is an empty password.

            216
            • 8 When the card is activated as ICB Release 4, enter the CLI and login as an administrator. Enter: name: admin Password: <CR> Where CR is an empty password.

              216
          • 9 Insert the old MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA in the upper socket.

            216
            • 9 Insert the old MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA in the upper socket.

              216
          • 10 From the CLI enter: SMaint and then convert The ICB copies the data from the upper PCMCIA, converts to ICB Release 4 format, and stores it in the lower PCMCIA.

            216
            • 10 From the CLI enter: SMaint and then convert The ICB copies the data from the upper PCMCIA, converts to ICB Release 4 format, and stores it in the lower PCMCIA.

              216
            • Note: If the conversion is done from a dual MICB Release 2 (which uses a PC server), the system does not copy “administrator” users. Instead the system creates one default administrator, “admin” with a password of “000000”.

              216
              • Note: If the conversion is done from a dual MICB Release 2 (which uses a PC server), the system does not copy “administrator” users. Instead the system creates one default administrator, “admin” with a password of “000000”.

                216
          • 11 Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the upper socket. Nortel Networks recommends that you keep it, in case the customer wants to revert back to MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3.

            216
            • 11 Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the upper socket. Nortel Networks recommends that you keep it, in case the customer wants to revert back to MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3.

              216
          • 12 You can now enter the administration BUI to review or modify parameters and options.

            216
            • 12 You can now enter the administration BUI to review or modify parameters and options.

              216
          • 13 Enable the card in LD 32.

            216
            • 13 Enable the card in LD 32.

              216
    • Port Upgrade

      216
      • Port Upgrade

        216
      • The ICB card can be configured to have port sizes ranging from 12 to 62; however, systems requiring more than 32 ports require a...

        216
        • The ICB card can be configured to have port sizes ranging from 12 to 62; however, systems requiring more than 32 ports require a...

          216
          • Figure 93 on page 217

            216
        • Note: The CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 only supports 32- and 64-port ICB cards. This procedure is not supported for CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 customers.

          216
          • Note: The CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 only supports 32- and 64-port ICB cards. This procedure is not supported for CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 customers.

            216
        • Figure 93 ICB Dashboard - Card Upgrade window

          217
          • Figure 93 ICB Dashboard - Card Upgrade window

            217
      • A ports upgrade is purchased from Nortel Networks, it comes with a new keycode for the card. Follow the steps in

        217
        • A ports upgrade is purchased from Nortel Networks, it comes with a new keycode for the card. Follow the steps in

          217
          • Procedure 44

            217
      • Procedure 44 Upgrade ports from the administrator’s ICB Dashboard

        217
        • Procedure 44 Upgrade ports from the administrator’s ICB Dashboard

          217
          • 1 From the pull-down menu, select the new number of ports in the combo-box. The current number of ports appears as view-only above this box.

            217
            • 1 From the pull-down menu, select the new number of ports in the combo-box. The current number of ports appears as view-only above this box.

              217
          • 2 Enter the keycode. The keycode is 24 digits. To simplify input, the system divides the keycode into three sets of eight digits each. The system displays the input characters as they are entered.

            217
            • 2 Enter the keycode. The keycode is 24 digits. To simplify input, the system divides the keycode into three sets of eight digits each. The system displays the input characters as they are entered.

              217
          • 3 Click on the Submit button. The system submits the change only if the keycode entry is correct. If the entry is incorrect, the...

            217
            • 3 Click on the Submit button. The system submits the change only if the keycode entry is correct. If the entry is incorrect, the...

              217
            • Note: Ports must be configured in the switch in order for them to be operational.

              217
              • Note: Ports must be configured in the switch in order for them to be operational.

                217
    • Firmware Upgrade

      217
      • Firmware Upgrade

        217
      • Upgrade the ICB Release 4 firmware from the following two sources:

        217
        • Upgrade the ICB Release 4 firmware from the following two sources:

          217
        • . the secondary PCMCIA device

          217
          • . the secondary PCMCIA device

            217
            • . the secondary PCMCIA device

              217
          • . a remote FTP server

            217
            • . a remote FTP server

              217
      • Use a BUI administration window for the upgrade process, which supports both options (see

        218
        • Use a BUI administration window for the upgrade process, which supports both options (see

          218
          • Figure 94

            218
          • Procedure 45

            218
      • Procedure 45 Upgrade the ICB firmware version

        218
        • Procedure 45 Upgrade the ICB firmware version

          218
          • 1 Log into the BUI.

            218
            • 1 Log into the BUI.

              218
          • 2 Click Upgrade the Firmware Version in the Dashboard. The Firmware Upgrade window opens. See

            218
            • 2 Click Upgrade the Firmware Version in the Dashboard. The Firmware Upgrade window opens. See

              218
              • Figure 94

                218
            • Figure 94 ICB Dashboard - FIrmware Upgrade window

              218
              • Figure 94 ICB Dashboard - FIrmware Upgrade window

                218
          • 3 Select the source of the new firmware version. If the source is an FTP server, specify the IP address, path, login user name, and password.

            218
            • 3 Select the source of the new firmware version. If the source is an FTP server, specify the IP address, path, login user name, and password.

              218
          • 4 Click Upgrade & Restart.

            218
            • 4 Click Upgrade & Restart.

              218
      • After upgrading the firmware, you must publish the new upgraded ICB form that comes with the firmware. See

        218
        • After upgrading the firmware, you must publish the new upgraded ICB form that comes with the firmware. See

          218
          • Procedure 34, “Upgrading the ICB form in the Organizational Forms Library,” on page -173

            218
      • The top-right corner of the Firmware Upgrade window shows the current hardware and firmware versions. The firmware version takes the form of “4.xx”, where 4 is the ICB release and xx is the firmware version number.

        218
        • The top-right corner of the Firmware Upgrade window shows the current hardware and firmware versions. The firmware version takes the form of “4.xx”, where 4 is the ICB release and xx is the firmware version number.

          218
      • The first step is to specify the upgrade source by clicking on one of the radio buttons. Depending on the source selected, the following procedures describe how to perform the firmware upgrade.

        218
        • The first step is to specify the upgrade source by clicking on one of the radio buttons. Depending on the source selected, the following procedures describe how to perform the firmware upgrade.

          218
      • Procedure 46 Firmware upgrade from ICB card upper socket

        219
        • Procedure 46 Firmware upgrade from ICB card upper socket

          219
          • 1 Click on the secondary PCMCIA device radio button.

            219
            • 1 Click on the secondary PCMCIA device radio button.

              219
          • 2 Insert the PCMCIA disk in the upper socket of the ICB card.

            219
            • 2 Insert the PCMCIA disk in the upper socket of the ICB card.

              219
          • 3 Click on the Upgrade & Restart button. The ICB copies the files from the upper socket and performs a restart. When the restart...

            219
            • 3 Click on the Upgrade & Restart button. The ICB copies the files from the upper socket and performs a restart. When the restart...

              219
      • Procedure 47 Firmware upgrade using FTP

        220
        • Procedure 47 Firmware upgrade using FTP

          220
          • 1 Click on the FTP Server radio button.

            220
            • 1 Click on the FTP Server radio button.

              220
          • 2 Enter the FTP parameters in the fields the window provides as follows:

            220
            • 2 Enter the FTP parameters in the fields the window provides as follows:

              220
            • a IP address - the remote FTP server where the upgrade files are stored.

              220
              • a IP address - the remote FTP server where the upgrade files are stored.

                220
            • b Path to file - path of the folder on the computer where the upgrade files are stored (for example, c:\ICB\4_01).

              220
              • b Path to file - path of the folder on the computer where the upgrade files are stored (for example, c:\ICB\4_01).

                220
            • c Login - login name for FTP.

              220
              • c Login - login name for FTP.

                220
            • d Password - password for FTP login.

              220
              • d Password - password for FTP login.

                220
          • 3 Click on the Get Files button to start the FTP transfer session.

            220
            • 3 Click on the Get Files button to start the FTP transfer session.

              220
          • 4 After the previous steps finishes, click on the Upgrade & Restart button. The ICB copies the files from the FTP server and per...

            220
            • 4 After the previous steps finishes, click on the Upgrade & Restart button. The ICB copies the files from the FTP server and per...

              220
    • Upgrade to the single DN access method

      220
      • Upgrade to the single DN access method

        220
      • Follow the steps in

        220
        • Follow the steps in

          220
          • Procedure 48

            220
      • Procedure 48 Upgrade to single DN access

        220
        • Procedure 48 Upgrade to single DN access

          220
          • 1 Follow

            220
            • 1 Follow

              220
              • Procedure 43 on page 215

                220
          • 2 Configure the DNs.

            220
            • 2 Configure the DNs.

              220
            • a Remove the DN pairs from the switch datafill. For more information, if your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see

              220
              • a Remove the DN pairs from the switch datafill. For more information, if your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see

                220
                • “Assign ACD DNs” on page 48

                  220
                • “Single-card configuration” on page 55

                  220
              • Note: DN pairs can be left in the ICB. Callers to existing conferences configured with direct access DNs will be requested to enter the access DN to reach the meeting.

                220
                • Note: DN pairs can be left in the ICB. Callers to existing conferences configured with direct access DNs will be requested to enter the access DN to reach the meeting.

                  220
            • b Configure the single access DN in the switch. For more information, if your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see

              220
              • b Configure the single access DN in the switch. For more information, if your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see

                220
                • “Assign ACD DNs” on page 48

                  220
                • “Single-card configuration” on page 55

                  220
              • Note: This DN should be forwarded to the ICB card main ACD DN.

                220
                • Note: This DN should be forwarded to the ICB card main ACD DN.

                  220
          • 3 Access the ICB Installation Wizard and perform the following (see

            220
            • 3 Access the ICB Installation Wizard and perform the following (see

              220
              • “Step 2 - Access Numbers” on page 76

                220
            • a Click on the first radio button for the single DN access method.

              220
              • a Click on the first radio button for the single DN access method.

                220
            • b Enter the new single-access DN.

              220
              • b Enter the new single-access DN.

                220
            • c Click on the Submit & Continue button. The new single DN access method now applies.

              221
              • c Click on the Submit & Continue button. The new single DN access method now applies.

                221
          • 4 Instruct users to dial the single DN for future conferences.

            221
            • 4 Instruct users to dial the single DN for future conferences.

              221
            • Note: Make sure the notification e-mail content is still valid.

              221
              • Note: Make sure the notification e-mail content is still valid.

                221
    • Upgrade from a stand-alone to a dual-card ICB

      221
      • Upgrade from a stand-alone to a dual-card ICB

        221
      • This section describes how to upgrade an ICB Release 4 card operating as a stand-alone ICB to be either the primary or secondary card in a dual-card configuration.

        221
        • This section describes how to upgrade an ICB Release 4 card operating as a stand-alone ICB to be either the primary or secondary card in a dual-card configuration.

          221
      • The main issue to consider is the DN pairs: a single card can have up to 10 DN pairs, whereas a dual card can have only nine DN pairs, plus the dual-card meetings DN.

        221
        • The main issue to consider is the DN pairs: a single card can have up to 10 DN pairs, whereas a dual card can have only nine DN pairs, plus the dual-card meetings DN.

          221
      • When upgrading or configuring a dual-card ICB Release 4 configuration, the secondary card must be configured before the primary card. Therefore,

        221
        • When upgrading or configuring a dual-card ICB Release 4 configuration, the secondary card must be configured before the primary card. Therefore,

          221
          • Procedure 49

            221
          • Procedure 50

            221
      • Procedure 49 Stand-alone card to secondary card

        221
        • Procedure 49 Stand-alone card to secondary card

          221
          • 1 Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window (see

            221
            • 1 Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window (see

              221
              • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                221
          • 2 Click the Submit & Continue button.

            221
            • 2 Click the Submit & Continue button.

              221
            • If 10 DN pairs are configured, the system deletes one automatically. The ICB first attempts to delete a DN pair that has no conf...

              221
            • Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.

              221
              • Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.

                221
            • If a DN pair is deleted in direct-access dialing mode, a pop-up message appears. Note the deleted DN pair, as it can be removed from the Meridian switch configuration.

              221
          • 3 The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see

            221
            • 3 The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see

              221
              • “Step 2 - Access Numbers” on page 76

                221
          • 4 Click the Submit & Continue button. The system saves the change and the screen returns to the ICB Dashboard.

            221
            • 4 Click the Submit & Continue button. The system saves the change and the screen returns to the ICB Dashboard.

              221
          • 5 Logout of this card and proceed to the primary ICB configuration.

            221
            • 5 Logout of this card and proceed to the primary ICB configuration.

              221
      • Procedure 50 Stand-alone card to primary card

        222
        • Procedure 50 Stand-alone card to primary card

          222
          • 1 Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window (see

            222
            • 1 Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 - Basic Card Settings window (see

              222
              • “Step 1 - Basic Card Settings” on page 73

                222
          • 2 Click the Submit & Continue button.

            222
            • 2 Click the Submit & Continue button.

              222
              • 2 Click the Submit & Continue button.

                222
              • If 10 DN pairs are configured, the system deletes one automatically. The ICB first attempts to delete a DN pair that has no conf...

                222
              • Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.

                222
                • Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.

                  222
              • If a DN pair is deleted in direct-access dialing mode, a pop-up message appears. Note the deleted DN pair, as it can be removed from the Meridian switch configuration.

                222
          • 3 The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see

            222
            • 3 The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see

              222
              • “Step 2 - Access Numbers” on page 76

                222
          • 4 Click the Submit & Continue button.

            222
            • 4 Click the Submit & Continue button.

              222
          • 5 The system displays Step 4 of the Installation Wizard (see

            222
            • 5 The system displays Step 4 of the Installation Wizard (see

              222
              • “Step 4 - Dual Card Meetings” on page 77

                222
            • If a DN pair was automatically deleted as described above, it appears in the fields “Conference access number” and “Chairperson number in primary card.” You can change these numbers; they must be configured in the Meridian switch as well.

              222
            • Fill in all the fields as described in the installation instructions, and click the Finish button.

              222
          • 6 Logout of this card and proceed with the Meridian switch configuration change (see

            222
            • 6 Logout of this card and proceed with the Meridian switch configuration change (see

              222
              • Procedure 51

                222
      • Procedure 51 Meridian switch configuration changes

        222
        • Procedure 51 Meridian switch configuration changes

          222
          • 1 If a DN pair was deleted from the secondary or primary card, delete it from the switch datafill.

            222
            • 1 If a DN pair was deleted from the secondary or primary card, delete it from the switch datafill.

              222
          • 2 Configure the DNs defined in the Installation Wizard Step 4 window of the primary ICB. Define them as described in the dual-card ICB installation instructions (for the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 see

            222
            • 2 Configure the DNs defined in the Installation Wizard Step 4 window of the primary ICB. Define them as described in the dual-card ICB installation instructions (for the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 see

              222
              • 2 Configure the DNs defined in the Installation Wizard Step 4 window of the primary ICB. Define them as described in the dual-card ICB installation instructions (for the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 see

                222
                • “Configure DNs for a dual-card conference” on page 52

                  222
                • “Dual-card configuration” on page 60

                  222
• Appendix A: Password security

  223
  • Appendix A: Password security

    223
  • Purpose

    223
    • Purpose

      223
    • This chapter describes ICB Release 4 password protection and access restrictions.

      223
      • This chapter describes ICB Release 4 password protection and access restrictions.

        223
    • The chapter contains the following sections:

      223
      • The chapter contains the following sections:

        223
      • . “Access permissions” on page 224 - lists the security options available with the ICB Release 4 system.

        223
        • . “Access permissions” on page 224 - lists the security options available with the ICB Release 4 system.

          223
          • . “Access permissions” on page 224 - lists the security options available with the ICB Release 4 system.

            223
            • . “Access permissions” on page 224

              223
        • . “Unsuccessful login attempt handling” on page 225 - describes how the ICB handles unsuccessful logins.

          223
          • . “Unsuccessful login attempt handling” on page 225 - describes how the ICB handles unsuccessful logins.

            223
            • . “Unsuccessful login attempt handling” on page 225

              223
        • . “Password parameters summary” on page 226 - summarizes the default login names and passwords, and their parameters

          223
          • . “Password parameters summary” on page 226 - summarizes the default login names and passwords, and their parameters

            223
            • . “Password parameters summary” on page 226

              223
        • . “Reset passwords” on page 227 - provides procedures for resetting passwords.

          223
          • . “Reset passwords” on page 227 - provides procedures for resetting passwords.

            223
            • . “Reset passwords” on page 227

              223
  • Access permissions

    224
    • Access permissions

      224
    • ICB Release 4 provides strict password protections and other mechanisms to restrict access from unauthorized personnel (see

      224
      • ICB Release 4 provides strict password protections and other mechanisms to restrict access from unauthorized personnel (see

        224
        • Table 58

          224
      • <TABLE>

        224
        • Table 58 Access permissions

          224
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          224
          • <TABLE ROW>

            224
            • Access type

              224
            • Description of permissions

              224
        • <TABLE BODY>

          224
          • <TABLE ROW>

            224
            • BUI (HTTP server web access)

              224
            • 1 Login name and password. The login name is a combination of letters and digits up to 10 characters in length. The password con...

              224
              • 1 Login name and password. The login name is a combination of letters and digits up to 10 characters in length. The password con...

                224
                • 1 Login name and password. The login name is a combination of letters and digits up to 10 characters in length. The password con...

                  224
                  • 1 Login name and password. The login name is a combination of letters and digits up to 10 characters in length. The password con...

                    224
              • 2 The system does not permit multiple, simultaneous BUI sessions for the same user. When a user logs into the BUI, no one else c...

                224
                • 2 The system does not permit multiple, simultaneous BUI sessions for the same user. When a user logs into the BUI, no one else c...

                  224
                  • 2 The system does not permit multiple, simultaneous BUI sessions for the same user. When a user logs into the BUI, no one else c...

                    224
                  • 3 You can access only the initial login window when you enter the BUI’s URL from your web browser. You cannot access any other page or file directly.

                    224
                  • 4 The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The administrator defines the time-out parameter.

                    224
          • <TABLE ROW>

            224
            • CLI (direct connection)

              224
            • 1 There are two login levels. Each level has a login name and password, both of which are changeable through the CLI. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

              224
              • 1 There are two login levels. Each level has a login name and password, both of which are changeable through the CLI. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                224
                • 1 There are two login levels. Each level has a login name and password, both of which are changeable through the CLI. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                  224
                  • 1 There are two login levels. Each level has a login name and password, both of which are changeable through the CLI. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                    224
              • 2 The CLI does not print the password when it is being entered.

                224
                • 2 The CLI does not print the password when it is being entered.

                  224
                  • 2 The CLI does not print the password when it is being entered.

                    224
                  • 3 The system records every successful login as an information message in the error log.

                    224
                  • 4 Upon a successful login, the CLI prints the login date and time.

                    224
                  • 5 The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The administrator defines the time-out parameter.

                    224
          • <TABLE ROW>

            224
            • Telnet (server access)

              224
            • 1 Remote access using telnet requires a dedicated login name and password. Successful login provides access to the CLI, which, in turn, requires its own access and login as described above. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

              224
              • 1 Remote access using telnet requires a dedicated login name and password. Successful login provides access to the CLI, which, in turn, requires its own access and login as described above. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                224
                • 1 Remote access using telnet requires a dedicated login name and password. Successful login provides access to the CLI, which, in turn, requires its own access and login as described above. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                  224
                  • 1 Remote access using telnet requires a dedicated login name and password. Successful login provides access to the CLI, which, in turn, requires its own access and login as described above. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                    224
              • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                224
                • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                  224
                  • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                    224
                  • 3 The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The administrator defines the time-out parameter.

                    224
          • <TABLE ROW>

            225
            • FTP (server access)

              225
            • 1 Remote access using FTP requires a dedicated login name and password. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

              225
              • 1 Remote access using FTP requires a dedicated login name and password. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                225
                • 1 Remote access using FTP requires a dedicated login name and password. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                  225
                  • 1 Remote access using FTP requires a dedicated login name and password. The name and password can contain letters and digits.

                    225
              • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                225
                • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                  225
                  • 2 The system records every successful login as an informational message in the error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.

                    225
                  • 3 The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The administrator defines the time-out parameter.

                    225
          • <TABLE ROW>

            225
            • General

              225
            • 1 The system always encrypts files containing passwords.

              225
              • 1 The system always encrypts files containing passwords.

                225
                • 1 The system always encrypts files containing passwords.

                  225
                  • 1 The system always encrypts files containing passwords.

                    225
              • 2 An administrator defines the minimum length of the login name and password. The system enforces the minimum requirement when a...

                225
                • 2 An administrator defines the minimum length of the login name and password. The system enforces the minimum requirement when a...

                  225
                  • 2 An administrator defines the minimum length of the login name and password. The system enforces the minimum requirement when a...

                    225
                  • 3 The maximum password length is 16 characters, which is hard-coded.

                    225
                  • 4 The IP/LAN connectivity provides access through the LAN using HTTP, Telnet and FTP only.

                    225
  • Unsuccessful login attempt handling

    225
    • Unsuccessful login attempt handling

      225
    • Procedure 52 shows how the system handles unsuccessful login attempts.

      225
      • Procedure 52 shows how the system handles unsuccessful login attempts.

        225
        • Procedure 52

          225
    • Procedure 52 Unsuccessful login operation

      225
      • Procedure 52 Unsuccessful login operation

        225
        • 1 No action is required for this procedure. However, observe the activities in the following steps and report any system discrepancies to your support technician.

          225
          • 1 No action is required for this procedure. However, observe the activities in the following steps and report any system discrepancies to your support technician.

            225
        • 2 For each faulty login, the system issues a message in the error log and the CLI. This applies to all access types: BUI; TUI; CLI; and Telnet. The following is an example of the message format (for more information on error messages, see

          225
          • 2 For each faulty login, the system issues a message in the error log and the CLI. This applies to all access types: BUI; TUI; CLI; and Telnet. The following is an example of the message format (for more information on error messages, see

            225
            • “Error message handling” on page 183

              225
        • 3 The ICB counts consecutive login attempts. When the count reaches the “maximum faulty login attempts” parameter set by the administrator, the system performs the following:

          225
          • 3 The ICB counts consecutive login attempts. When the count reaches the “maximum faulty login attempts” parameter set by the administrator, the system performs the following:

            225
          • a BUI user and administrator access - After five consecutive faulty login attempts in which the login name is correct, but the password is wrong, the system blocks this login name. The administrator must reset the name to resume normal login operation.

            225
            • a BUI user and administrator access - After five consecutive faulty login attempts in which the login name is correct, but the password is wrong, the system blocks this login name. The administrator must reset the name to resume normal login operation.

              225
          • b CLI access - After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system blocks the CLI for a period of time. The administrator can define the blocking time period.

            225
            • b CLI access - After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system blocks the CLI for a period of time. The administrator can define the blocking time period.

              225
          • c Telnet access - After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system closes the connection. An administrator can define the “new connection refused” time period.

            226
            • c Telnet access - After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system closes the connection. An administrator can define the “new connection refused” time period.

              226
          • d TUI access - After three unsuccessful login attempts, the system disconnects the call.

            226
            • d TUI access - After three unsuccessful login attempts, the system disconnects the call.

              226
  • Password parameters summary

    226
    • Password parameters summary

      226
    • Table 59 shows the ICB Release 4 default login names and passwords.

      226
      • Table 59 shows the ICB Release 4 default login names and passwords.

        226
        • Table 59

          226
      • <TABLE>

        226
        • Table 59 Default login names and passwords

          226
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Access type

              226
            • Default login name

              226
            • Default password

              226
        • <TABLE BODY>

          226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • User BUI login (multiple users)

              226
            • No default

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Administration BUI login (multiple administrators)

              226
            • No default (see Note 1)

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • TUI login (multiple users)

              226
            • No default

              226
            • Equal to BUI password

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • CLI first level

              226
            • admin

              226
            • - (see Note 2)

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • CLI second level

              226
            • debug

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Telnet

              226
            • MICB

              226
            • admin

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • FTP

              226
            • MICB

              226
            • admin

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Note 1: Initially, one administrator account exists: “admin”.

              226
              • Note 1: Initially, one administrator account exists: “admin”.

                226
                • Note 1: Initially, one administrator account exists: “admin”.

                  226
              • Note 2: The CLI’s default passwords are empty (that is, no password).

                226
                • Note 2: The CLI’s default passwords are empty (that is, no password).

                  226
    • Table 60 summarizes the security parameters and their defaults.

      226
      • Table 60 summarizes the security parameters and their defaults.

        226
        • Table 60

          226
      • <TABLE>

        226
        • Table 60 Security parameters summary

          226
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Parameter

              226
            • Range

              226
            • Default value

              226
        • <TABLE BODY>

          226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Minimum login name length

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Minimum password length

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • Maximum password length

              226
            • Hard-coded

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • CLI maximum unsuccessful login attempts

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • CLI blocking period after “Maximum unsuccessful login” is exceeded

              226
            • 1-1440 seconds

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            226
            • CLI inactivity time-out

              226
            • 1-1440 minutes

              226
          • <TABLE ROW>

            227
            • Telnet blocking period after “maximum unsuccessful login:” is exceeded

              227
            • 1-1440 seconds

              227
          • <TABLE ROW>

            227
            • Telnet maximum unsuccessful login attempts

              227
          • <TABLE ROW>

            227
            • Telnet inactivity time-out

              227
            • 1-1440 minutes

              227
          • <TABLE ROW>

            227
            • FTP inactivity time-out

              227
            • 1-1440 minutes

              227
          • <TABLE ROW>

            227
            • BUI inactivity time-out

              227
            • 1-1440 minutes

              227
  • Reset passwords

    227
    • Reset passwords

      227
    • Follow the steps in

      227
      • Follow the steps in

        227
        • Procedure 53

          227
    • Procedure 53 Reset forgotten passwords

      227
      • Procedure 53 Reset forgotten passwords

        227
        • 1 The administrator can reset any BUI password through the user management BUI. One administrator can also reset another administrator’s password.

          227
          • 1 The administrator can reset any BUI password through the user management BUI. One administrator can also reset another administrator’s password.

            227
        • 2 When an administrator forget’s their BUI password, and there is no other administrator, the password can be reset from the CLI...

          227
          • 2 When an administrator forget’s their BUI password, and there is no other administrator, the password can be reset from the CLI...

            227
        • 3 When system passwords are forgotten (that is, Telnet, FTP, and CLI first level), the passwords can be viewed from the second level of the CLI.

          227
          • 3 When system passwords are forgotten (that is, Telnet, FTP, and CLI first level), the passwords can be viewed from the second level of the CLI.

            227
        • 4 When the second level CLI password is forgotten, perform the following steps.

          227
          • 4 When the second level CLI password is forgotten, perform the following steps.

            227
          • a Connect a CRT (or terminal emulation on a PC) directly to the back of the card’s serial port.

            227
            • a Connect a CRT (or terminal emulation on a PC) directly to the back of the card’s serial port.

              227
          • b Perform a manual power-up as follows:

            227
            • b Perform a manual power-up as follows:

              227
            • i Pull the card out of the slot.

              227
              • i Pull the card out of the slot.

                227
            • ii Plug the card back into the shelf. The ICB starts the power-up process.

              227
              • ii Plug the card back into the shelf. The ICB starts the power-up process.

                227
          • c Wait for the following banner to appear: ******************************************** ************************

            228
            • c Wait for the following banner to appear: ******************************************** ************************

              228
            • * Running MAIN CODE!!! *

              228
          • d Enter the token default. This token must be entered within 15 seconds of the banner’s appearance. The restart process continues and more lines of text may appear.

            228
            • d Enter the token default. This token must be entered within 15 seconds of the banner’s appearance. The restart process continues and more lines of text may appear.

              228
          • e When the power-up process completes and the CLI is ready for input, enter the factory-default second level password (that is, login = debug; password = no password).

            228
            • e When the power-up process completes and the CLI is ready for input, enter the factory-default second level password (that is, login = debug; password = no password).

              228
          • f Access the password editing command to display or modify the CLI name and password (see

            228
            • f Access the password editing command to display or modify the CLI name and password (see

              228
              • Procedure 54

                228
    • Follow the steps in

      228
      • Follow the steps in

        228
        • Procedure 54

          228
    • Procedure 54 Use the second-level CLI edit password command

      228
      • Procedure 54 Use the second-level CLI edit password command

        228
        • 1 Enter the second-level login name and password.

          228
          • 1 Enter the second-level login name and password.

            228
        • 2 Enter PA Admin (or pa). The CLI displays a list of available commands.

          228
          • 2 Enter PA Admin (or pa). The CLI displays a list of available commands.

            228
        • 3 Enter the following command: PSweditor (or ps). The ICB displays passwords and related parameters and prompts for values. The ...

          228
          • 3 Enter the following command: PSweditor (or ps). The ICB displays passwords and related parameters and prompts for values. The ...

            228
    • CLI Password Editor editing session

      229
      • CLI Password Editor editing session

        229
      • The following is a example of using a CLI password editing session to change an FTP password.

        229
        • The following is a example of using a CLI password editing session to change an FTP password.

          229
          • Table 61

            229
        • <TABLE>

          229
          • Table 61 Password example font conventions

            229
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            229
            • <TABLE ROW>

              229
              • Font

                229
              • Description

                229
          • <TABLE BODY>

            229
            • <TABLE ROW>

              229
              • Mono

                229
              • Prompts of text displayed by the CLI.

                229
            • <TABLE ROW>

              229
              • Bold

                229
              • User input.

                229
            • <TABLE ROW>

              229
              • // Italics

                229
              • Explanations and comments.

                229
      • Values in the examples are not necessarily the defaults.

        229
        • Values in the examples are not necessarily the defaults.

          229
      • CLI change to FTP Password example

        229
        • CLI change to FTP Password example

          229
        • ps // Administrator entered PSweditor // ICB displays section name and its parameters, and prompts for action: section [MIN_LENG...

          229
          • ps // Administrator entered PSweditor // ICB displays section name and its parameters, and prompts for action: section [MIN_LENG...

            229
        • n // next: go to next section section [TELNET] Telnet user name: micbtln Telnet password: xyzu1234 Maximum allowed Telnet login ...

          229
          • n // next: go to next section section [TELNET] Telnet user name: micbtln Telnet password: xyzu1234 Maximum allowed Telnet login ...

            229
        • m // modify this section section [FTP] FTP user name: micbftp3 (4-30 chars): <cr> // empty input FTP password: abcd1234 (8-30 ch...

          230
          • m // modify this section section [FTP] FTP user name: micbftp3 (4-30 chars): <cr> // empty input FTP password: abcd1234 (8-30 ch...

            230
  • Application Protocol Port Numbers

    231
    • Application Protocol Port Numbers

      231
    • Refer to

      231
      • Refer to

        231
        • Table 62

          231
      • <TABLE>

        231
        • Table 62 Application Protocol Port Numbers

          231
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • Application

              231
            • Port Number

              231
        • <TABLE BODY>

          231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • Telnet

              231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • FTP

              231
            • 21, 20

              231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • SMTP

              231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • HTTP

              231
          • <TABLE ROW>

            231
            • Dual ICB cards

              231
            • 3700 (uses proprietary port)

              231
• Appendix B: Product integrity

  233
  • Appendix B: Product integrity

    233
  • Environmental specifications

    233
    • Environmental specifications

      233
    • ICB environmental requirements meet, or exceed, Meridian system requirements. The power provided for each card slot in the IPE module exceeds the power requirements for an ICB.

      233
      • ICB environmental requirements meet, or exceed, Meridian system requirements. The power provided for each card slot in the IPE module exceeds the power requirements for an ICB.

        233
        • Table 63

          233
      • <TABLE>

        233
        • Table 63 ICB environmental specifications

          233
        • <TABLE HEADING>

          233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Specification

              233
            • Minimum

              233
            • Maximum

              233
        • <TABLE BODY>

          233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Normal Operation

              233
            • Recommended

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Temperature

              233
            • 15° C

              233
            • 30° C

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Relative humidity

              233
            • 10%

              233
            • 55% (non-condensing)

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Absolute

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Temperature

              233
            • 0° C

              233
            • 45° C

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Relative humidity

              233
            • 5% to

              233
            • 95% (non-condensing)

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Rate of change

              233
            • Less than 1° C per 3 minutes

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Storage

              233
            • Long Term

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Temperature

              233
            • - 40° C

              233
            • 70° C

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Relative humidity

              233
            • 0%

              233
            • 95% (non-condensing)

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • - 40° C to 70° C, non-condensing

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Short Term (less than 72 hr.)

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            233
            • Temperature

              233
            • - 40° C

              233
            • 70° C

              233
          • <TABLE ROW>

            234
            • Temperature Shock

              234
            • In three minutes

              234
            • - 40° C to

              234
            • 25° C

              234
          • <TABLE ROW>

            234
            • In three minutes

              234
            • 25° C to

              234
            • 70° C

              234
          • <TABLE ROW>

            234
            • - 40° to 70° C, non-condensing

              234
  • Regulatory standards

    234
    • Regulatory standards

      234
    • The following tables list the safety and electro-magnetic compatibility regulatory standards for the ICB, by geographic region. Specifications for the ICB meet, or exceed, the standards listed in the regulations for these regions.

      234
      • The following tables list the safety and electro-magnetic compatibility regulatory standards for the ICB, by geographic region. Specifications for the ICB meet, or exceed, the standards listed in the regulations for these regions.

        234
    • Safety

      234
      • Safety

        234
      • Table 64 provides a list of safety regulations met by the ICB, and the type of regulation and the country or region covered by each regulation.

        234
        • Table 64 provides a list of safety regulations met by the ICB, and the type of regulation and the country or region covered by each regulation.

          234
          • Table 64

            234
        • <TABLE>

          234
          • Table 64 Safety regulations

            234
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • Regulation Identifier

                234
              • Regulatory Agency

                234
          • <TABLE BODY>

            234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • UL 60950

                234
              • Safety, United States, CALA

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • CSA 22.2 225

                234
              • Safety, Canada

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • EN 41003, FCC part 68

                234
              • Safety, International Telecom

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • EN 60950/IEC 60950

                234
              • Safety, International

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1

                234
              • EMC/Safety (Switzerland)

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • AS3260, TS001 - TS004, TS006

                234
              • Safety/Network (Australia)

                234
            • <TABLE ROW>

              234
              • JATE

                234
              • Safety/Network (Japan)

                234
    • Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)

      235
      • Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)

        235
      • Table 65 lists electro-magnetic emissions regulations met by the ICB card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.

        235
        • Table 65 lists electro-magnetic emissions regulations met by the ICB card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.

          235
          • Table 65

            235
        • <TABLE>

          235
          • Table 65 Electro-magnetic emissions

            235
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • Regulation Identifier

                235
              • Regulatory Agency

                235
          • <TABLE BODY>

            235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • FCC part 15B Class A

                235
              • United States Radiated Emissions

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • CSA C108.8

                235
              • Canada Radiated Emissions

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN50081-1 EN300-386 V1.3.2

                235
              • European Community Generic Emission Standard

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN55022/CISPR 22 CLASS A

                235
              • Radiated Emissions (Basic Std.)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1

                235
              • EMC/Safety (Switzerland)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • SS-447-20-22

                235
              • Sweden EMC standard

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • AS/NZS 3548

                235
              • EMC (Australia/New Zealand)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • NFC 98020

                235
              • France EMC standard

                235
      • Table 66 lists electro-magnetic immunity regulations met by the ICB card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.

        235
        • Table 66 lists electro-magnetic immunity regulations met by the ICB card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.

          235
          • Table 66

            235
        • <TABLE>

          235
          • Table 66 Electro-magnetic immunity

            235
          • <TABLE HEADING>

            235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • Regulation Identifier

                235
              • Regulatory Agency

                235
          • <TABLE BODY>

            235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • CISPR 22 Sec. 20 Class A

                235
              • I/O conducted noise

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN300-368 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-2

                235
              • ESD (Basic Standard)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-3

                235
              • Radiated Immunity (Basic Standard)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-4

                235
              • Fast transient/Burst Immunity (Basic Standard)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-5

                235
              • Surge Immunity (Basic Standard)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-6

                235
              • Conducted Disturbances (Basic Standard)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1

                235
              • EMC/Safety (Switzerland)

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              235
              • SS-447-20-22

                235
              • Sweden EMC standard

                235
            • <TABLE ROW>

              236
              • AS/NZS 3548l

                236
              • EMC (Australia/New Zealand)

                236
            • <TABLE ROW>

              236
              • NFC 98020

                236
              • France EMC standard

                236
  • FCC Compliance

    236
    • FCC Compliance

      236
      • FCC Compliance

        236
      • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC R...

        236
        • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC R...

          236
          • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC R...

            236
            • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC R...

              236
              • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC R...

                236
    • The ICB MTBF will be better than 50 years for ground benign (GB) and 40° C ambient.

      236
      • The ICB MTBF will be better than 50 years for ground benign (GB) and 40° C ambient.

        236
• List of terms

  237
  • List of terms

    237
  • ACD

    237
    • ACD

      237
    • Automatic Call Distribution.

      237
      • Automatic Call Distribution.

        237
  • Browser User Interface

    237
    • Browser User Interface

      237
    • An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on conferences, users, and cards through a standard web browser.

      237
      • An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on conferences, users, and cards through a standard web browser.

        237
  • BUI

    237
    • BUI

      237
    • See Browser User Interface.

      237
      • See Browser User Interface.

        237
  • Chairperson DN

    237
    • Chairperson DN

      237
    • The directory number the conference chairperson dials to enter the conference.

      237
      • The directory number the conference chairperson dials to enter the conference.

        237
  • CLI

    237
    • CLI

      237
    • See Command Line Interface.

      237
      • See Command Line Interface.

        237
  • CLS

    237
    • CLS

      237
    • Class of Service.

      237
      • Class of Service.

        237
  • Command Line Interface

    237
    • Command Line Interface

      237
    • An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on cards through telnet or through a standard VT100 terminal.

      237
      • An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on cards through telnet or through a standard VT100 terminal.

        237
  • CPU

    237
    • CPU

      237
    • Central Processing Unit. A chip that performs logic, control, and arithmetic functions. The part of the switch that performs these functions and any others necessary to process calls.

      237
      • Central Processing Unit. A chip that performs logic, control, and arithmetic functions. The part of the switch that performs these functions and any others necessary to process calls.

        237
  • DID

    237
    • DID

      237
    • Direct Inward Dialing.

      237
      • Direct Inward Dialing.

        237
  • DLC

    237
    • DLC

      237
    • Digital Line Card.

      237
      • Digital Line Card.

        237
  • DN

    237
    • DN

      237
    • Directory Number.

      237
      • Directory Number.

        237
  • DRAM

    238
    • DRAM

      238
    • Dynamic Random Access Memory. A high density type of semi-conductor memory. It typically has slower access time than SRAM and requires external memory refresh circuitry.

      238
      • Dynamic Random Access Memory. A high density type of semi-conductor memory. It typically has slower access time than SRAM and requires external memory refresh circuitry.

        238
  • DSP

    238
    • DSP

      238
    • Digital Signal Processing. A specialized computer chip that performs speedy and complex operations on digitized waveforms. Useful in processing sound and video.

      238
      • Digital Signal Processing. A specialized computer chip that performs speedy and complex operations on digitized waveforms. Useful in processing sound and video.

        238
  • DTMF

    238
    • DTMF

      238
    • Dual Tone Multi-frequency. A term describing push-button or touch-tone dialing.

      238
      • Dual Tone Multi-frequency. A term describing push-button or touch-tone dialing.

        238
  • EMC

    238
    • EMC

      238
    • Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. Refers to equipment units that perform their functions without causing or suffering unacceptable electromagnetic interference from other equipment in the same environment.

      238
      • Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. Refers to equipment units that perform their functions without causing or suffering unacceptable electromagnetic interference from other equipment in the same environment.

        238
  • EMI

    238
    • EMI

      238
    • Electro-Magnetic Interference. Unwanted electromagnetic coupling, such as a ham radio heard on an electric organ or church music heard in hearing aids. Also known as “static”.

      238
      • Electro-Magnetic Interference. Unwanted electromagnetic coupling, such as a ham radio heard on an electric organ or church music heard in hearing aids. Also known as “static”.

        238
  • Firmware

    238
    • Firmware

      238
    • Hardwired logic, software, data, and programming instructions such as that stored by threading wires through ferrite cores. May also refer to software programmed in the factory or burnt in the field, and is semi-permanently stored within ROM.

      238
      • Hardwired logic, software, data, and programming instructions such as that stored by threading wires through ferrite cores. May also refer to software programmed in the factory or burnt in the field, and is semi-permanently stored within ROM.

        238
  • Flash memory

    238
    • Flash memory

      238
    • Electrically erasable memory that is non-volatile (not affected by power disruptions).

      238
      • Electrically erasable memory that is non-volatile (not affected by power disruptions).

        238
  • FTP

    238
    • FTP

      238
    • File Transfer Protocol.

      238
      • File Transfer Protocol.

        238
  • HTTP

    238
    • HTTP

      238
    • Hypertext Transfer Protocol.

      238
      • Hypertext Transfer Protocol.

        238
  • ICB

    238
    • ICB

      238
    • Integrated Conference Bridge.

      238
      • Integrated Conference Bridge.

        238
  • IP

    238
    • IP

      238
    • Internet Protocol.

      238
      • Internet Protocol.

        238
  • IPE

    238
    • IPE

      238
    • Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. A range of cards that contain micro- processors that provide off-loading of the CPU function and the flexibility to make changes to the system's parameters without revising the hardware.

      238
      • Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. A range of cards that contain micro- processors that provide off-loading of the CPU function and the flexibility to make changes to the system's parameters without revising the hardware.

        238
  • ISM

    239
    • ISM

      239
    • Incremental Software Management.

      239
      • Incremental Software Management.

        239
  • LAN

    239
    • LAN

      239
    • Local Area Network.

      239
      • Local Area Network.

        239
  • LED

    239
    • LED

      239
    • Light Emitting Diode.

      239
      • Light Emitting Diode.

        239
  • LEN

    239
    • LEN

      239
    • Line Equipment Number (CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 equivalent of TN).

      239
      • Line Equipment Number (CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 equivalent of TN).

        239
  • Main DN

    239
    • Main DN

      239
    • The directory number that conferees dial to enter the conference when using direct access.

      239
      • The directory number that conferees dial to enter the conference when using direct access.

        239
  • MAP

    239
    • MAP

      239
    • Maintenance and Administration Position.

      239
      • Maintenance and Administration Position.

        239
  • MAU

    239
    • MAU

      239
    • Medium Access Unit.

      239
      • Medium Access Unit.

        239
  • MMI

    239
    • MMI

      239
    • Man-Machine Interface.

      239
      • Man-Machine Interface.

        239
  • MPU

    239
    • MPU

      239
    • Microprocessor Unit.

      239
      • Microprocessor Unit.

        239
  • MTBF

    239
    • MTBF

      239
    • Mean Time Between Failure. A measure of reliability: the time that a user may reasonably expect a device or system to work befor...

      239
      • Mean Time Between Failure. A measure of reliability: the time that a user may reasonably expect a device or system to work befor...

        239
  • MTTR

    239
    • MTTR

      239
    • Mean Time To Repair.

      239
      • Mean Time To Repair.

        239
  • OA&M

    239
    • OA&M

      239
    • Operations, Administration, and Maintenance.

      239
      • Operations, Administration, and Maintenance.

        239
  • ONP

    239
    • ONP

      239
    • One Night Process. This is a term to define upgrades that occur over a single night when traffic is slower than during the day.

      239
      • One Night Process. This is a term to define upgrades that occur over a single night when traffic is slower than during the day.

        239
  • PBX

    240
    • PBX

      240
    • Private Branch Exchange. A telephony switch that is privately owned.

      240
      • Private Branch Exchange. A telephony switch that is privately owned.

        240
  • PCM

    240
    • PCM

      240
    • Pulse Code Modulation.

      240
      • Pulse Code Modulation.

        240
  • PCMCIA

    240
    • PCMCIA

      240
    • Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. This organization has defined a credit card sized plug-in board for use...

      240
      • Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. This organization has defined a credit card sized plug-in board for use...

        240
  • RTS

    240
    • RTS

      240
    • Return To Service.

      240
      • Return To Service.

        240
  • SCSI

    240
    • SCSI

      240
    • Small Computer System Interface. A device that enables computers to cable-connect to networks or external tape units/hard drives.

      240
      • Small Computer System Interface. A device that enables computers to cable-connect to networks or external tape units/hard drives.

        240
  • SDI

    240
    • SDI

      240
    • Serial Data Interface. For some Meridian switches, provides ports between the CPU and external devices such as a teletype or mai...

      240
      • Serial Data Interface. For some Meridian switches, provides ports between the CPU and external devices such as a teletype or mai...

        240
  • SDN

    240
    • SDN

      240
    • Secondary Directory Number.

      240
      • Secondary Directory Number.

        240
  • SMTP

    240
    • SMTP

      240
    • Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

      240
      • Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

        240
  • Telephone User Interface

    240
    • Telephone User Interface

      240
    • An interface that allows the scheduling of simple conferences over a DTMF telephone.

      240
      • An interface that allows the scheduling of simple conferences over a DTMF telephone.

        240
  • TN

    240
    • TN

      240
    • Terminal Number (CS 1000 equivalent of LEN).

      240
      • Terminal Number (CS 1000 equivalent of LEN).

        240
  • TUI

    240
    • TUI

      240
    • See Telephone User Interface.

      240
      • See Telephone User Interface.

        240
  • .WAV

    240
    • .WAV

      240
    • File format used for storing voice files created under Microsoft Windows.

      240
      • File format used for storing voice files created under Microsoft Windows.

        240
  • XPM

    241
    • XPM

      241
    • Extended Peripheral Module.

      241
      • Extended Peripheral Module.

        241